Africa being an accurate description of the regions of Ægypt, Barbary, Lybia, and Billedulgerid, the land of Negroes, Guinee, Æthiopia and the Abyssines : with all the adjacent islands, either in the Mediterranean, Atlantick, Southern or Oriental Sea, belonging thereunto : with the several denominations fo their coasts, harbors, creeks, rivers, lakes, cities, towns, castles, and villages, their customs, modes and manners, languages, religions and inexhaustible treasure : with their governments and policy, variety of trade and barter : and also of their wonderful plants, beasts, birds and serpents : collected and translated from most authentick authors and augmented with later observations : illustrated with notes and adorn'd with peculiar maps and proper sculptures / by John Ogilby, Esq. ...

[illustration]

AETHIOPIA INFERIOR vel EXTERIOR Partes magis Sept••••trionales, quae hie desilerantur. ride in tabula Aethiopia Superioris.

Nether Ethiopia 489 contains

• Lovando
  • Towns Cape, Bocle, Sofansa, Mokonda, where the Kings Mother lives, Sokn, Catta the Residence of the King's Siler, Lovango his own particular, Cango, Piri, two Chilongo's, Jamba Cosia, Seny, Gommo, Lanzy, Majumba, Setty, Gobby.
  • Rivers Several, but none particularly known.
• Ansiko
  • Towns Fe•••• or none, at best little known, the Inhabitants being all Cannibals.
  • Rivers Zaire, Umbre.
• Cacongo Goy
  • Towns Cacongo the Metropolis, Molemba, Lemba.
  • Rivers Cacongo the chief, Sonho.
• One City call'd Goy, and several small Rivers.
• Congo
  • Towns Panga, Mongomendoin, Jagado, Lengo, Mussula, Songo, Pinde, St. Salvador, Sundo, Pembo, Batta; besides abundance of poor Villages.
  • Rivers Danda, Zare, Barbele, Coango; the River of Red Sand, Brankan, Lelunde, Ambris, Encoco∣quemat••i, Loze, Onza, Bengo, Quanza.
  • Mountains Quibambi••, Mountains of the Sun; the Saltpeter Hills; the Burning Mountains, Otreiro.
• Macoco Towns Monsol, and scatter'd Huts in stead of Villages; the whole inhabited by Anthropophagi, or Men∣eaters.
• Giringboma Pombo Amboille Towns or Villages they have, by report, but generally unknown, so much as by name.
• Angola
  • Towns Lovando St. Paulo, Massagan, Cambamba, Embacca; the Fort Molls; the Town of St. Esprit, and six other.
  • Rivers Bengo, Quansa, Lucala, and Calucala.
  • Mountains Mora St. Paulo.
• Bengala
  • Towns Mani-cicorgo, the Fort Benquelle, Melonde, Peringe, Maniken, Somba, Maninomma, Maniken, Somba, Piken, and Manikilonde.
  • Rivers Rio Longo, Caton-belle.
  • Mountains Sombriera.
• Matama, or Climbebe
  • Rivers Bravagul, Magnice, Coari, Port Ambrose.
  • Mountains The cold Nountains, Christal Mountains.
  • Towns Molembo.
• Caffrary, or the Hottentots Countrey.
  • Towns The Cape of Good Hope, and about five hundred or six hundred scattering Houses.
  • Mountains Table-Mountain, Lion-Mount, Wind-Hill.
  • Rivers The Fresh, and the Salt Rivers, St. Christophers, Rio Jaquelina.
• Monomotapa
  • Towns Banamatapa, the Imperial City, Simbao, Safale, Zimbas, Tete, Sena, Tambura, Zenebra, Fatu∣ca, Tonge, Pombo d' Okango.
  • Rivers Magnice, Panhames, Luangoea Arraga, Manajova, Inandire, and Rueruy; all yielding Gold.
• Sofala
  • Towns Sofala, Cape das Correntas, Matuka, St. Eubastian, St. Catharine.
  • Rivers Magnice, Quamba.
• Zangebar
  • Towns Rapte a Haven, Quirimba an Island with 25 Houses.
  • Rivers Quilmami, Obi, Ango.
  • Mountains Graro.
• Mozambique
  • Towns Mozambile a large City, Mosambike Island, wherein two Cities and a strong Fort, Tintonas a Port-Town.
  • Rivers Mekingate.
• Quiloa
  • Towns Rapta, a stately City, old Quiloa.
  • Rivers. Cuavo.
• Mombaza
  • Towns Mombaza, and a Fort, besides abundance of Villages.
  • Rivers Onchit.
  • Mountains Amara.
• Melinde
  • Towns Melinde, a neat City, with a good Haven; Lambo, Pate where a Castle possess'd by the Portu•• guese and Ampaxa.
  • Rivers Quilmami.
• Ajan
  • Towns Ajan, a Sea-Port, Zoila, Barbore, Brava, Madagaxo, Barraboa, Barrama••, Ogabra.
  • Rivers Quilmanzi, yielding Gold, Oby.
• Adel, or Zeila
  • Towns Ara, Adel the Royal City, Orgabra, Migiate, Sequeta, Bali, Mautra, Doara, Comezara, Nove∣caru, and Soceli, Asuin, Guardafuy, Salir, Barbara, Methi.
  • Zeila, Dalacha and Malacha.
  • Rivers Hoax, Macli.
• Socotora Island Towns Sicuthora.
• Trogloditica Ercocco
  • The Point of Phares, Sette Pozzi, Alkosser Haven, Batrazan.
  • The Haven of the same name; the Islands Mazula, Dalaca, and Beb••lman••••l, Suachem, and Fartaq••e.

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

NETHER ETHIOPIA.

HAving perform'd a serious Journey through Negro∣land; * 1.1 we come of course in the next place to a large spreading Countrey, by Geographers call'd Nether Ethiopia, containing divers Kingdoms, Countreys and People; as amongst others, those of Lovango, Cakon∣go, Goykongo, Congo, Angola; the Region of the Caffers; the Regal Commandries of Monomotaya, and Mone∣mugi; and the Territory of Zanguebar, with many other: It begins Northward of the River Faire, close by the Line, and spreads it self broad to the East and South, where it shoots into the Sea, with the most famous Promontory, in Portuguese call'd, Cabo de bona Esperanca, that is, The Cape of good Hope.

This, as to the extent wherein we shall more narrowly particularize, as we come into the several Parts: The first therefore presented to our view, is

The Kingdom of LOVANGO, OR THE Countrey of the BRAMAS.

LOvango, or as Pigafet, and other Geographers call it, Lovanga; * 1.2 and the Inhabitants at present Lovangas, though formerly Bramas, takes be∣ginning below the Cape of St. Catherine; and spreads South wardly to the small River Lovango Lonise, in six degrees South Latitude; by which di∣vided from that of Cakongo, upon the West wash'd by the Ethiopick Sea, * 1.3 and touch'd in the East by the Countrey of Pombo, about a hundred leagues from Lovango; but Pigafet borders it on the South, with the Cape of St. Ca∣therine, and spreads that Northerly to Cape Lope-Gonzalvez, and near one hundred leagues up into the Countrey.

Samuel Bruno sets for Boundaries in the South, the River Zair, or Kongo; and in the East, the People Ambois, and Anzikos.

This Kingdom contains many Provinces; among which the four chiefest are Lovangiri, * 1.4 Lovangomongo, Chilongo, and Piri.

Lovangiri hath the advantage of many small Rivers to water and refresh the Soyl, and by that means very fruitful, and exceeding full of People.

The Inhabitants use three manner of ways for their support, viz. Fishing, Weaving, and the Wars.

That of Lovangomongo is a large and Hilly Countrey, * 1.5 but hath much Cattel and Palmito-Trees; so that Palm-Oyl may be had cheap.

The Inhabitants are either Weavers or Merchants. From this Province the Kings of Lovango drew their original; but Time, and the vicissitudes of Affairs, hath almost deleated it: but at last having fresh information, and finding them∣selves more Potent in Arms, they invaded them, and reduced the Countrey to their subjection.

Chilongo exceeds all the other in bigness, * 1.6 being also very populous; in some places Mountainous, and in others Carpetted with verdant and delightful Plains and Valleys. The People, though naturally rude and clownish, yet utter great store of Elephants-Teeth. * 1.7

The Countrey of Piri lies plain and even, * 1.8 full of Inhabitants, well stor'd with Fruits and Woods, and stock'd with great abundance of Cattel, besides innumerable Poultry.

The Inhabitants are a quiet People, averse from Wars; and for their Car∣riage well belov'd by their King; and surpassing all their Neighbors in rich∣ness of Commodities: yet their chief Maintenance drawn from Pasturage and Hunting.

Lovango, * 1.9 according to the best intelligence that the Europeans can draw from the antientest, and most experienc'd Blacks, hath been divided into divers Ter∣ritories, as Majumba, Chilongo, Piri, Wansi, and Lovango, each inhabited by several People, and Rul'd by a particular Governor; who with or without any re∣spect, * 1.10 Warr'd upon his Neighbors.

In elder time the Natives were all wild, and Man-eaters, as yet the Jages are. They us'd for Bread, Bananos; and for other Food, that which they take in the Woods by Hunting, as Elephants, Buffles, wild Boars, Bucks, and such like; and likewise Fish, which the In-landers catch in the Rivers, and the Sea∣coasters out of the Sea.

When the aforemention'd Governors had these, * 1.11 as it were private Feuds, Mani Lovango, who boasted his Extract from Lerri in Kakongo, politickly made Leagues with some, who by their joynt force being subjected, an occasion of Quarrel was soon pickt with the rest, who all but Mani Wansa, though with great hazard, admitted the Yoke. But much trouble he had with Mani Wansa, and af∣terwards anew with Mani Piri, Mani Chilongo; by whom twice beaten, but by his great Power at last made his Vassals. Hereupon Mani Majumba, who most depended on Mani Chilongo, now seeing him enslaved, would not expect the Conquerer in Arms, but yielded himself to his Command; after whose exam∣ple all the Places lying Northerly, as Docke, Seere, and others, rather stooped under the Power of so successful and victorious a Lord, than suffer by the force of his Arms, followed the same course, and timely submitted.

Mani Lovango having thus triumphantly brought his Enemies under, divided their Countrey among his chiefest Counsellors of Trust, and committing the

[illustration]

The City of Lovango DE STADT VAN LOUANGO.

care of 〈…〉〈…〉 and liv'd in Piri. But the Place he first se∣lected not pleasing▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for its Mountainousness, or that it lay too far from the Water, he went thence, and setled in a Place, where to this present the Kings of Lovango keep Court, the Name Banzat Lovangiri, or rather Lovango; but the Blacks call it Boary, being scituate in a part of Piri.

Of which Piri the Inhabitants were call'd Mouvirisser, or Mouviri, * 1.12 a com∣pound Word of Moutsie and Piri, Moutsie being a common Word, signifying People, so Moutsie Pir signifies People of Piri, and for brevity pronounced Mou∣viri. So likewise Lovangiri shews the contraction of Lovango and Piri, which join'd together makes Lovangopiri, and for quickness of speech Lovangiri.

Moreover, the better to secure his new gotten State, Mani Lovango setled his Brothers or Sisters in the greatest Cities or Towns about him, viz. in Cape, to have a vigilant eye over whatever might threaten danger from above, and in Bocke, Chilongo, and Salaly, to supervise and prevent any sudden Onslaught from below.

The chiefest Towns and Villages of Lovango, are Cape, Bocke, Solansa, Mokon∣da, where the King's Mother lives; Soku, Catta, the Residence of the King's Sisters, Lovanga, his own peculiar, Cango, Piri, two Chilongo's, Jamba, Cotie, Seny, Gonmo, Lanzy: the chiefest Villages lie a days, or a day and a halfs Journey from Lovango, besides many small ones farther into the Countrey, as Jamba, Cango, Cayt, Bocke, Piri, Cotie, and the Chilongo's.

The Metropolis, and Imperial Chamber of this Kingdom, * 1.13 lying in four Degrees and a half South Latitude, about a mile from the Sea, hath for Name, Lovango, or Barra Lovangiri; yet the Blacks forget not its old Denomination Boary, or Bury.

The Ground-plat of it takes as much in compass, * 1.14 as our famous City of York in England, but much more straglingly built. It hath large, streight and broad Streets; of which the Inhabitants take great care, that no Grass grow, nor any Soil lie in them: They stand in very good order, and are neatly Planted with Palmito-Trees, Bananos and Bakoros, * 1.15 which stand as streight as it were by a Line. Some of those Trees also stand behind the Houses, and sometimes quite round about, serving not onely for an Ornament, but also for a Shelter and Shadow.

In the middle of which you come to a great Market-place, * 1.16 by whose side stands the King's Court, surrounded with a Hedge of Palm-Trees, contain∣ing in circuit as much as are in ordinary Towns, beautifi'd with many Hou∣ses for his Women, that live six or eight together, not daring to stir from their appointed Stations without the King's leave, or the Overseers, which use a diligent and jealous eye over them.

The Houses are built long-ways, with two Gable Ends, and a sloaping Roof, which rests on long thick Posts, that lie upon Stays about two or three Fathom high. The breadth, length, and heighth of them is near alike, that they may stand in equal and uniform distances; and within they have some∣times two or three Rooms or Chambers apart; in one of which they keep their Riches, and that hath Doors at the hinder end, lockt up with a double Lock: some have round about a Fence of Palm-Boughs plash'd; others of Bulrushes wreath'd; some make Lebonge, or Wickers, braided together, which inclose six, eight, or more Houses, and they dwell in them as in a Precinct, be∣ing to each other very trusty, and in all accidents helpful.

Their Housholdstuff consists chiefly in Pots, Calabasses, Wooden Trays, * 1.17

Mats, a Block whereon they put their Caps, some small and great Baskets, of a neat fashion, into which they put their Cloathes, and other trifling things.

Besides the aforemention'd Division of Lovango, * 1.18 other Territories lie about it, some of which pay Tribute, and others not; and therefore the Tributary being Majumba, Dirge, and divers others, are not unproperly reckon'd as Members of Lovango, and put into the King's Title.

Majumba lieth within three or four Degrees South Latitude, * 1.19 bordering in the West upon the Sea; where appears a high black Point, by the Portuguese na∣med Cabo Niger, that is to say, The Black Point, because it shews afar off, by reason of Trees upon it, black.

Next this Cape follows a Road, * 1.20 by Seamen call'd The Road of Majumba, about half a mile in length, that is, from the Cape Niger to the South Point, being low and overgrown with Trees. Within the Countrey you discover a red Mountain, * 1.21 by the Inhabitants styl'd Metute. Not far off a great Salt Lake, a mile broad, opens to the view; out of which some Waters, about half a mile Northward of Cape Niger run into the Sea, but the passages are sometimes choaked up by the Waves, that beats extraordinarily against them.

On the Shore stands the Village Majumba, * 1.22 built in one long row, so near the Sea, that the incroaching Waves oftentimes necessitates the Inhabitants to re∣move behind the Village: on the North a River very full of Oysters poures its Water into the Sea, and hath in its Mouth, at the most, not above six, some∣times but three or four Foot of Water; yet farther within boasts a considerable bigness, breadth, depth, and length, extending at least fifteen miles upward Southward of Lovango, to the great help and conveniency of those that fetch Red-Wood, which otherwise they must carry much farther; whereas now they bring it in Canoos down the River.

Majumba is barren of Grain, but yields plenty of Banano's, which they call Bittebbe and Makondo; of which they make Bread: abundance also of Palm-Trees, from whence they extract Wine; and the Rivers afford plenty of Fish.

The People having no peculiar Prince, are very rude and savage, giving themselves to work all manner of mischief.

Here was formerly a great Trade for Elephants-Teeth, * 1.23 but now almost decay'd and lost.

The Manibomme, that is, the Deputy of Lovangiri, pays for all the Red-Wood brought from Sette down the River to Majumba, Ten in the Hundred.

The Women fish for Oysters out of the aforemention'd River, fetching them up in great Trays from the bottom, then opening and smoaking them, they will remain good for some Moneths: These smoaked Oysters, as all other sorts of Flesh or Fish so smoaked, in the Countrey Language are call'd Barbette.

Over this Territory one of the Counsellors of State to the King of Lo∣vango, * 1.24 named, as we said, Manibomme, Commands, rendring no account to his Master, but onely the Red-Wood.

Eight or nine miles Southward, lieth a Point call'd Quilongo, or Sellage, ac∣cording to the Name of the neighboring Village.

This Tract of Land appears to ships at Sea, * 1.25 coming out of the South, with two Mountains, in the shape of a Womans two Breasts, and therefore call'd Quanny.

About two miles Southward of the Breasts, glides the River Quila, abound∣ing with Fish, and precipitating it self with a strong Water-fall into the Sea.

¶ THe Dominion of Chilongatia Mokonga, is a large compass of Ground, ly∣ing Northward of the River Quila, in former times a free Kingdom, but now by Conquest a Member of Lovango; yet still enjoy their antient Cu∣stoms and Priviledges, paying Tribute onely.

The Manibeloor, or Governour of Chilongo, hath absolute Superiority during his life; and after his Decease the People may chuse another, without asking the King of Lovango leave.

¶ THe Jurisdiction of Sette, about sixteen miles from the River Majumba, * 1.26 borders in the West, at the Sea; and water'd by a River also nam'd Sette.

Here grows both great and small Mille, the first call'd, Massa-Manponta; and the other, Massa-Minkale.

Many Potato's, in the Countrey Phrase stil'd Iqua Anpotte; and Palm-Wine, * 1.27 with them Malaffa, as the Trees, Mabba; or the Nut, Imba; and the Pith or Kernel, Inbonga.

This Province yields extraordinary plenty of Red-Wood, besides other sorts of Timber. Of this they have two sorts, the one by those of Sette, call'd Quines, which the Portuguese us'd to buy, but is not esteem'd in Lovango; the other, By-Sesse, being much heavier, and redder, bears both a good Price and reputation. The Root of this By-Sesse, call'd Angansy Abysesse, exceeds in hardness and deepness of colour, which makes it much valued. With this Wood the Blacks drive a great Trade all over the Coast of Angola, and in Lo∣vango, dealing indeed very seldom with any other than their own People; be∣ing at first brought from Sette, where the Governor receives the Custom of Ten in the Hundred, which we mention'd before.

Some Hens and Goats breed here, though not in great numbers; but the Woods afford all sorts of wild Beasts.

The Inhabitants feed upon Mille, Banano's, and wild Creatures.

Between Sette and the Cape Lope-Gonzalvez, lieth Gobby, a Territory having Morasses, Lakes, and Rivers, all Navigated by Canoos.

The chiefest Town lieth about a days Journey from the Sea-shore.

The Rivers feed many Water-Elephants, and divers Fishes; but the Land breeds few Cattel, besides Beasts of Prey.

Though the People claim a kind of propriety in Wives, yet is it such as merits not to be brought under the name of Marriage, not for that they take as many as they can, but because when any Friend comes to visit the Husband, he immediately, as a mark of amity, prostitutes one of his Wives to him. And in all other Cases gives such liberty, that Women taken in Adultery, receive commendations and rewards, rather than obloquy and punishment.

A Man, when first Married, gets not esteem nor regard among the Wo∣mans Friends, till he hath smartly beaten and boxed his Wife; and thence∣forward they reckon him one of that Family: And this usage hath by custom become so naturaliz'd, that a Woman suspects her Husbands Love, unless he frequently beat her.

Their Language hath affinity with that of Lovango, * 1.28 differing onely in some few words, so that they easily understand each other.

They make great Wars upon their Neighbors, especially those of Comma, between Cape de Lope-Gonzalvez and Gobby.

The Commodities brought out of Europe thither, are Musquets, Powder, bright Copper Kettles, white and brown Linnen, and ordinary Cloth.

Their Arms consist in Arrows, * 1.29 Bowes, and Assagays; the first they call In∣setto, the second Matta, or Boeta, and the third Janga and Zonga.

The Government of the Countrey remains at this time in the hands of a Woman.

In all other Customs, Religions, and Conjurations, they agree with those of Lovango, onely they are more deceitful and treacherous.

¶ DIngy borders at Lovango, * 1.30 Cadongo, and Vango, a great Countrey, and full of Towns and Villages. A Tributary to the Lovangian King; yet hath its own Lords, which Rule by succession. As to the Plants, Beasts, Customs of the Inhabitants, Governments, and Religions, take here this brief account.

This Countrey of Lovango affords divers sorts of Fruit, * 1.31 viz. Massa-Mamponta, or great Mille; Massa-Minkale, or little Mille; and red Mille, which they use in stead of Tares.

There grow also Potato's, call'd Limbale Ampaita, Bakovens, Injames, with them Imbale, Emtogifto, or Ginger, and other strange Fruits, as Goebes, Mando∣nyns, or Dongo and Fonsi; and some Herbs, the chief of which they account Insansy, bitter of taste; Imboa, and Insua; Purceline and wild Fetherfew.

They have also Malanga, or Pumpkins; Mampet, or Sugar-Canes; Mihenga, a juicy Fruit; but they Plant no more of it than they can eat from hand to hand; and Maye-Monola, or Tobacco.

Grain of Paradice, by them stil'd Indonga-Anpota, grows here, but in no quan∣tities, because neither Sown nor Planted.

Also great abundance of Banano's and Mandioque, or Farinha; of which they make Bread.

Of the Leaves of Majaera they make a pretty relishing and savory Food, dressing it with smoaked Fish, Palm-Oyl, Salt, and Achy, or Brasile Pepper: but their common Food is Fondy, or Sonsy, made of the Flour of Mille.

There are also many Calabasses, which grown ripe, they dry and make Dishes of for several uses.

A sort of little Apples grows on low Trees, which prove a very refreshing Fruit, and good to put into Drink as Spice, or as the Kola. There is a larger sort thereof call'd Cucomba, crude, sowre, and corroding, but boyl'd, tastes very well.

The Kola grows on great Trees in Husks, ten and twelve together, and yields Fruit once a year. This, as experience teacheth, eaten in the Evening hinders sleep.

The Root Melando, * 1.32 whose Leaf climbeth up on a Tree or Pole (like our Hops) eaten gives an Aromatick taste.

Cassia Fistula, * 1.33 or Pipe Cassia, they use in their Witchcrafts and Enchant∣ments.

Of Oranges, * 1.34 Lemons, and Coco-Nuts, they have but few; for setting no va∣lue on them, they will not bestow the pains to transplant and propagate them.

Achy, * 1.35 or Brasilian Pepper, groweth wild, and much used; so also Cotton.

Their Fields produce three sorts of Grain, * 1.36 or Pulse; the first great Wheat, or Gabba, growing under the Earth; the second sort about the bigness of a Rouncifal, or Horse-Bean, grows on Trees about eight or nine Foot high, in Cods, and eaten with Enganga; the third sort shaped like a little Bean, grows

[illustration]

along the earth in rows of white Cods, almost the same length with those of the Turky Beans. Besides these they have two other sorts, accounted so choice a Dainty, that they are esteem'd a Food onely for the Rich; the one sort re∣sembles our Garden-Beans; the other Turky-Beans, both white, but have some difference in the shape.

All these Fruits continue the whole year through, except between Majumba, and Cabo de Gonzalvez; whose Inhabitants use Bananos in stead of Bread; and Fish for other Provision.

Matombe Trees grow numerously, * 1.37 but yet exceeded by the vast multitude of Palm Trees.

These Matombes afford, first good Wine, which they drink in stead of that of Palm, but not so strong: The Branches make Rafters and Laths for the Hou∣ses, and Couches to Sleep on: The Leaves are used for Tiles, and Fence off the greatest Rains.

All the Garments worn in Lovango, are made of these Leaves, which they use also in stead of Money, having no sort of Mettal Coyn'd: but because the Matombe Leaves are not so strong as those of the Palm; the Clothes made thereof are in less esteem, seldom making of it any other than course Jago-Clothes.

Their manur'd ground is so furtile, that it affords three Crops, * 1.38 viz. small Mille, little Beans, and Wigge that is sown with Mille, as Rape with us.

Some have their Lands, one, two, or three miles; others, a day or two's Journey from their Dwellings, whether they go at Seed-time, and remain with their Families, till they have Sow'd their Ground, then return to their Habitations again.

They Plough not the Land, but break it up with an Instrument like a Hoe, * 1.39 or rather a Masons Trowel, but broader and hollower.

Hoggs, Cabrietes, or Sheep, Goats, Cows, and all sorts of Fowls, * 1.40 breed more plentifully here, than in any other places, on the Coast of Congo, or Angola.

The Inhabitants are strong Limb'd, * 1.41 large of Stature, and decent in Be∣havior; commonly jealous of their Wives, yet themselves Wanton and Un∣chast; covetous and greedy to attain Riches, yet generous and free hearted one to another; very much addicted to Drinking Wine of Palm, yet slighting our European Wine; no Zealots in matters of Religion, yet extreamly Su∣perstitious, so that it is pity they want the knowledge of Real and Divine Truths.

The Men wear long Garments, * 1.42 reaching from then middle down to their Feet, and below border'd with Fringe, but leave the upper part of their Body naked: The Stuffs whereof they are made, may be divided into four sorts, one of which none may wear but the King, and those he permits out of singu∣lar Favor, or as marks of Dignity. They are call'd sometimes Libongo; other∣whiles Bondo, which no Weavers are permitted to Sell, upon pain of Death. There are two other sorts usually sold, the best call'd Kimbes, being a Habit for the greatest Nobleman; made very fine, and with curious Workmanship Flowr'd, * 1.43 and beautifi'd with exquisite Imagery, each Cloth holding about two Spans and a half in Square, which a Weaver with his greatest diligence may well spend fifteen or sixteen days in Working to finish it. The second sort call'd Sokka, are less by one half than the Kimbes; yet many that have little handl'd their Work, would easily mistake the one for the other; for both are high, and Cutwork, with Images, or Figures upon them, but the turn'd side gives the distinction, by the Courseness or Fineness. Six of the foremen∣tion'd Pieces make a Garment, which they know how to Colour, Red, Black, or Green.

The two other sorts of Cloathes are a wearing for Common People, being plain, without Images or Figures, yet have their distinctions; one being closer and firmer wrought than the other. These are many times Slash'd or Pink'd, from the middle to the knees, as old fashion'd Spanish Breeches were wont, with small and great cuts.

Every man, by promise or injunction, is bound to wear a Furr-skin over his Cloathes, right before his Privacies; viz. of a tame Cat, Otter, Cattamoun∣tain, great Wood or wild Cat, or of an Agali, or Civet Cat; with whose Civet they sometimes also anoint themselves. Besides these, they have very fair speckl'd Skins, call'd Enkiny, of high Price among them, which none may wear, but the King and his peculiar Favorites.

Some Persons of high Degree when they Travel, wear six or eight Skins for Garments; others, as the King and his greatest Nobility, cause five or six Skins to be sew'd together, interlac'd with many white and black speckl'd Tails of the foremention'd Enkiny.

Cross-wise in the midst of the Skin, they set commonly round, Tufts made of the aforesaid Furr, and white and black Parrets Feathers; and at the edges Elephants Hair, spread round in winding-Trails. Every one also wears a String about his middle, made of the peeling of Matombe Leaves, of which there are two sorts; one call'd Poes-anana, and the other Poes-anpoma; with which they tye their Cloathes fast.

Besides they have two Girdles one above another, that is, one of fine Red or Black Cloath, slightly Embroyder'd in three or four places; the other of Yarn, wrought in Flowers, and fastned together before with double Strings, call'd Pondes. These Girdles are commonly three or four Inches broad; wherefore the Cloathes sent thither out of Europe with broad Lists, serve to be Embroi∣der'd and Quill'd to make such Girdles.

Some wear Girdles of Bulrushes, and young Palm Branches; others of peel∣ings of a Tree call'd Catta; and in other places Emsande, which they Weave and Pleit together; of the same peelings Match for Guns is made, which stand the Portugals in good stead.

Between the upper and lower Girdle they set several sorts of Ornaments, and about their Necks white and black Beads; the latter they call Insimba Frot∣ta, and the white Insimba Gemba; but the last bears the greatest value.

Others wear Triangular Breast-Chains, brought thither out of Europe, * 1.44 and by them nam'd Panpanpane; some Ivory cut in pieces, and some sort of flat Scalops, which they polish very smooth and round, and wear them strung as Neck-Laces.

On their naked legs they put Brass, Copper, or Iron Rings, about the big∣ness of the smallest end of a Tobacco Pipe; or else trim them with black and white Beads.

On their Arms they wear many Rings of several fashions, and light; which they temper in the Forging with Oyl of Palm.

Over their Shoulders they hang a Sack, about three quarters of a yard long, sew'd together, onely a little opening left to put in the hand.

Upon their Head they have an artificial Cap, made to sit close.

And in their Hands, either a great Knife, Bowe and Arrows, or a Sword; for they never go without Arms.

The Womens Clothes, which come a little below their knees, are made of the same with the Mens; over which they sometimes put some fine Euro∣pean Stuff or Linen, but without any Girdles: The uppermost part of the bo∣dy, and the Head remains always naked and bare, but on their Arms, Legs, and Necks, many Rings, Beads and other Toys.

Their usual Diet is fresh and smoak'd Fish, especially Sardyn, * 1.45 which they take with a Hook, and Boyl with Herbs and Achy, or Brasilian Pepper. People of Quality eat with their Fish Massanga, or small Mille, first stamp'd with a Pestle, then Boyled with Water, and so Kneaded together.

They Swear by the King, speaking these words, Fyga Manilovanga; * 1.46 but the highest Oath is, the Drinking of Bondes Root; and never used, but when some∣thing is presently to be undertaken or perform'd.

The Bondes is onely a Root of a Tree, of a russet Colour, very Bitter, * 1.47 and astringent; and gets (as they say) by enchantment of the Ganga, or Conjurer, perfect power and vertue. This Root they scrape with a Knife, and put into a Pot of Water, of which the accused Party takes about a Pint and half, admi∣nistred by a person appointed by the King for that purpose.

By this Bonde-Drink also, they find out the cause of any Casualty or Mis∣hap, and how it chances; for they believe that none can die, but he must be brought to his end, either by himself, or another: So when any falls into the Water, and is drown'd, they will not consider the accident, but stifly maintain he was bewitch'd; and that some enemy hath by his Moquisies, or Sorceries brought it upon him. If any in a Wood, or by the Way, be kill'd by a Tyger or Wolf, they firmly believe and say, that the Tyger was a Dakkin, that is, a Sorcerer or Witch, who had by the Moquisies or Idols, chang'd themselves into such a beast; and he that should go about to perswade them to think other∣wise, they would laugh him to scorn, and hold him for a fool; so if any mans house or goods happen to be burn'd, they say, that one or other of the Moqui∣sies hath set it on fire; or if at any time they have a more than usual drowth,

[illustration]

they say, one Moquisie or other, hath not his desire, and therefore keeps back the Rain; and therefore to enquire and find out such things, who should be the cause thereof; Bonde-drink is put in practise.

In like manner, if any weighty or criminal matter, either of Sorcery or Theft be laid to any ones charge, and it cannot be ascertain'd by the Oracle of Ganga or their Conjurer; they forthwith condemn the suspected person to drink of the Bonde-drink, which is perform'd in this manner;

The Complainant must go to the King, * 1.48 and beseech him to appoint an ad∣ministrator of the Bondes; for which he pays the King his due. These Bonde-givers are about eight or ten persons, appointed by the King and his Nobility; who meeting under the open Heaven, in a broad way, sit down upon the ground, and about three a Clock in the afternoon, begin their work, for by that, the Complainers must be there; who coming with their whole Retinue and Generation, the Bonde-givers, admonish to bring to light the righteous∣ness of the Matter, without any siding or partiality; which he adjures them to with an Oath by their Fetisies, which they have standing round about them. Then also appears the Accus'd, with his Family; for seldom one person alone, but commonly, the whole Neighbourhood is accus'd; these meet, and standing in a row, come by course one by one to the Bonde-givers, (who have a little Drum, upon which they continually Beat,) and receiving about a Pint and a half of Liquor, they retire to their places again.

After this, one of the Bonde-givers riseth up, with certain sticks of a Bacoven tree in his hands, which he flings after the Accus'd, requiring him to fall down; and if he have no guilt, to stand up and make Water, in token of his Innocency. Then the Bonde-giver cuts the Root before them all, that every one may walk up and down over it. In the doing whereof, if one or other of them chance to fall, then the standers by set up a loud Cry, and the party fall'n, lieth like a possess'd man, speechless, but with horrible Convulsions in all his Limbs, not enduring his body to be touch'd; and this they hold for a

certain sign, that such a Person is guilty of what he was charged withall. But those which Urine, receive acclamations of joy and praise, and both Strangers and his Friends conduct him to his Dwelling, declaring his innocency to every one they meet. On the other hand, if it be a matter criminal, that the question'd Person stands thus convict, or that he hath many ill-willers, they presently carry him about a quarter of an hours Journey from the place of Trial to a broad Way, and there cut him in pieces: but if it be but some Peccadillio, or they have a mind to spare the accused, then with Man's Or∣dure, mingled with Water and some green Herbs pour'd into his Mouth (which is the onely Antidote) they seek to expell the Poyson.

Some when they are accused have permission for their Slaves to drink in their stead; but if he falls asleep, the Master himself must take it, and in his sleep the Antidote is given. If the Master fall, and it be a great Crime, he must die; but a small matter, he buys off the offence with some Slaves.

The Bonde-givers oftentimes use great jugling and imposture; for though a Person have no guilt, yet he will by his Sorcery make him fall, if either the People hate him, or the Accusers be great.

Many also, whose guilt their evil living sufficiently demonstrates, so corrupt by Bribes and Gifts, that they seem innocent; but by this means it goes very hard with the Poor, who generally suffer, while it may be the guilty sit by laughing at their inferiors; so true is that of the old Poet,

Nil habet infoelix Paupertas durius in se Quam quod ridiculos homines facit—

No pressures those in Poverty more gall Than scorn, and be contemptible to all.

Lastly, the Accusers bring the Convict naked (for the Master of the Bondes takes his Cap and his Cloathes as his Vails) before the King's Court, where he receives sentence of death, to be hew'd in pieces, as we related before.

They use no peculiar Ceremonies in Marriage, * 1.49 nor scarce trouble themselves for consent of Friends: some chuse Children of six, seven, or eight years of Age, who when they arrive to ten, they take home and bring up in private: If afterwards any behave themselves impudently, the Husband may without any Man's gainsaying punish her.

But some Parents will not let their Daughters Marry, till arrived to per∣fect Womanhood; and then whoever desires to Match with her, he goes to her Friends, and buys her of them at a certain Price.

If it happen (as it doth very often) that a Maid be enticed to leudeness be∣fore Marriage, they must both appear in the presence of some hundreds of Men before the King at his Court, and declaring their fault, the King gives pardon.

And this they judge so necessary, that many assuredly believe, if they had not obtain'd absolution from the King in manner beforemention'd, that the whole Countrey would perish with drowth, and it would not Rain; where∣as yet the like business is perform'd by others that have no such belief, with∣out acquainting the King.

The Child follows the Mother, and is a Slave if she be so, though the Father be a Free-man; but if the Mother be free, and the Father a Slave, yet the Child is free.

Every Noble-man may have as many Wives as he hath ability to Cloathe, and can procure Fish and Wine for their moderate Maintenance; so that

some have ten or twelve; but every ordinary person hath commonly two or three.

The Women do all the servile works, for they break the Ground, Sowe and Reap, pluck up the Mille, beat it into Meal, boyl it, and give it to their Hus∣bands to eat, who take care for nothing but Drink. When the Husband eats, the Wife sits afar off, and takes the leavings; and withall so slavishly subject to their Husbands, that they dare not speak to them but upon their bare Knees, and in meeting them, as a demonstration of their submission, must creep upon their Hands.

They colour their whole Bodies with Takoel-Wood ground upon Stones, and so made a fit Painting.

If it happen, that one enjoys another Man's Wife, they fall into great con∣tention about it, untill satisfaction be given to the injur'd Party, and agree∣ment made, to which of them she shall belong: Nor doth this Quarrel bound it self within the Families of these, but all the Neighbors of the Place, where the injur'd Person dwells, think themselves oblig'd to help him; as on the other hand, the Offender's Neighbors help him, yet still with this caution, that they spare no endeavor to make peace: However this raises jealousies among them, which sometimes rise to that heighth, as to end in blood.

When any die, * 1.50 they make great shew of sorrow, lamenting and howling in the Way, like People distracted; then the Friends bring out the Corps in∣to the Street, to wash and make clean, continuing their barbarous lamenta∣tions, and interrogating, Why he dy'd? and, Whether he wanted Meat and Drink? with other like idle Fancies; in which madness they keep up two or three hours. In the mean time his nearest Relations bring several of their Goods to cast by the Corps in the Grave, as also all his own, and then snatching it up, run away therewith, as if they had stoll'n it. Part of the Goods they bury with him, and part they set upon the Grave upon Poles; but first they cut them to prevent stealing. In the Evening the Friends assemble again, and bemone the Dead: And this they continue six Weeks every Morning and Evening.

When any of Quality dies, * 1.51 the Friends gather together; with whom joyn those of other Neighborhoods, and such as dwell in Towns and Places re∣mote, that scarce knew him, and then go about crying and mourning, the Tears running down their Cheeks and Breasts, with both their Hands upon their Heads, and so come to the Habitation of the Deceased; where setting themselves about the Body, they begin again to howl in a fearful manner.

The Dead lieth in the midst, or sits sometimes upon a Mat, or Block, sup∣ported and propp'd up with Wood to keep him from falling. They pare his Nails, shave off his Hair, anoint his Body with Takoel-Wood; and in the mean while the Women run about and relate his Life and Speeches by rule and or∣der, setting forth also the greatness of his Linage and Family, with what State and Grandeur he maintain'd himself and Retinue, whom he accounted his Friends, and whom his Enemies. This Relation of his Enemies immedi∣ately raising jealousies in the heads of his surviving Friends, they begin to en∣quire into the cause of his Death; whereof not able to obtain any certainty, they resolve to go to the Moquisies for advice. While this continues in debate, every one brings and gives to the next Friends, or those whom his Death most concerns, some Cloathes or Garments, wherewith to defray the Expences, which they shall be at in searching out the cause of the Deceased's Death. This having continued two, three, or more days and nights, with some re∣mission

of Laments; at last they run away with the Corps, and bury it either in the Fields, or by Chienga, where divers Wizards call'd Kokokoo, dwell, throw∣ing part of his Goods into the Grave, and part over it, as we have it, and par∣ticularly one of his Moquisies, that is, a Pot, a Wooden Shovel, an Arrow, Kalbas, a Cup to drink in, Tobacco, a Pipe, a Staff, Lances, or such like. After this the nearest Friends continue their Morning and Evening Laments, sometimes for two or three Moneths, or longer.

Now if the nearest to the Deceased will shew his duty, in searching after the cause of his Death, he falls upon the inquiry; for which they use several ways, but the following is the most common.

They go to the Conga, or Wizard, sitting upon the Ground behind a House, * 1.52 and lay a great Knife down before him, which he oftentimes touches, and then rubs his hands one upon another; whereupon they speak to him in these words: Such a one is deceased, or dead, we have buried him, is he brought to his end by Witchcraft? or have his Moquisies kill'd him? If upon this enquiring the Hands be∣gin to strike hard one upon another without any more rubbing, they take it for granted his Moquisies kill'd him. Again, if the hands in rubbing happen to strike one another, and he brings them right again with clapping, then they be∣gin once more, and ask again, Such a one is dead, and brought to his end by Moquisies, or Witchcraft, where dwells he? who hath done it? here or yonder, or is he of his acquain∣tance? &c. till they know more; or if they suppose more had a hand in it than one, they ask, Whether Man or Woman did it, by what Moquisies he was bewitched, and what cause they had for it, and the like. Sometimes they run two or three Moneths from one Town to another, and from one Ganga to another, and leave no Moquisies almost unasked, till at length they suppose how it was done, or in what Town he dwells, or under whom he lives: If they dare not name or discover the Person, they take the whole Town, that they may find out the Guilty therein; and applying themselves for that end to one of the King's No∣bility, enquire whether there be a Bony, that is, a Hamlet where they suppose the suspected Party to be, that he may drink Bondes, who gives them leave: Then he goes to the chiefest of the Bondes, call'd Konda, and seeks for some to make ready the Bonde-Drink, and to administer it.

In the Morning when they intend to begin, they come to the Boany, or Hamlet, together, setting themselves down in the midst of the Village, in an open place upon the Market, if there be one: and then the Bondes takes out of every Hamlet a Man, who drinks for the whole. Now if one of these fall, that Hamlet, for which he drank, must all hand the Cup one to another, be∣cause they believe the guilty Person hides himself therein.

If all the Men escape, then comes the lot to the Women, who drink not themselves, but others in their Names; and if there shall fall one, or more, the Women for whom they drank are taken for guilty, and as Sorceresses are put to death. But of this we have said more than enough.

The Children inherit not after the Father's Decease, but the eldest Brother, * 1.53 or Sister; and he or she is necessitated to bring up the Children, till they can live of themselves.

There are many Handicrafts among them, as Weavers, Smiths, Cap-makers, * 1.54 Potters, Bead-makers, Carpenters, Vintners, or Tapsters, Fisher-men, Canoo-makers, Merchants, and other Traders. They make a kind of Hemp, taken out from the peel'd Leaves of the Matombe-Trees, about three quarters of a Yard square. This Hemp is of two sorts, the one call'd Poesana, fit onely for

course Cloathes; and the other Poesampama, whereof they Weave finer.

The Portuguese buy those Clothes in great abundance, and carry them to Lovango Saint Paulo, where they are deliver'd in stead of Money; for in that place they are the standard to value all Commodities by. Every Cloth, call'd by the Portuguese Panos Sambes; and in Countrey phrase, Mollole-Vierry, consists of four pieces stitch'd together, call'd Libonges; seventeen such are valu'd at for one piece of Slezy Ticking; and every pound of Ivory, bears the price of five Libonges.

In like manner the Inhabitants of Lovango, * 1.55 in stead of Money, use sleight wo∣ven Clothes, made of the Leaves of Matombe-Trees, every Cloth consisting of four pieces, each of about a Span and half square; of which one is worth a pen∣ny: but of late these Clothes are fallen low, and consequently little used.

Most of the riches of the Inhabitants consists in Slaves, * 1.56 for what other wealth they have, is lavish't out profusely in idle expences.

The Merchandizes brought out of this Countrey by the Whites, * 1.57 are Elephants Teeth, Copper, Tin, Lead, Iron, and other things; but are gotten with great labour, by the Inhabitants, because of the far lying off of the Mines.

From a certain place call'd Sondy, not far from Abysine, or the Empire of Prester John, most of the Copper is brought thither.

Towards September there flock to Sondy, many Smiths from several Coun∣treys to melt Copper; who continue there till May, and then depart, because of the approaching dry time. But by the unskilfulness of the Inhabitants, this Copper is much debas'd, who melt all Mettals one among another; to pre∣vent which, some have been sent where the Mines are, to teach them to distin∣guish and separate the Mettals; but they would never permit them to do any thing, or be drawn to alter their own vicious method.

The Whites bring also out of this Countrey Elephants-Tails, which the Por∣tuguese buy and carry to Lovango Saint Paulo, where they prove very good and ready Merchandize; that is, an hundred Hairs put together, they value at a thousand Rees. This Hair the Blacks braid very finely, and wear about their Necks; but the greatest and longest Hairs braided, they wear about the Waste; of which, fifty Hairs are sold for a thousand Rees.

Lovango, useth to vent yearly great abundance of Ivory; but every year the quantity decreases, because the Blacks fetch it so far out of the Countrey, and carry it upon their Heads. The chiefest place where the Staple for this Com∣modity remains, is call'd Backkamele, about three hundred miles up into the Countrey, so that the Blacks have near three moneths labour, before they can finish their journey forwards and backwards.

The Merchandize brought by those of Lovango, are Salt, Oyl of Palm, broad Knives, made by themselves, course Slesie Tickings, black Looking-Glasses, Cushion Leaves, and some other Trifles, besides Slaves and Elephants-Teeth: In the former of which, they make use of these Slaves to carry their goods from place to place, to save other extraordinary charge of carriage.

The Roads from Lovango to Pombo, Sondy, Monsel, Great Mokoko, and other places, are much infested by the Jages; so that it is dangerous for Merchants to travel that way; though they usually go in whole Troops under a chief Commander that is very faithful to them.

But for the obtaining of free Trade in Lovango, the Whites must continually give presents to the King, and his Mother the Queen, and two Noblemen, ap∣pointed Overseers of the Factory, call'd Manikes, and Manikinga, and several others.

In Trading, the Blacks of Lovango use their own Language, yet some Fisher∣men on the Shore speak broken Portuguese; and there commonly serve as Bro∣kers, between the Buyers and Sellers; as in Europe.

The King of Lovango hath several eminent Councellors, * 1.58 with whom he ad∣vises in matters of State, Entituled, Mani-Bomme, Mani-Mambo, Mani-Beloor, and Mani-Belullo, Mani-Kinga, Mani-Matta, and others.

The first, or Mani-Bomme, which is as much as Lord Admiral, hath under his Jurisdiction Lovangiri, and is indeed the most eminent of all the rest.

The second, Mani-Mamba, supervises Lovangomongo; but not alone, for he hath generally two or three joyn'd with him in Commission.

The third, Mani-Beloor, is chief Superintendent over Chilongo; and besides that Charge, hath the Office of Searcher over the Dockies or Sorcerers, and takes care of such as fall under the Bondes.

The great Province of Chilongatiamokango, as free Lord he rules without ac∣knowledging any subjection to the King.

Mani-Kinga, is Lord Lieutenant of Piri; and Mani-Matta, Captain of the Guard; for Matta signifies a Bowe, and Mani a Prince.

The King, for the better managing of his weighty affairs, hath several other inferior Officers; as Manidonga, Governor of Pattovey to Guard the King's Wives; two Manaenders, that is, Butlers to the King in the day, and two other for the night: Moeton Ambamma, servant of the great Captain Bamma; with a multitude of others.

Besides all these, the great Butler bears no small sway; his title, Ma∣bonde-Lovango, that is, Upper Butler of Lovango, for he takes care of all Vyands, and hath four other under him; whereof (as we said) two in the day time, when the King is in the Wine-House; and two in the evening perform their service: and lastly, every division of the Countrey hath a particular Nobleman appointed by the King; as we in Hundreds have Justices of the Peace.

The King of Lovango hath the repute of a potent Lord, * 1.59 being able to bring numerous Armies into the Field, and that not so much respected, as dreaded by the Kings of Calongo, and Goy; yet he liveth in friendship with them, and holds good correspondency with those of Angola; his Jurisdiction extends into the Countrey Eastward, almost as far as on the Sea Coast, being known by the general name of Mourisse, and Manilovango.

The administration of Justice, and punishing of Vice, * 1.60 seems to be according to the Law of Retaliation; for Theft is not punish'd by Death, except it be against the King; but when they take a Thief either in the very act, or after∣wards, the things stoln must be made good by him or his Friends, and the Thief bound, expos'd for a scorn and derision of every one, in the midst of the Street.

If any be found Guilty, whose miserable poverty affords no means of satis∣faction, then may the offended seek remedy, every man of the Tribe or Ge∣neration whereof he was, and make them work for him, till he receive the full recompence of his losses.

The King hath (by the report of the Blacks) near seven thousand Wives; * 1.61 for after the decease of one King, his Successor keeps all his Wives, and brings al∣so many besides to them.

These Wives are kept in no great respect; for they must work no less than other women: Some few of them he selects for his Amours, and with them

spends much time; the other he shuts up as Nunns in Cloysters.

When one of these proves with Child, one must drink Bonde for her, to know whether this Woman hath had to do with any other besides the King. Now if the Man who hath so drank be well, they judge the Woman upright; but if the Man falls, she is condemn'd and burnt, and the Adulterer buried alive.

The King as supream Governor, * 1.62 appropriates to himself one to be as a Mo∣ther, a grave Matron, and of good and try'd experience, which they call Ma∣konda; whom he reverences with more honour than his own natural Mother. This Makonda hath a great prerogative and priviledge, to do good offices both to the Nobility and common People, that fall into the dis-favour of the King; who is necessitated in all weighty affairs to use her Counsel: for she hath such authority, * 1.63 that if the King provokes her any way, and doth not grant her Suit speedily, she may take away his life.

Besides, she takes the advantage (without any daring to controll her) to sa∣tiate her unruly appetite, as often, and with whom she pleases; and what∣ever Children she hath by such means, bears all the same repute that proceeds of the Royal Race: but if her Gallants meddle with other Women, they are by authority of the Law, punished with Death; so that these accounted felici∣ties carry with them their infortune: and if they imagine themselves detected, they have no way to preserve their Lives but by flight.

When the King dies, * 1.64 his Children succeed not, but the Crown devolves to his eldest Brother; and for want of Brothers, to his Sisters Children.

Such as may pretend any right to the Crown, have their Dwellings in seve∣ral Cities and Towns; and as they come nearer to the Government, the nigher they draw towards Lovango: now so soon as the King dies, the Lord which dwelleth in the next Town of all, cometh to the Dominion, and he that dwelleth nearest to him, supplieth his place again, and so on to the last, with this Proviso, that they must be of Noble Blood by the Mothers side.

Mani-Kay, the first Successor to the Throne, dwelleth in a great City, call'd Kay, about a mile and a half, North North-West from Lovango.

Mani-Bocke, the second, dwelleth in a Town four or five miles up into the Countrey, call'd Bocke.

Mani-Cellage, the third, resides in a pretty large Town, by Name Cellage, ten or twelve miles Northward of Lovango.

Mani-Katt, the fourth, remains in the Village, about fifteen miles from Lo∣vango.

Mani-Injami, the fifth, holds his Seat in a Hamlet call'd Injami, Southwards towards Calongo.

After the Decease of the old King, Mani-Kay succeeded, and Mani-Bocke came again in his place, and every one follows his Lot.

The King's youngest Brother hath his Mansion in Chilasia, and from thence comes to Bocke upon the first Vacancy; and if he hath a Child by his Wife, and have offer'd Sacrifice to their Cares, or banish'd Gods, removes to Kay, the next place to the Royal Seat.

After the decease of the Mani-Kay, immediately enters upon the Government, yet comes not presently into the Court, but continues near six Moneths in his own City, till all Ceremonies of the Burial be perform'd.

The word Mani signifies Lord or Prince, and is the greatest Title of Honour or Expression which they give one among another; the King himself hath the

Title of Mani-Lovango, which signifies, Prince of Lovango; as Nani-Kay also signi∣fies, Lord of Kay; Mani-Bocke, Lord of Bocke.

The King and his Brothers are commonly jealous one of another; for if any one of them happen to be sick, they presently suspect State-policy.

The King commonly wears Cloth or Stuff, which the Portuguese, * 1.65 or other Whites, bring to them. The King and great Noble-men have on their left Arm the Skin of a wild Cat sew'd together, with one end stuffed round and stiff.

The King hath peculiar Orders and Customs in Eating and Drinking; * 1.66 for which he keeps two several Houses, one to eat in, and the other to drink in; and although he hath many Houses, yet by vertue of this Custom he may use no other. He makes two Meals a day, the first in the Morning, about ten a Clock; where his Meat is brought in cover'd Baskets, near which a Man goes with a great Bell, to give notice to every one of the coming of the Kings Dishes: whereupon the King, so soon as he is acquainted with it, leaves the Company he is withall, and goes thither. But the Servitors go all away, because none, * 1.67 neither Man or Beast may see him eat, but it must die; and therefore he eats with his Doors shut. How strictly they observe this Custom, appears by the ensuing relation.

A Portuguese of Lovango, named St. Paulo, lying in Angola to Trade, had pre∣sented the King with a brave Dog, which for his faithfulness he loved very much: This Dog, not so strictly look'd to by his Keeper, while the King was eating, ran smelling and seeking after his Master, whom he missed, and came at length, without any body's minding him, to the Door, which with his Nose he thrust open, and went to the King whom he saw eating: but the King caused his Servants instantly with a Rope to put the Dog to death; for be it Man or Child, Mouse, Cat or Dog, or any other living Creature that hath seen the King eat, if it can be gotten, it escapes not death.

It happened, that a Noble-man's Child, about seven or eight years old, who was with his Father in the King's Banquetting-house, fell asleep, and when the King was drinking, awaked; whereupon it was instantly sentenc'd to die, with a reprieve only for six or seven days at the Fathers request; that time elap∣sed, the Child was struck upon the Nose with a Smiths Hammer, and the blood dropped upon the King's Makisies, and then with a Cord about his Neck was dragg'd upon the Ground to a broad Way, to which Malefactors are drawn, which cannot bear the trial of the Bonde.

When the King hath done eating, he goes accompanied in State with the Nobility, Officers, and common People, to his Banquetting-house, the greatest and most sumptuous Structure in all his Court, scituate on a Plain, fenced with Palm-Tree Boughs; wherein the most difficult causes of difference, are decided and determin'd in his presence.

This House stands with the fore-side open, * 1.68 to receive all advantages of the Air; about twenty Foot backward is a Skreen, or Partition, made cross, one side eight Foot broad, and twelve Foot long, where they keep the Palm-Wine, to preserve it from the sight of the People. This Partition hath Hangings from the top to the bottom, of fine Wrought, Tufted, or Quilted Leaves, call'd by them Kumbel; close to which appears a Tial, or Throne, made with very fine little Pillars of white and black Palmito-Branches, artificially Wrought in the manner of Basket-work.

[illustration]

The Throne holds in length, * 1.69 a Man's Fathom, in heighth, a Foot and a half; and in breadth, two Foot, on each side stand two great Baskets of the same work, made of red and black Wicker, wherein, as the Blacks say, the King keeps some familiar Spirits for the Guard of his Person: next him sit on each side a Cup-bearer, he on the right hand reaches him the Cup when he is minded to drink, but the other on the left, onely gives warning to the Peo∣ple, to that end holding in his hands two Iron Rods, about the bigness of a Finger, and pointed at the end, which he strikes one against another; at which sound the People, who are commonly as well within the House as without, with all speed groveling into the Sand with their Faces, and continue in that posture so long as the same Irons continue the voyce or signal, that is, till he hath done drinking, and then they rise up again, and according to custom, signifie that they wish him health, with clapping their hands; which they hold for as great an honour, as with us in Europe, the putting off the Hat.

Now as none may see the King Eat or Drink without bazard of death, * 1.70 so no Subject may drink in his presence, but must turn his Back towards him. But the King drinks here seldom, except for fashion-sake, and then not till about six a Clock in the Evening, or half an hour later, if any difficult controversie hath been in debate; but sometimes he goes thence at four, and recreates himself among the Wines.

About an hour after Sun-set he comes the second time to the aforemention'd Place to Eat, where again as before, his Meal is made ready. After which he vi∣sits his Banquetting-house again, where he remains for about nine hours, some∣times not so long, as he finds himself dispos'd or indispos'd: In the night one or two Torches are carried before him to Light him.

None may drink out of his Cup besides himself; nor any eat of the Food he hath tasted, but the remainder must be buried in the Earth.

The King never comes abroad but upon a remarkable Day, * 1.71 that is, when an Ambassador addresses from some Foreign Prince, or some strange accident hath

[illustration]

happen'd; or when a Leopard is taken in the Countrey, or else lodg'd about Lovango, ready for the chase and slaughter; or lastly, upon the Day on which his Land is Till'd, and his chiefest Nobility bound to bring him Tribute. For this his Appearance there is a place appointed opposite to his Court, being an even and great Plain, in the midst of the City.

The Stool, or Seat whereon he then sits, stands raised upon a Foot-pace, * 1.72 dressed with white and black Wickers, very artificially Woven, and other sorts of curious adornings; behind his Back hangs on a Pole a Shield, cover'd with divers party-colour'd Stuffs, brought out of Europe.

Near him stand also six or eight Fanns, by them call'd Pos, or Mani, * 1.73 and con∣taining in length and breadth half a Fathom, at the upper end of a long Stick which runs through the middle of it, having a round Brim, in form of a half Globe fasten'd, interwoven with little Horns, and with white and black Par∣rots Feathers between: Those Fanns certain People, which the King keeps for that purpose, move with great force, which agitating the Air, causes a refresh∣ing and pleasant coolness.

Before the King's Seat lieth spread a great Cloth twenty Fathom long, and twelve broad, made of quilted Leaves sew'd together, upon which none may go but the King and his Children; but round it they leave room for two or three persons to pass by, the Nobility sitting in long Ranks, every one with a Buffles Tail in his Hand, which for the most part they move in the presence of the King: Some sit upon the bare Ground; others upon Cloathes made of the same Stuff with the King's: Behind them stand the People; as behind the King all his great Officers, not few in number.

In this publick Solemnity of State, * 1.74 there are some that very curiously Play upon several Instruments of Musick, of which they use three sorts; first, Wind-Instruments, made of Ivory in the shape of a Hunting-Horn, hollow'd as deep as possible, with a hole at the great end, and an Inch and a half, or two Inches broad: Of these they have several sorts, eight or ten whereof joyn'd in consort yield a pleasant sound.

The second sort are Drums, made of whole hollowed Pieces of Timber, covered over at one end with Leather, or Skins of Wild Beasts, and at the other end with a small Opening, in which may be put two Fingers. They bear com∣monly on four of these together, sometimes striking with the Palms of the Hands flat-ways, sometimes with one Stick and one Hand.

The third resembles a Pan or Sieve, such as they use for Meal, but the Wood bigger and deeper; round about which are some long Holes cut, two and two together, each about a Fingers length: In each Hole they put two Copper Plates, fastned to the Wood with Copper Pins. This Instrument being stirred, gives a sound almost like the tinckling of little Bells on the Wheels.

At this time many of the Nobility salute the King, * 1.75 leaping after a manner which they call Chilomba, which they do with great wide Paces and Strides, along by the void spaces of the Cloth spread upon the rising Foot-pace; this they perform backward and forward two or three times, moving their Arms this way and that way: Leaping thus, the King and his Nobles receive them with out-stretched Arms, and they clap together their Hands two or three times, and then cast themselves just at the King's Feet into the Sand, and rowl over and over in it, in token of Subjection. Such as are extraordinary Favourites, ha∣ving performed this Exercise, run directly to the King, and leaning with both Hands upon his Knees, lay their Heads in his Bosom.

The Chiefest Noble-men have a Seat separate from the King's, to which, for their greater Honor, some of the inferior Subjects make the like Leaping; and sometimes also not only one Noble-man salutes another so, but the King him∣self, though seldom, uses it.

Before the running Passage, * 1.76 about the King's Seat, stand three or four Cryers, with Instruments in their Hands of the fashion of Sheeps-bells, but thick and heavy of Iron, upon which they strike with a Stick, to give notice of Silence or Quietness, from whence proceeds a dull and hoarse sound. These Cryers are also Officers of the City, to proclaim the Orders of the King, as also to signifie when any thing is lost or found.

They have no decorum of Modesty or Civil Deportment; but shamelesly, in what Company soever, even in the King's presence, discover their Nakedness before and behind, in their unseemly and barbarous Dances.

Before the King's Cloth sit some Dwarfs, * 1.77 with their backs towards him; Pigmies indeed in Stature, but with Heads of a prodigious bigness: for the more exact deforming whereof, they wear the Skin of some Beast tied round about them. The Blacks say there is a Wilderness, where reside none but Men of such a Stature, who shoot those Gigantick Creatures the Elephants. The common Name of these Dwarfs is Bakke Bakke; but they are also call'd Mimo's.

There sit also certain White Men by the King, * 1.78 with Skins on their Heads, and indeed at distance seem like our Europeans, having not only gray Eyes, but red or yellow Hair; yet coming nearer, the discovery grows easie: For they have not a lively Colour, but white, like the Skin of a dead Corps, and their Eyes as it were fixed in their Heads, like people that lie a dying: The sight they have is but weak and dim, turning the Eye like such as look asquint; but at night they see strongly, especially by Moon-shine.

Some are of opinion that these white Moors ought to be accounted Fairies, * 1.79 and to have sprung from a great-bellied Black with Child, upon seeing a White; as we read, That a white Woman being Pregnant, upon the seeing a Picture of a

black Moor, brought forth a black Child. However this seems worthy remark, if true, as reported, That these Whites of either Sex are incapable of Coition.

But Isaac Vossius, in his Book of the Original of Nile, and other Rivers, * 1.80 saith, Though this sort of Men be generated of black Parents, yet is it proba∣ble, that in the Mid-land Countreys of Guinee, People may be found of the like white Colour: And in my Judgment (continues he) it may be concluded, That they are a kind of Leapers, and the difference of Colour proceeds from a Sickness common among the Moors, especially those that dwell in dry and hot places; for if these did not continually anoint the Skin, they would all perhaps be afflicted with the same Evil: For this cause there passeth no day among them without anointing, for which they use not only Oyl, but Fat, and Oyntments, wherewith they smear all their Bodies over, and by that means not only prevent the parching of their Skin, but makes it of a shining black, the chiefest Beauty with them.

The Portuguese call these white Moors, Albinoes, and attempted to take some of them Prisoners in the Wars, and carry them over to Brasile to work; for they are very strong, but so addicted to idleness, that they had rather die than un∣dertake any toylsom Labour.

The like sort of Men have been found by the Netherlanders and Portuguese, not only in Africa, but also in East-India, in the Island of Borneo, and in New Guince, call'd the Countrey of Papos. Thus far Vossius.

The King useth them in most of his Religious Ceremonies, as in making Mokisies, from whence themselves have generally that Name among the Inha∣bitants, which in our Language properly signifies Field-devils.

This Solemn Appearance of the King in Publick, begins commonly about three a clock in the Afternoon, and continues till about four or five.

All the Wives of the Subjects of this Realm must yearly, from the first to the fourth of January, being the Seed-time, break his Land to be sown; for the space of about two hours going in length, and one hour in breadth: but the Men are then most of them in Arms, and in their best Habits, going constant∣ly to and fro, to warn the Women to work, and to take care that no violence be done to any.

Here also the King shews himself at three a clock after noon, in his highest State, to encourage them to work; and in the Evening they all eat at his Charge: So that those days are accounted high Festivals.

In like manner must every Noble-mans Subjects, with their Women, Till their Land: And when they have performed these Services, then they may go work for themselves. And as we have heretofore declared, Every one may Till what Ground he will; but that which one hath cultivated, another may not meddle withal.

If any Embassador, * 1.81 or Noble-man of the Countrey desire to speak to the King in Person, they must first give notice thereof with the sound of two or three Hand-clappers, which every one present in like manner answers; then the Suppliant cries out aloud, Empoo lausan biau Pongo, that is, Hearken for Gods sake; whereto the People about him answer, and speak, Tiesambie Zinga, which sig∣nifies, Long live God: After which the Petitioner begins his Speech with the word Wag, usual among them; and ends with the words In Mama, Wag, which is as much as to say, I herewith conclude: Whereupon those that have any thing to say against it, begin and end in the same manner. And this form of Speech they use in all their Matters of Justice, Warrants, and Orders of the King.

When any Noble-man hath shot a Leopard, * 1.82 he brings as a token of it, the Tail to the King, upon the top of a Palmeto Pole, and pitches it in the Earth, and this without any noise or further ceremony.

When the Inhabitants of Lovango have lodged a Leopard in the Woods, every one is warned by the sound of Trumpet to be ready to attend the King at the Game. If it be far without the City into the Woods, the King is carried in a four-square Seat, about two Foot deep, made of black Tin, and artificially wrought, by four Men, two before and two behind, holding two Poles, on each side one, covered with blue Cloth. Being come to the Leo∣pards Den, they instantly beset it round, every one being ready prepared, some with Bowes and Arrows, and others with Lances and Darts.

Before the King, standing a little elevated, they spread long Cord-Nets; incircled by the People, that to rowse the Beast, make many strange and un∣couth noises, with Horns, Drums, Shouting, and the like; but at last having in vain tried all means of escape, tired out and overpower'd with multitude, he falls a Prey to his eager Pursuers, who forthwith bring him into the Plain before the King's Palace, where the Hunters triumph over the Carcase with Dancing, Leaping, and Singing, and all kinds of Revelling Pastimes.

Afterwards the King appoints divers Noble-men to oversee the Stripping of the Leopard, and bring the Skin to him; but the Flesh, together with the Bowels, the Gaul only taken out, they bury very deep in the Earth, that it may not be digged up again. * 1.83 The Gaul, which they reckon to be a most venomous Poyson, they cut up in the presence of many, and fling into the midst of a River, that none might make use thereof to the damage of another.

The Ceremonies at the Funeral of a King are these: * 1.84 First they make Vaults under ground, wherein they place the dead King in his richest Habit, upon a Stool, and by him all manner of Houshold-stuff, as Pots, Kettles, Pans, Clothes, and Garments.

Then they make many little Images of Wood and Red Earth, and set round about the Corps, Representatives of his Servants and Houshold-goods.

Next, the Bodies of many Slaves are set by the Corps, either in the same or some adjoyning Vault, to serve the King, as they believe, in the other World, and to shew when they shall come to the great Monarch, what manner of Per∣son he has been here: for they believe after this another Life, yet in general deride the Resurrection of the Dead.

The Commons shew themselves very humble to the Nobility; * 1.85 for at the meeting of them in the Streets, they fall down upon their Knees, turning their Head another way, signifying thereby, that they are not worthy to look upon such: yet when he speaks, then they speak again: So that we may not without Reason affirm, That they are little better than Slaves, beyond whom priviledg'd only in this, that they may at pleasure pass into any other Countrey, which a Slave without leave cannot do.

Noble-men of State have usually, besides their Mansion-Houses, also a Wine-Cellar, as hath been said before concerning the King; where they spend some part of the Day and the Evening in Eating and Drinking; some days they have two, three, four, and well near eight Callabasses of Wine of Palm; of which they impart some quantity to their Women, but the rest they drink with their Subjects.

Their Diet is commonly brought thither to them, whereof every one pre∣sent may take his part.

In like manner, whoever hath any Cause, may daily come and speak with a Nobleman, there being (as it were) a publick place of receipt, and where pet∣ty Differences arising between parties, are heard and determin'd.

The Inhabitants of the Kingdoms of Lovango, Kakongo, and Goij, * 1.86 have no knowledge of God at all, or his Word, but onely the bare Name, which their Language denominates Sambian Ponge, but neither care nor desire to learn more.

All acts of Devotion they perform to the Field, and House-Devils, * 1.87 represen∣ted under the shapes of Idols, of which they have great numbers; to each of whom they give a peculiar name, according as they attribute to them power, having their distinct Jurisdiction: to some they ascribe the power of Lightning; and the Wind; and also to serve as Scar-Crows, to preserve their Corn from Fowl, and other Vermin; to one they give the command over Fishes of the Sea; to another, over the Fishes in the River; to a third, over the Cattel, &c. Some they make protectors of their health and safety; others, to avert evils and misfortunes: to this, as an expert Oculist, they commend the charge of their sight; of that they desire instruction in the mysteries of hidden Arts, and to be able, even to fore-judge destiny; neither do they believe them at large, but circumscribe them to limited places, * 1.88 and shew their Figures in several shapes; some of Images, like men; others of Poles, with small irons on the top, or else a little Carv'd Picture; some of which shapes or representations, they carry commonly with them when they travel from one place to another. Their greater Idols are stuck with Hens or Pheasants Feathers upon their heads, and with all sorts of Tassils and Fassils about their bodies: Some make them in the fashion of long Slips, which they wear about their necks and arms; others of Cords, trimm'd with small Feathers, and two or three Simbos, or small Horns, with which they adorn their middle, neck and arms: some are nothing but Pots fill'd with white earth; others, Buffels Horns, stuffed with the same matter; and at the small end, having Iron Rings.

They yet make another sort more ridiculous than any of the former; the manner thus: They take an ordinary round Pot without feet, which they fill with red and white earth, kneaded together with water, a pretty heighth above the upper edges, which they mark on the outside quite round with white streaks, and stripe it upon the top, with variety of Colours.

One of these Idols (as they say) is jealous of another, insomuch, * 1.89 that when they have made one, they presently go to work upon another; and several times are necessitated to make many, lest they should offend such as seem to be neglected, still making their addresses to all, with equal indifferency, as their Protectors and Guardians.

They have to instruct them in the making these Idols, particular Masters, in their Language call'd Enganga Mokise; whose skill therein they much admire, being put in practise in this following manner.

First, the Person being advis'd thereto by the aforemention'd Enganga Mokise, * 1.90 or Conjurer, invites, for the furthering of the Work, their whole Tribe, Ac∣quaintance, Relations, and Neighbors, to assemble together: then the Inviter makes for his Mokise (as they term it) a house of Palm-Boughs, wherein he con∣tinues the space of fifteen days, nine of which he must not speak; and during the whole time, have no converse with any body.

On each side of his mouth he wears a Parrets feather; and may not clap his hands if any one salute him, but as a sign of greeting, strikes with a small

upon a Block in his hand, made sloaping, narrow at the top, and in the middle hollow, and on the end a Mans head Carv'd: Of these Blocks, this Devil-Hunter hath three sorts; one great, the other of a middle size, and the other small.

These prepar'd and made ready, a Fellow brings a Drum to a plain place, whereon no Trees grow, about whom all the Undertakers, Friends and Relati∣ons, make a Ring; whereupon the Drummer standing in the middle, begins to beat, and sing before the Conjurer, who begins to Dance, followed by every one, while he with an open throat, chants forth the praises of the Mokise, de∣siring his aid; the Undertaker also (if in health) Dances about the Drum, two or three days, without perceiving any thing of the Devil all that time.

At length the Devil-hunter presents himself near the Undertaker, with hide∣ous noises and outcries, yet nothing visible all this while, onely the Drum∣ming ceases a little; and then the Enganga strikes upon the aforemention'd Blocks, speaking some words, and making sometimes red and white spots in several parts of the Undertakers body, viz. on his Temples and Eye-lids, the pit or hollow of his Stomach, and every Limb, to make him capable of en∣tertaining the evil Spirit.

Being possess'd, he makes ugly wry faces, and stretching his body in un∣seemly postures, with terrible shreeks, takes fire in his hands, and bites with∣out hurting himself; sometimes their Devils take him away from them all, and carry him into the wilderness to some desolate place, where he sticks over his whole body green Leaves: During this absence, which hath no set time of continuance, his friends use all possible endeavors to find him out, but in vain. This they perform with Drums, which they beat all the time, the noise whereof, having reach'd the ears of the Possess'd, he betakes himself thither, and so is carry'd again to his house.

The Devil being thus entred, and he Possess'd, he lieth as it were dead; then the Conjurer asketh what shall be inflicted upon him? whereto the Spirit makes answer, by the mouth of the Possess'd, and lays his injunction upon him: upon this they begin again to sing and to dance, till the Devil comes out of him again; then a Ring is put about his Arms, to put him in remem∣brance of his task.

When these people Swear, they Swear by this Ring, wishing, That Devil who causeth them to wear this Ring, may break their necks if it be not true; which is the sooner believed, because they will not swear lightly, nor to any thing but the truth; they infallibly keep their words in what they promise, though to the hazard of their lives, as hath often appear'd. When the Devil speaks out of the Possess'd, which oftentimes happens, he endureth great pain, being thrown from one side to another, and frothing at the mouth.

There are yet other Mokisies, in different manners, which we will relate in short: When any one amongst them grows sick, they use to cry or call upon their Devil, till he enters into the sick man; and then they demand why this man is sick? whether he has broke his commandments? and many more such like questions; whereupon the Spirit answers out of the mouth of the sick, and is immediately by promise of some gifts, hired to effect his cure.

They hold several opinions concerning the soul; * 1.91 for those of the King's fa∣mily believes, that the soul when any one dies, is born again in some of the same family; others, that the soul and body have one determinate end; some, like the Greeks and Romanes, place the soul among the Hero's, or else bring them

into the number of their Tutelar Lars; others give them a common place of resort, under the earth; while another sort make for them little Receptacles un∣der the Roof of their Houses, about a span in heighth; before which places, when they eat or drink, they make some offering.

They further believe, that none can die of a natural death, * 1.92 but all come to their end by mischance, that the Insiliator hath some hidden place, where he not onely effects clandestinely his desires, but also by the power of Conjura∣tion, may ask the deceas'd to come out of the grave, and keep him for his ser∣vice: These (as they say) are fed daily by the Conjurers, with food boyl'd without any Salt; for if any Salt should come in or near it, the body would follow him openly.

They make it an Article of the highest Faith, that when a Mokisie offends, or that injunctions or promises made to him, are not fully perform'd, that he hath power to kill. Now the reason of these promises happens upon various occasions; when a child is born, they call a Fetisiro to it, * 1.93 to enjoyn the child somewhat to keep as a law; and this they not onely do to every individual person, but to whole Tribes.

The Fetisero asks the Parents of the child, what their injunction is, and their Ancestors; then he proposes somewhat, saying, the Oracle, by the Fetisie, has given him to know, that the child shall have such an injunction, not to do so and so; wherein the Mother takes care to instruct the child from its youth, that when it shall come to years, it may be able to keep it.

These injunctions are manifold, as that they may eat no such Flesh, Herbs, * 1.94 nor Fruits, or eating thereof, they must eat it alone, leaving none, and besides bury the bones in the ground, that they may not be scrap'd up again, and eaten by any Dog, Cat, or other living Creature.

Some are enjoyn'd not to go over any water; others may not pass over a River with a Canoo, yet admitted to walk, swim, or ride thorow: some must not shave the hair of the Head; others may, as also their Beards; which again in divers, is an offence beyond pardon.

Several are commanded to forbear all Fruits; indulging to others a liberty to devour all, yet again restraining many.

In relation to Garments the commands are general; * 1.95 for all men must wear a Girdle made of the skin of some living Creature, which must be fasten'd in a peculiar manner above their Belly; Caps upon their heads, or else in stead thereof, a Cord or some Covering of Clothes call'd Libonges, or otherwise.

The Women must go with their heads always uncover'd, * 1.96 and wear four or five Clothes of Kimbi, or Sambes or Libonges sew'd together, beneath their Waste, before the Belly, in stead of a Girdle.

When a man at any time comes into a house, and sits down unawares upon the corner of a Bed, wherein a man and woman have lain together, when he hath receiv'd information of his fault, he must go instantly to a Smith, which commonly sit with their tackling under the open heaven, and tell him the cause of his coming, who then blows up a fire, and taking him by the little finger of his left hand, turns it over his head; then striking two or three strokes with his Hammer, and blowing with his mouth upon his hands put together, he pro∣nounces some words with a low voice, wherewith the promise unwittingly transgress'd is cleans'd. This ceremony they call Vempa-Momba, that is, A Bene∣diction, or Purification.

If an unmarry'd man have gotten a foolish child, he may not eat of the breast or udder of a Buffle; but by getting another more witty, becomes free again, to eat as at first.

These and the like Fopperies they observe with all exactness; * 1.97 believing that none have any sickness, sorrow, or affliction, but for breaking the same.

Now because the word Mokisie will sometime be mention'd, it is necessary to shew the meaning thereof, and how they use it.

By the word Mokisie, * 1.98 they mean a natural Superstition, and firm Perswasion that they have of something, to which they ascribe an invisible power, in working good to their advantage, or evil to their prejudice and detriment, or from whom they expect to learn the knowledge of past or future things. It can∣not properly be call'd Idolatry, because these people have no knowledge of any Deity, or Diabolical Spirit, having no particular name for the Devil, one∣ly call all Mokisie, where they suppose an over-ruling power.

Whatever they effect by it, * 1.99 is done by meer imagination, or if by natural means, it happens more by chance, than any knowledge they have. Any man that is sound, and determines to live after the manner of his Mokisie, observing temperance and chastity, takes the natural course to preserve his health; but their ignorant stupidity ascribes it to the operation of the Mokisie. On the other hand, if any be sick, and use means for the recovery of health, the good success thereof the Mokisie gets the praise of, although the cause of the sickness were re∣mov'd by the goodness and bounty of nature, or the strength of his constitu∣tion. But if the person by the violence of the sickness happen to die, they cer∣tainly believe him kill'd by Sorcery, for transgressing against his Mokisies.

The ancient use of this Common Custom, seems an infallible demonstrati∣on to the besotted people, of the great vertue of the Mokisies, and it confirms them not a little in their foolish belief, because they see their King and the Grandees of the Countrey, make it their work.

The King hath the general stile of Mani-Lovango, * 1.100 but the people call him Mo∣kisie, because he hath (as they say) a great power to kill any body with a word speaking, and can spoil the whole Countrey; and prefer and put down, make rich, or poor at his pleasure; cause rain; transhape or metamorphose him∣self into the shape of a beast, and innumerable such like; which all serve to ma∣nifest his greatness, and strike an awe into the Subjects of his Potency.

Thus also it stands with the other Lords, * 1.101 whose might, honor, and esteem, grows from the same root.

As for example, the King's Sister, as soon as she hath a child, holds by as∣signment the Village Kine for a dwelling-place, and may not eat Hogs flesh: when the child hath attain'd age and growth, it visits the Moansa, and dares not eat the fruit call'd Kola with company, but onely alone: Afterwards it go∣eth by the Ganga, Simeka, and then it dare eat no sort of Poultry, but those kill'd, and boyl'd by himself, and must bury the remainder; when he comes in Sal∣lasy, he hath other and more Mokisies; and so in Boeka, and Kaye, till brought to the King. Then is he advanc'd in all power and wisdom, as having in ima∣gination, attain'd the active intelligence of the Mokisies.

All Conjurers and Priests are call'd Ganga, * 1.102 or Ganga Mokisie; otherwise Gan∣ga Thiriko, Ganga Boesy-batta, Ganga Kyzokoo, Ganga Bombo, Ganga Makemba, Ganga Makongo, Ganga Nijmy, Ganga Kossy, Ganga Kymaye, Ganga Injami, Ganga Kytouba, Pansa, Pongo, and Mansy, and innumerable other such names, either given to, or assum'd by them from the Mokisies they serve.

The Mokisie Thiriko is a great Village, four miles Northward of Boary••, wherein is a great house built on Pillars, resembling a man. The Ganga of this Mokisie, being Lord of the Village, performs every morning his Service and Ceremony, with some words and Conjurations; being answer'd in the mean time by a youth that stands by him; this Ganga commends to his Moki∣sus the health of the King; the wellfare of the Countrey; the good flourish∣ing of the Seed; success for the Merchants; and full Nets for Fishermen. All the by-standers, at the mentioning the King's long life and health, clap their hands, in token of their affections and assent.

The Mokisie of Boesy-batta, hath many standing round about him, * 1.103 when he sets himself to his Devotion, viz. Drummers, Singers, Dancers, and the like; but he chiefly wears a four-square Pouch of a Lions skin, ty'd round about with a wicker thread, and above with a Collar of Leather, so hanging about his neck. In this Budget, they have all sorts of Implements a man can think on, * 1.104 at least that may easily be gotten, as all sorts of little Horns, Shells, small Stones, Iron Bells, dry'd Sprigs of Trees, Herbs, Feathers, Gums, Roots, Seeds, Keys, Patches, Shreds, Gratings, Scrapings, Horns, Teeth, Hair, and Nails of white little Dwarfs, call'd Doend us. In brief, cram'd with a whole Pedlars Pack, and dress'd with Feathers, Strings, Cords, Snips of Cloth, and the like.

To this they add, two Baskets thick cover'd with Shells, Feathers, Iron Hooks, and an Herb fetcht from a far distant Mountain; in which they cut a hole where they pour in Wine, of which they give often to drink.

The simplicity of the Maujeres deserves well to be laugh'd at, for when they bring any thing upon the account of Trade, into another Countrey from home, perhaps forty or fifty miles, they must have such a Sack of Trumpery, which sometimes weighs ten or-twelve pounds, aloft upon their Pack, though the bur∣den it self makes them ready to sink under it; But they say, that it rather takes from, than adds to their carriage; whereby it appears, what effects the strength of imagination can do.

The Ceremonies of their Publick Devotions are strange and ridiculous, * 1.105 for in the first place they bring forth a Bag of Jewels; then the Ganga sits down up∣on a Mat, and with a Leather Bag, thumps upon his Knee, having always some little Iron Bells betwixt his fingers; then again he strikes upon his breast, and paints with red and white upon his Eye-lids; Body and Face, using many strange motions and postures of their Body, Hands, Head and Eyes; now raising the voice to a high pitch, then depressing it, frequently speaking the word Mariomena; whereupon, those that sit round about, with all the rest of the assembly answer Ka.

After this hath continu'd a great space, the Ganga or Conjurer begins to turn his Eyes, and look as if he were distracted, so that they must hold him; but by vertue of a fowr Water, or Juyce drawn from Cane, wherewith they sprinkle him; recovering, he tells what he hath receiv'd from Boesy-batta, and what must be done in such and such cases; as of theft, sickness, and the like.

Besides this, they use so many other Cheats and Delusions, that if we should but name them, would swell to a bulk too Voluminous for our Design.

Lykokoo, is a black Woodden Image, cut in the shape of a Man sitting; and in Kinga, a Town lying by the Sea-Coast, where they have a common Burial∣place, they recite a thousand ridiculous Rhymes concerning this Kikokoo; As,

That he preserves them from Death; * 1.106 That he keeps them from hurt by Sorce∣rers, or Doojes, as they call them; That he makes the Dead arise out of the Graves in the Night, and forces them to labor, by going to the Shore, and helping to catch Fish, and to drive the Canoos in the Water, and in the Day hunts them to their Graves again; and the like Fictions, which the elder Folks make the young believe, and imprint it in them from their Infancy.

It happ'ned once formerly, that some Mariners of a Portuguese Ship, that went to Lovango, in the Night stole Kikokoo out of his House, and brought it on Board, and in the way an Arm and the Head brake off: But having occasions afterwards to go to Lovango again, they durst not venture thither, without re∣storing Kikokoo: So nailing the Head and Arm again fast to the Trunk, and being come upon the Road, they set him in the dead of the Night into his House again. The next day there arose a Report among the Blacks, That Ki∣kokoo was in Portugal, and that a Ship with Goods had taken him away. After∣wards there came by mishap a Portuguese Ship to strike upon the Rocks of Lo∣vango, whereupon they cried, That Kikokoo had broken the Ship, because the Portuguese had driven a Nail into his Head. Thus they are taught at every turn to defend the Honor of the Moquisies, and to misapply every Accident, for con∣firmation of their Folly.

When the Bonfires of Bomba are made, they lay many Drums upon the ground, which they beat with their hands and feet, sitting round about a Post that is set in the middle; among which the Daughters of Kimbos-bombos all dance, moving their Bodies, Eyes, and Head, like mad Folks; and with ob∣scene Postures, sing certain Verses, wearing upon their Heads a Bush of all sorts of colour'd Feathers, and on their Bodies strange fashion'd Garments, with a red and white painted Rattle in each Hand. In brief, The more apishly they behave themselves, the freer and braver they are esteem'd to be. A thousand more ridiculous and bestial Ceremonies these shameless Gangaes practice at their Bonfires, mocking their Moquisies, and dare do whatsoever they think con∣venient.

Malemba is a Moquisie of great esteem, and serves to support the King's Health. It is a Mat of about a Foot and half square, with a Band at the top, upon which hang some small Baskets, Scallops, Feathers, dry'd Pipes of Cassia, Iron Bells, Rattles, Bones, and other such like Trinkets, all painted red with Takoel. The Ceremonies belonging to this are performed with little Drums or Tabers, upon which a Boy strikes with his Hand. Afterwards some Painting of Takoel and Holy-water, taken out of a Pot with a Brush, is sprinkled upon the Ganga's and King's Body, with a Song of Probation serving to the purpose. Also the Nobility, which peep, have for their pains, out of the same Pot, a red Streak put upon their Bodies, and have afterwards the Honor to carry away Malemba, with his Pots, Brushes, and Cans, and to hang them in their Places.

Moquisie Makongo they solemnize with Rattles, * 1.107 Drums, small Wicker-baskets, and Red-colour'd Fish-hooks; but not worth farther mentioning, being all foppery.

Moquisie Mymy is a little Hut, * 1.108 that stands on the back of a Way planted round with Banano's, Bakovens, and other Trees, having an elevated Tial or Throne, upon which a Basket stands full of all sorts of Trumpery, not worth naming. The chiefest is a Bracelet of Beads, with some little Shells found on the Sea∣coast, by which there hangs a hollowed piece of Wood, upon which they

knock. No Black, who hath companied with his Wife that Night, dare be so bold as to touch this Moquisie, such an Esteem they bear to it.

Moquisie Kossie, is a Sack with some Horns, full of Whiting, and other Aragh. * 1.109 The Service is performed with Rattles, long Sticks, singing uncouth Songs in the Night, creeping upon their Knees, Washing, Spitting, Shouting, tying Rings and Bands about their Bodies, and such like things: This they boast as an infallible Preservative against Thunder and Lightning, and to prevent Sicknesses.

The Moquisie Kymaye is a Town close by Boarye, * 1.110 and consists of old Pot∣sheards, rotten Blocks, whereupon they set Caps, and worn Rags; so that the appearance of this Ganga seems a Frippery of old Patches and Tatters. The Ganga plays with the Jugling-Box, painted white, knocks with a new Cap full of Stones, blows in his Hands, strikes his Arms and Navel, sits upon a Skin, and is a rare Physician for those that are well. He makes it rain (surely a strange thing!) in December, January, February, March, April, nay till May. He takes care of the Sea, Fishery, Canoos, and for other things, accompting himself a Kykokas Fellow.

The Moquisie Injami stands about six Miles Southerly from Lovango, * 1.111 and is also a great Image, standing in a Hut: Hither they Journey from East to West, passing by the way over a round Hill, which none must ride or be carried over, but must go on foot; for otherwise they pollute it.

Kitouba is a great wooden Rattle, upon which they take an Oath, * 1.112 not to make any sick, to bewitch them, or use other wickedness.

Panza is a Stick like a Halberd, with a carved Head, * 1.113 and daub'd with Red Colouring.

Pongo is a Basket covered all over with Simbos, and conceited Carvings, * 1.114 and full or Trifles. It serves also for Witchcraft.

Moanzy is a Pot buried in the Ground, between some spreading Trees, * 1.115 with an Arrow stuck in it, and a Rope strethed over it, on which some Leaves hang. They which go about with this Pot, wear a Copper Armlet, may eat Kola, but with no Company, and the like Fopperies. These, and a multitude of other more Moquisies they have, which every one in particular observe exactly; so that none may drink out of anothers Cup in the Market-place, being kept in a common Inn or Toping-house, where both Men and Women in great Com∣panies tipple Palm-wine.

Every Male they Circumcise, more out of Custom than Injunction; * 1.116 for they are not able to give any Reason why they do it, more than, That it is an ancient Use, and hath been derived to them from hand to hand, by their Pa∣rents, for many Ages.

The Kingdom of ANSIKO.

THe Kingdom of Ansiko (whose Inhabitants are of two sorts, Ansikos, * 1.117 by Marmol call'd Anzinguis, and Jages) hath according to Pigafet on the East side a Lake, out of which the River Umbre floweth, afterwards intermingling Streams with that of Zaire, and the Dominion of Wangou; in the West, the Countrey of Amboe, or the People Amboes; in the North, divers Wildernesses of Nubia; in the South, the Territories of Sunde, Songo, and Kon∣go:

In a word, Philippus Pigafet dilates it from the River Zaire to Nubia: But Janik gives it for Borders the Kingdom of Kongo, without naming any other Countreys that touch upon it either East or West.

Here grow two sorts of Sandal-wood, * 1.118 viz. Red, call'd Tawilla; and White, Zikengo; with which last, being the best, beaten to Powder, and mixt with Palm-oyl, the Inhabitants anoint their Bodies, for the preservation of Health. The People boast of rich Copper Mines, whose Metal they furnish the King∣dom of Kongo with. * 1.119 The Woods breed Lions, and many other Beasts, com∣mon with Lovango.

The Natives in general are a nimble, * 1.120 active, and well-shap'd People, climb∣ing the craggy Mountains with notable agility.

They take little care for their Living, and dare undertake any thing, with∣out apprehension or fear of Danger; among themselves unanimous; to Strangers, with whom conversing, upright and true-hearted: but they have, by reason of their Beastial Nature, little Trade with the Whites.

Their common Food is Mens Flesh; * 1.121 insomuch that their Markets are pro∣vided with that, as ours in Europe with Beef or Mutton: All Prisoners of Wars, unless they can sell them alive with greater advantage; otherwise, as we said, they fatten them for Slaughter, and at last sell them to Butchers, to accommodate the Markets.

To this Savage Barbarity they are so naturaliz'd, that some Slaves, whether as weary of their Lives, or to shew their Love to their Masters, will proffer themselves freely to be kill'd and eaten. But that which is most inhumane, and beyond the ferity of Beasts, is, that the Father matters not to eat his Son, nor the Son his Father, nor one Brother the other; but take them by force, de∣vouring their Flesh, the Blood yet reeking hot between their Teeth. Lastly, Whosoever dies, be the Disease never so contagious, yet they eat the Flesh im∣mediately, as a Festival Dish.

The Habit of the common sort of Men differs not much from what before described; * 1.122 for they go with the upper part of their Bodies naked, and with∣out any thing on their heads: but People of Quality have Clothes of Silk or Cloth, and on their Heads red or black Caps, of their own making, or else Portuguese Flannel Bonnets.

The Noble and other Women of Quality, cover themselves from Head to Foot with Mantles; but the common Women wear only a Cloth hanging down, girt about their Middle, and without Shooes.

The Men may keep as many Wives and Concubines as they please; * 1.123 but the Teeming Women after their Delivery, take no care to breed up their Children, but kill them and eat them up immediately.

They have neither Houses, Goods, Towns, or settled Dwelling-places; but rove like the wild Arabs, or barbarous Scythians, from place to place, neither Sowing nor Mowing, but living wholly by Rapine and Pillage, eating the Fruits of other Mens Labors, where-ever they come, devouring and spoiling all before them.

Their Language differs wholly from the Congish, * 1.124 which they endeavor to learn and become very expert in, though they make little use thereof, in regard of their Savage and unconversible Natures.

In stead of Money, * 1.125 they use Simbos; or little Horns, as those of Lovando, with whom they drive a great Trade, carrying thither Slaves and Ivory, which they exchange for these Horns, Salt, Silk, Glass-Dishes, and such like.

Their Arms (for they love War) are short Wooden Bowes, * 1.126 cover'd with divers colour'd Snake-skins, that they seem to be made of one piece; which they do to strengthen, and that they may hold it the faster in their Hands. They make these Weapons of a kind of tough black Canes, which prove very lasting and serviceable. The Arrows are short, light, and thin, made of hard Wood, which they commonly hold together with the Bowe in their Hands: In the use whereof, for Shooting, they have so great dexterity, that they can discharge eight and twenty Arrows before the first falls to the Ground, and can kill a Bird flying. Besides these, they use also a sort of Pole-axes, whose Handle having a Knob at the end, is cover'd with Snakes-skins: The Head shines very bright, being fastned in the Wood with Copper Pins, and like those in use sometimes among us, hath at one end a sharp Edge like a Hatchet, and at the other a Hammer. In Fighting, they defend themselves from the Enemies Arrows with the flat Sides thereof, in stead of a Shield, and turn every way with such readiness, that they void all the Shafts aimed at them.

They wear also Ponyards in Scabbards of Serpents-skins, in Belts of Ele∣phants-hides, three Fingers broad, and two thick. Some have Shields made of Wood, cover'd with the Skin of the Beast Dant.

They worship the Sun, as their chief Deity, in the Shape of a Man; * 1.127 next to that the Moon, in the Figure of a Woman: But besides these, every one hath his peculiar Idol. When they go to Battel, they sacrifice to their Idol, out of which their Devil speaks very plain, and tells them what they must do.

The Anzikos live under a peculiar King, call'd the Great Makoko, * 1.128 whom they report to possess thirteen Kingdoms, making him one of the most Puissant in Africa.

The Jages have three Governors; the first entitul'd Singe, the second Kobak, and the third Kabango, of which every one leads a distinct Army. They main∣tain continual Wars against other Blacks, and eat, as is before-mention'd, all the Slain, but sell the Prisoners; and in defect of Buyers, kill and eat them also. Such as desire to List themselves in their Companies, must first receive the usual Marks, viz. knock out the two upper and the two lower Teeth be∣fore, and make a hole through the middle of their Noses, into which they thrust Feathers.

There are at present no Jages to be found of the first Race; but those that now assume that Name, derive their Extract out of the several Countreys wherein they have Warred, and been Victorious, being chosen thereto in this manner.

So soon as they have won a Battel, * 1.129 they search among the Prisoners for the handsomest Youths, of whose Courage they make tryal, by shooting at them, by, and over their Heads: Wherein if any discover a fear of the Arrows, as Cowards, and unfit for Service, they knock on the Head, and eat; but those that appear fearless and undaunted, they make holes through their Noses and Ears, knock out their Fore-teeth, and so bring them up to all Savage Cruelty; who by practice at last stray so far from Humanity, that they exceed the natu∣ral Jages. These possess not only this Countrey of Ansiko, but wander almost through all Africa; although now they have their chief Residence here, and in the South-East of Angola.

The Natural Jages, as the Ancientest People of Angola relate, are not the Indi∣gene of that Countrey; but came many years since, with an Army of an hun∣dred thousand, out of Serre-Lyons, and over-ran the whole Coast, beyond the

Kingdom of Benguella: But finding themselves too weak to make further way, and not willing to return, they setled hereabouts; but not contented with that Resolution, they ranged till they came to the Kingdom of Monomo∣tapa, who overcame them in a Fight, and made them retreat. Others contra∣dict this, averring it improbable at least, that the Jagos should first come out of Serre-Lyons, and conquer as far as the Kingdom of Benguella, a Tract of above seven hundred Leagues, wherein they must pass so many Kingdoms, great Rivers, and Mountains.

The Jurisdiction of KAKONGO.

KAkongo takes beginning in the North at the River Lovango Lovize, * 1.130 in about fourteen Degrees and a half South Latitude, and borders in the South and West at the Kingdom of Goy, and ends at the River Sambo, some Miles up in the Countrey.

The Chief City is pleasant and well built, * 1.131 abounding with all sorts of Pro∣visions.

From Kakongo Southwards, all the Countrey by the Sea-coast for thirteen Miles, and for two Miles and a half Northward of the before-mention'd River Lovango Lovize, lies very low; but afterwards grows Mountainous, beyond this rising still higher: The Blacks call it Kaskais, but the Europeans the High∣land of Kaskais; about which place, a Mile Southerly, a great Water falls into the Sea.

This Kingdom can shew onely one good River, * 1.132 call'd also Kakongo, which mingles with the Sea in five Degrees South Latitude, gliding some eighteen Leagues through the Countrey.

A Mile Southward of this Stream lieth the Village Molemba, * 1.133 upon a great Bay, making a convenient Haven or Road for Ships. The Countrey there∣abouts, call'd Little Kaskais, spreads the Bay of Cabinde, in five Degrees and five and twenty Minutes South Latitude, being both before and all along the Coast very Rocky, and full of Cliffs: yet between the chief City and the River Sonho, full of Woods, pleasant Fields, and high Mountains; but can∣not boast any Fertility, because for the most part untill'd; although so Popu∣lous, that it dares number Inhabitants with Lovango it self.

The Natives are treacherous, * 1.134 revengeful, turbulent, and quarrelsom: yet shew but little Spirit in the Wars; all their Neighbours, especially those of Goy, continually infesting them, without fear of revenge; and perhaps would utterly destroy them, but that the King of Lovango interposes in their behalf, whose Mediation in such Cases prevails much with all his Neighbors.

Trades and Handicrafts are common with these People and those of Lo∣vango; * 1.135 such are Husbandry, Fishing, and dealing in Clothes, black stitch'd Caps, broad Irons, Beetles, Hammers or Mattocks, Tobacco, Red-wood or Takoel, and Linnen; which Commodities they carry to Congo, Sonho, and other Places, and there exchange for Slaves.

The Merchandises brought thither out of Europe, and desired by the Inhabi∣tants, are one and the same with those Vented in Lovango; but the Presents gi∣ven for the permission of Trade, are less.

Their Customs, Shape, Cloathing, Riches, Administration of Justice, In∣heritance,

Government, and Religion, differ little or nothing from what we have already described; we will not therefore nauseate the Reader with a needless Repetition.

The King of Cakongo may not touch, or wear any European Wares, * 1.136 nor dares any habited therewith touch him, because, forsooth, commanded by the Mo∣quisie. In all other things agreeing with Lovango.

At the River Sonho the Kings of Lovango and Cakongo keep a continual Watch, to receive the Custom of the travelling Merchant, and to observe that none should act any thing prejudicial to the Countrey.

At the side of the River Cakongo lieth the Territory of Serre, or Sarri, * 1.137 subject to the King of Cakongo, but was some years since, for a Mutiny and Rebellion against him, in a manner totally laid waste.

Upon the Edge of this, and near neighboring to Goy, * 1.138 a Territory call'd Lemba, claims a situation, being a High-land, comprehending onely one Vil∣lage of the same Name, whither the Whites come to Trade for Elephants-Teeth, Slaves, and Copper; the last of which they bring from more adjacent Mynes, that produce every year no small quantities.

The Dominion of GOY.

GOy borders in the West, upon the Shore; on the South, * 1.139 at the River Zair, or upon Congo; upon Cakongo on the North; whose chief City delightfully situate on a Plain near the Shore, boasts many Inhabi∣tants; where several small Rivers have their Out-lets into the Sea, whose Wa∣ters both refresh and fatten the Soyl they pass through. On the Coast by the River Zair, you discover Punto de Palmerino; * 1.140 and six hours Journey towards the Bay of Cabinde, where the Portuguese Ships take in fresh Provision, * 1.141 passing to Lovando St. Paulo. This is a good Road for Ships, in regard they may be plen∣tifully furnished with Provision at reasonable Rates, always provided, that the Governor have due respects tendred to him by considerable Presents.

Both Men and Women give themselves wholly up as it were to wanton∣ness; yet towards Strangers they are churlish and uncivil, * 1.142 not onely exacting from them beyond reason, but defrauding them by many subtil and slye in∣ventions.

The Countrey abounds with Mille, Beans, and Fish: But the Portuguese have a Store-house, to buy Cloathes call'd Panos Sambos, the proper Commodity of this Place, because made no where else, made Tufted like our Plushes, but without Flowers or Imagery. To Barter for these they bring out of Majumba red Wood, which the Natives chuse at the highest Price before the richest Eu∣ropean Merchandise, resting in their original simplicity, without desire of bet∣ter knowledge from abroad; for they never Travel from home, but onely when the King sends them as Agents to any of his Neighbors, with whom he holds a League of Amity.

This Kingdom, in the Year Sixteen hundred thirty one, * 1.143 was absolutely con∣quer'd by the Duke of Sonho, who established his Son in the place of the De∣ceased King; by whose assistance the Father afterwards got a great Victory over the Cokongian, whose chief City he ruin'd and burn'd. The King of Congo takes upon him the Title of Lord over both those last mention'd, but hath nei∣ther

Tribute nor Subjection from them; for each hath an absolute and inde∣pendent Soveraignty within his own Dominion.

The Kingdom of CONGO.

IN the description hereof great differences arise among Geographers; * 1.144 some make it begin in the East, at the Territories of Lovoto and Quilango, in six Degrees and a half South Latitude, and to extend thirty or forty miles in∣to the Countrey, as far as the * 1.145 Dukedom of Sonho: bordering the Western part with the before-nam'd Sonho, and spreading in the North to the River Zair. Pigafet and Linschot conterminate it in the North with Lovango and Ansiko; in the South, with Angola and Malemba; on the East, setting the Crystal, Salt-Petre, and Silver Mountains, with the Rivers Verbele, (and Cakongo, saith Jarrik) and the People Giagnas, or Galas, deadly Enemies to Congo; and in the West, with the Ocean. Marmol places for Boundaries in the North, Benyn; on the East, the Islands of the Azzinguis, or Anzigos and Mondequestes, which dwell about the Lake Zambea, (out of which 'tis said the River Zair taketh its original) the People of Pangudingos, Quilos, Bambos, Condongos, Sonnos, Libros, Bankares, Zakilos, and Maria; * 1.146 on the South, the Mountains of the Moon, which divide it from Abyssiny and Kaffrari, or the Region of the Kaffers. Some reckon the great∣est breadth to a hundred and twenty Leagues, and its length by the Coast seventy two.

The common Division of it is into six Dukedoms, * 1.147 viz. Bamba, Songo, or Sonho, Sundo, Pango, Batta, and Pombo.

The Dukedom of Bamba, lying in the North, reaches Westward, to the Coast of the Rivers Amaois and Dantis; in the South, to Angola; and hath for Borders in the East, according to Pigafet, by the Lake Chelande, or Aquilonde, the Territory of Sissina.

On the Sea-Coast of this Territory Pigafet places divers Lordships, as Lem∣bo, Dondi, Bengo, Koanza, Kazzansi; and to the In-land, Angazi, Chingengo, Motello, Chabonda, and many other of smaller note.

Others, who seem to have been diligent searchers herein, intermix with the aforenam'd these following, being (say they) Govern'd by several Lords in the Name of the King of Congo, which the Portuguese call Sabos, or Sovasen. Such are Vamma, Roansa, Hany, Kalle, Kovangongo, Engombia, Muchama, Kahonde, or Cabonda, Motemmo, Kanvangongo, Moffoula, or Mussula, Motemma, Quingongo, Oanda, Quina, Bamba, Bumby, Ensala, Lovoto, Quitungo.

The Dominion of Vamma, * 1.148 coasting the River Danda, lieth at the Sea-Coast. Next this up the River, are seven or eight small Provinces, but of so little Power and Command, that the Names thereof are not mention'd.

Further up the River you come to Koansa, * 1.149 under which, and the foremen∣tion'd Manivamma, stand all the other little Sovasen.

Then follows the Jurisdiction of Kalle, * 1.150 situate a little to the South, and Commanding over some small Tracts of Land.

Kanvangongo neighbors this; * 1.151 and somewhat Southerly lieth Engombia, Mu∣chama; or according to others, Engombia, Cabonda, giving Laws to divers petty Lordships adjoyning.

[illustration]

REGNA CONGO et ANGOLA.

From the foremention'd River Danda Northward, * 1.152 appears Motemmo Kanvan∣gongo; as at the West, on the Sea-Coast, lieth the * 1.153 Earldom of Mussula, compre∣hending within it the Provinces of Pumbo and Bamba, and holding under his Obedience, all the Countreys from Danda to the River Loze, along the Sea-Coast. The Sovas of Mossulo is very strong, but nevertheless not so powerful as the Konvangongo. Here grow some Nutmegs.

Eastward of Motemmo Konvangongo comes Motemmo Quingengo; and about the South-East, Kahende, formerly one of the most potent in this Tract, but at pre∣sent very much weakned.

This Jurisdiction of Kahende, as also that of Quingengo, * 1.154 lieth six or eight days Journey from Konvangongo, shooting to the East: to these two all the Coun∣trey Eastward from Konvangongo, begins the Territory of Ambuela, or Amboille; a distinct Government of it self, without relation to Congo.

South and South-West of Ambuela you come to Oanda, * 1.155 divided from the for∣mer by the River Loze, and borders in the West upon Bamba. It is a great and mighty Countrey, subject to Congo, but was in the Year Sixteen hundred forty six, over-run and laid waste by the King of Gingo, and the People carried away for Slaves.

Next Oanda Eastward follows Quina, containing a small compass of Ground, * 1.156 and less Power.

On the West of Oanda, going down to the Sea-Coast, Bamba touches; be∣tween shoots a corner of Pembo.

Then come you to the Dukedom of Bamba; to the South or South-West of which lieth the Province of Bumby, inconsiderable for Strength or People: bordering in the West upon Mussulo.

Between Pembo and Quina lieth Ensala, whose Governor hath the Title of Mansala; in the Year Sixteen hundred forty three he opposed the King of Congo; who requesting aid from the Hollanders, they sent him a Company of fifty Soldiers, that helpt him to harrase and spoil the Countrey.

Beyond the River Loze you pass to Lovato and Quintingo, * 1.157 extending along the Sea-Coast, and about thirty or forty miles into the Countrey as far as Sonho, or Binda.

All these Dominions have in certain places their Boundaries and distinct Divisions, strictly observed by the Sovasen, or Lords; * 1.158 which Limits for the most part are divers Mountains, in the Kongoasch Tongue call'd Quibambis: near which stand several Frontier Towns, the usual Residences of the Sovasen; by which means there seldom arise any differences among them concerning Bounds.

At the River Onza, near the Sea-Coast stand three Villages Triangular-wise; the first the South-side, call'd Mongonendoin; the second, two miles more In∣land, Jagado; and the third, Lengo.

Not far distant from these appears Mussula, or Mossola, a Place of Trade, fre∣quented by the Hollanders.

The chief City bears the Name of Panga, seated about five and twenty, * 1.159 or as some say, six and thirty miles up into the Countrey, six days Journey from Lovando St. Paulo in Angola, and about the mid-way between the Dukedoms of Sonho and Pembo in the Mountains. This Town takes up a great compass of Ground, lying very straglingly built after the manner of Lovango and Cakongo, and divided in the middle by two small Rivulets, or Brooks.

This Dukedom hath the Command over many Villages, * 1.160 and some pretence

to the two Ondans, lying to the Southward of Danda; but it proves a bare Claim without any Possession.

This Lord of Bamba is very Puissant, bearing the highest Command at the Congian Court, being Captain General of all the Forces there; yet holds the Place ad placitum Regis, and is disposable by the Successor to whom he thinks fit.

The Inhabitants are Christians for the generality, and keep among them for their Instruction, and to perform sacred Offices, divers Jesuits, Mulatto's, and Black Priests.

Songo, * 1.161 or Sonho, the second Principality of Congo, butts upon the River Zair and Lebunde, on the South-side surrounded almost with a Wood, call'd Finden∣guolla. Some enlarge it from the River Ambois, in seven Degrees and a half South Latitude, to the red Mountains, which border upon Lovango; so that ac∣cording to this last Description, it conterminates in the North, upon Ansiko; in the South, on the River Ambris; and in the West, upon the Sea.

This Territory comprehends many petty Lordships, heretofore absolute, but now made Tributaries to Congo. The chief City Songo stands near a pretty large River.

A quarter of a mile distant forward comes the Village Pinde, which the Duke hath lent the Portuguese for a Place to Trade in.

Sundo, * 1.162 beginning about eight miles from St. Salvador, the Metropolis of the whole Kingdom, spreads it self beyond the Cataracts of Zair, by both its Shores to Ansiko, towards the North. On the East-side it runs to the place where Zair unites it self with Baranka; and from thence to the Foot of the Crystal Mountains; and in the South touches upon Pango. The chief City, also call'd Sundo, the Residence of the Governor, hath its Situation on the Borders of Pongo, by the Water-falls of Zair.

The fourth Province stil'd Pango, * 1.163 hath Sundo in the North; Batta in the South; Pombo, the Dwelling-place of the King, in the West; and the Moun∣tains of the Sun in the East. The Head City, seated on the Westerly Shore of the River Barbele, was formerly call'd Panguelongos, but at present, Pango; heretofore free, but now acknowledging the King of Congo; whose Protection they crav'd against the Incursions and Inroads of their Neighbors.

Batta, * 1.164 formerly call'd Aghirimba, to the North-East, or rather full North of Pango, about a hundred * 1.165 miles into the Countrey, reaches Eastward above the River Barbele, to the Mountains of the Sun, and the Salt-Petre Hill; and on the South dilates to the Burning Mountains, by the Portuguese call'd Montes Quemados: it's eminentest City also Batta. This Tract between Pango and Batta are fruitful, and yield all sorts of Provision for the support of life.

All along the Way from St. Salvadore to Batta, stand Huts, the Dwelling∣places of the Inhabitants.

About a hundred and fifty miles from Batta Easterly, * 1.166 lieth the Territory of Conde, or Pembo de Okango; through which the strong-running, and deep River Coango makes its way, till meeting and intermingling with the larger Waters of Zair, it loses both Name and Current.

This Countrey, from the prevalency of an antient Custom, always hath a Woman to Rule it, who pays Tribute to Mani-Batta, or The Prince of Batta, who receives it in the Name of the King of Congo, although he reap no benefit thereof. To the East beyond the River Congo, according to the relation of the Condians, are found white People, with long Hair, but not altogether so white as the Europeans.

[illustration]

BANSA oste de Stadt SALVADOR Hoost-stadt van het Rijk CONGO. BANSA or SAS••••DOR the Chief City of y^e. Kingdom of CONGO.

The Lordship of Pembo stands as it were in the middle of the whole, * 1.167 en∣compassed by all the rest, and contains the head City of the Kingdom, for∣merly by the Blacks call'd Banza, that is, Head; but at present by the Portuguese, St. Salvadore; and by Marmol, Ambos Congo. It stands about the middle of Congo, on a very high Quarr-Mountain, eight and thirty Dutch miles, or as others Write, fifty Italian miles from the Sea, South-East from the Mouth of the River Zair, and delightfully shaded with Palm, Tamarinde, Bakovens, Kolas, Lemons and Orange-Trees.

The top of the Mountain Otreiro yields a curious prospect of all the adja∣cent Places, at great distance both to West and North, without any interpo∣sing stop to the Eye.

This Town hath neither Inclosure nor Wall, except a little on the South∣side, which the first King built, and afterwards gave that part to the Portuguese to inhabit for their conveniency. Here also his Royal Palace shews it self, which he surrounded with Walls, in such manner, that between it and the Town remain'd a great Plain, in the middle whereof they have erected a beau∣tiful Church; besides these, Noble-mens Houses and others fill up the top of the Mountain: for every Grandee settles his Dwelling as near the Court as he may be permitted, and with his Retinue takes up as much Ground as an ordi∣nary Town may be builded on.

The common Houses stand in good order, and appear very uniform; * 1.168 most of them large, well contriv'd and fenced about, but generally Thatcht, except a few belonging to the Portuguese.

The King's Palace is exceeding large, surrounded with four Walls, * 1.169 whereof that towards the Portuguese part consists of Chalk and Stone, but all the rest of Straw, very neatly wrought: the Lodgings, Dining-Rooms, Galleries, and other Apartments, are Hang'd after the European manner with Hangings of Mats, made with exquisite curiosity: within the innermost Fence are some Gar∣dens, plenteously stor'd with variety of Herbs, and Planted with several sorts of Trees: within these are some Banquetting-houses, whose Building, though mean and sleight, yet they esteem rich and costly.

The City boasts ten or eleven Churches, that is, one great one, * 1.170 being the chief of all; then the Seven Lamps Church, the Church of the Conception, the Church of the Victory, or Triumph; a fifth, dedicated to St. James; a sixth, to St. Anthony; and a seventh, to St. John: the other three stand within the Court-Walls, viz. the Church of the Holy Ghost, of St. Michael and St. Joseph.

The Jesuits have here a Cloyster, * 1.171 where they Teach and Instruct every day the Blacks in the Christian Faith, in an easie and winning method.

Here are also Schools, * 1.172 where Youths are brought up and taught the Latine and Portuguese Tongues.

All these Churches, and other publick Erections, except the Jesuits Cloy∣ster, have the Foundations of Stone, but cover'd with Straw, and very mean∣ly provided with Utensils for celebrating Divine Offices.

There are also two Fountains, one in St. James Street, * 1.173 and the other within the Walls of the Court, both yielding good and sweet Fountains of Water.

A small River, or rather a Branch of Lelunde, call'd Vese, * 1.174 affording very good and well tasted Water, flows in the East at the Foot of the Mountain close by the City, to the great benefit of the Inhabitants; for from thence the Slaves, both Men and Women, fetch Water daily to serve the Town. The adjacent Fields by this River are made very pleasant and fruitful, and therefore the Ci∣tizens

have all their Gardens upon its Banks. What Cattel they have, are Pastur'd and kept for the most part in the City, as Hogs and Goats, a few Sheep, but no Cows, which lie in the Nights closed in with Fences joyning to their Houses.

Rivers which water this Kingdom, * 1.175 descending from North to South, are first Rio de las Borrenas Roxas, that is, The River of red Sand; another, at whose Mouth lieth a Street call'd in Portuguese, Bacas de las Almadias, that is, The Gulf of Canoos.

Here lie three Islands, the greatest and middlemost of them inhabited, and provided with a convenient Haven for small Barques; but the other without People, harbouring onely Beasts.

After these, * 1.176 Southwards you may see the great River of Zair, which, ac∣cording to Pigafet, derives its Head out of three Lakes; the first, by the same Pigafet and others, entituled Zambre; the second, Zair; and the third, a great Lake from whence the Nyle is supposed to draw his Original, as out of the second Rise; out of which the Lelunde and Coanze run: but Zambre is the princi∣pal Head that feeds the River Zair, being set as it were in the middle Point of Africa, and spreading it self with broad Streams into the North, whither, ac∣cording to common Opinion, it sends forth Nylus; to the East, the great River Cuama and Coavo; to the South, those of Zeila, Manice, or Manhessen; and lastly to the West, this of Zair; which dividing it self into several Branches, moisten and pinguifies the Western part of South-Africa, Congo, Angola, Monopotapo, Mata∣mam, Bagamadiri, Agasymba, and so to the Cape of Good Hope; whereas the Nyle, Cuama, Coavo, Zeila, Manice, spread over the whole Abyssine Countreys, and all others on the Sea-Coast, from the Mouth of the Red-Sea, to the River Cuama; and therein the Kingdoms of Melinda, Barnacassus, Quilor, Mombaza, Mozimba, Mombara, Membaca, Mozambico, and other strange Lands.

The River of Zair breaks forth with an opening above three Leagues in breadth, in the Elevation of five Degrees and forty Minutes, and with so great force and abundance of Water runs into the Sea, that the fresh Stream coming out West-North-west, and North-east and by North, makes an impression therein above twelve Leagues, and when you are out of sight of Land, yet the Water appears black, and full of heaps of Reeds, and other things, like little floating Islands, which the force of the Stream, pouring from high Cliffs, tears out of the Countrey and throws into the Ocean, so that the Sea-men, without a stiff Gale of Wind, can hardly Sail through it, to get into the Road within Padron, on the South-side of the River. This violent and precipitate descent carries the Stream against you fourteen or fifteen miles. It sends forth on both sides many Branches or Rivers, to the great convenience both of the Inha∣bitants and foreign Tradesmen, who thereby in Boats and Canoos pass from one Town to another. In the Towns seated on these out-stretched Arms, dwell People small of Stature, probably Pigmies.

The Islands Bomma and Quintalla lie in the Mouth of this River, * 1.177 and others higher upwards, exceeding full of People, who rebelling against the King of Congo, set up peculiar Lords of their own.

That of Bomma has Mynes of Iron; * 1.178 and though boasting many Inhabitants, yet shews few or no Houses, because of the Morassness of the Countrey, which for the most part lieth under Water; so that the Blacks with Canos go from Tree to Tree; among which they have raised some places, made of Leaves and Boughs, on which they reside and rest themselves, without any Coverture.

These Islanders appear strong, yet well set, live very beastially, * 1.179 are great Sor∣cerers, speak ore tenus with the Devil; in doing of which at first they come to∣gether all on a heap, and afterwards one of them runs about with a Vizard on: this continues three days, which expir'd, they use another Ceremony, and then the Fiend speaks through the vizarded Man. They live in peaceable Times by bartering; in time of Wars they deal in nothing but Weapons, Arrows, Bowes, and Assagays, or Lances.

They have no Marriages or Betrothing, * 1.180 but from their Youth up go one to another, as their Affections or Lusts lead them, commixing meerly like Beasts, without any Solemnity; for they know Laws of no Chastity, but take as many Concubines as they please: nevertheless, the first, being the eldest, hath the command and supervising over all the rest.

In the Island Quuntalla is an Idol made of Money, which none dare approach, * 1.181 but the Servants or Minister appointed to attend, and take care to secure the Way to it from being discover'd, themselves being obliged as often as they go thither, to take a peculiar Path that no other may find. Many Kings and People sacrifice to this Idol, especially in Sickness, several of their most costly and highest priz'd Goods, which none are permitted to make use of, but by length of time decay and rot: for as soon as they are dedicated, the Attendant carries them into a great Plain, where the Idol stands, surrounded with a Wall of Elephants-Teeth in stead of Stone, and there hanging upon Poles, remain till they be quite rotten.

These Islanders also have particular Heads, and chief Officers, * 1.182 chosen by most Voices.

Several other Rivers pay their tributary Waters to increase the swelling Current of Zair, the most eminent are Umbre, Brankare and Barbale.

Umbre, by Sanutus call'd Vambere, rises in the North, out of a Mountain in Negro-Land, and loseth it self on the East-side in the Zair.

Brankare, as Pigafet, or Bankare, as Sanutus calleth it, taketh the original out of the same Mountain, and after a long course, discharging his Meandring Stream into the Sea, saith the same Sanutus; but Pigafet, from the information of Edward Lopez, averrs it mingleth with Zair, on the Easterly Borders of Pango, not far from the Foot of the Crystal Mountain.

The River Barbele, so call'd by Linschot; or Verbele by Pigafet, springs out of the same Lake which the same Author makes the Head-Source of Nylus to flow from; after which it shooteth through the Lake Aquilumde, and visiting the City of Pango, it enlargeth the Zair with the addition of its Water.

Southward of the Mouth of the River Zair shoots out a Promontory, * 1.183 call'd in Portuguese, Cabo de Padron, who above a hundred years since erected a small Chappel, and set up a Cross; and about five miles from Padron is the Residence of the Earl of Sonho, where the Netherlanders Trade. A little way within Pa∣dron lieth St. Pauls Point, affording a convenient Road for Ships.

A mile and a half from thence lieth a Creek call'd Pampus Rock. * 1.184

More on Southwards you come to the Rivers Lelunde, or Lolongo, Ambris, En∣kekoquematari, Loze, Onza, Libonge, Danda, and Bengo.

Lelunde, running between Zair and Ambris, * 1.185 hath its Head-Spring in the same Lake with Coanza, or Quanza, so passing close by the Foot of the Mountain, where the Royal City St. Salvadore stands, runs down from thence, with many windings West-North-west to the Sea; into which it falls with a strong Cur∣rent: but in the Summer so shallow, that 'tis not passable with Vessels of

any Burden: The Blacks frequent it with Canoos, notwithstanding the hazard of Crocodiles, which in great abundance breed there.

Next you come to Ambris, * 1.186 lying in six Degrees South Latitude, a great Ri∣ver, and full of Fish, but Rocky at the entrance, yet passable enough for small Boats. It hath the same original with Lelonde, taking likewise its course not far from St. Salvadore; the Water seems muddy caused by the swiftness of the Stream: at whose Edges begins the Dukedom of Bamba.

Thirty miles up this River is a Ferry, * 1.187 where every Traveller for his passage over, must pay a certain Toll to the King of Congo. On the South Banks of it many people inhabit, who get their Living by making Salt, boyl'd of Sea∣water in Earthen Pots, and proves gray and sandy; yet they carry it to Pambo, and several other Places, and drive a great Trade therewith.

Enkokoquematari is the next, * 1.188 whose beginning lies undiscover'd to the Europe∣ans, and the whole in a manner of no use, great Flats and Sands stopping up the Mouth, so that it will not bear a small Boat, and within so scanty of Wa∣ter, that a Canoo can hardly make way.

Loze, * 1.189 another mean Brook, yet up in the Countrey passable for a Boat.

About twenty miles upward you must pass a Ferry, where all Travellers for going over must pay Custom to the Duke of Bamba.

Onza, or, as Pigafet, Onzoni, is Fordable, and not to be Sail'd by any Vessels, because of its shallowness.

Lihongo, * 1.190 by some call'd Lemba, can boast neither greater depth, or better qualities.

Danda, * 1.191 a little more Southward, hath at the Mouth five or six Foot Water: 'tis full of Fish, and feeds many Crocodiles and Sea-Horses, and affords on each side fruitful Grounds; somewhat high on the South-side, but on the North, for half a mile low Grounds.

Bengo, * 1.192 by some taken for a Branch of Danda, with Quanza another, lying makes the Island Lovando: it affords good Sailing with Sloops, about fourteen miles upward, and in the Mouth sometimes seven or eight Foot Water, not∣withstanding the Flats of Sand. It comes a great distance out of the Coun∣trey, and so inundates in the time of Rain, viz. March, April, and May, that with the violence of its Stream it sometimes carrieth away much of the Earth on one side, which either joyns again on the other, or else driven into the Sea.

The Winter there bears almost an equal temper with our Summer, * 1.193 so that the People alter nothing of their Apparel, nor require the warmth of Fire at that Season of the Year; for the difference between Winter and Summer is scarely discernable, onely the Air, so long as it Rains, is a little Cooler; but the wet Season once past, the Heat is almost intolerable, especially two hours be∣fore and after Noon.

The Winter commences in mid-March, * 1.194 and the Summer in September: in the former the great Rains begin, and continue March, April, May, June, July, and August, during which time they have scarce a clear day; the lesser Rain, in September and November. The Summer on the other side is exceeding hot and dry.

This Countrey, * 1.195 from the several Rivers, hath great store of Water; so that the Inhabitants are very curious in their choice of it: for they will not drink the usual, and every where to be had, but take care for the freshest and best, as appears by them of St. Salvadore, who make not use of such as the adjoyning

Plains afford them, but cause their Slaves to fetch other, more sound and heal∣thy (as they suppose) out of Fountains, a little lower on the North-side.

The Lands in the time of Rain, by the muddiness of the water, * 1.196 are made exceeding fruitful, and fit to bring forth all manner of things.

The Dukedom of Batta, and other lying round about, hath fat and fertile ground, affording all manner of Provision.

The Territory of Pembo, especially about Saint Salvadore, because of the fresh and serene Air, abounds with rich Pastures, * 1.197 and produceth many flourishing and thriving Trees.

Here grows a kind of Grain, by the Inhabitants call'd Luko, * 1.198 not unlike our Rye, but smaller: this they Grind into Meal, by a Hand-Mill, and make Bread of it.

Abundance also of Mille, which the Natives call Mazza, Manputo, * 1.199 or Portuguese Corn; as also Mais, or Turky-Wheat, wherewith they fat their Hogs; and Rice in such plenty, that it hardly bears any price.

Lemmons, Oranges, and Pome-Citron-Trees grow in every corner, bear∣ing fruit of a pleasant, yet brisk taste; also Bananasses, Dates, Coco-Nuts, and Palm-Trees; besides others producing Colas, which the Inhabitants chaw, as the Indians, Betel. The Trees call'd Ozeghes, yields Fruit like yellow Plums, de∣lightful in smell, and delicious in taste; and with the Branches make Fences, Pallizadoes, and Arbors, to shelter them from the scorching Beams of the Sun. Nor do they want Melons, Cucumbers, and Citrons, of an extraordinary big∣ness, and pleasant taste.

The Shore of the River Lelunde, going to Saint Salvadore, stands beautifi'd with abundance of Cedars, which the ignorance of the people make no other ac∣count of them, than to make Canoos, and Fuel.

Cassia Fistula and other Drugs, fit for the use of Apothecaries; as Tama∣rinds in Europe, grow plentifully, and have the repute of a good remedy in Feavers.

In the Towns near the Sea, they have store of Beans, Mille, and Poultrey, which the English, Netherlanders, and other Traders, buy with Panos, Simbos, little Looking-Glasses, and other Trifles.

In Bamba, a Province of Congo, * 1.200 and there especially they have good stocks of Cattel, viz. Cows, Oxen, Swine, and Goats: Besides plenty of Fowl, as Tur∣kies, Hens, Ducks and Geese. * 1.201 The Elephants breeding here in numerous droves, grow to an extraordinary bigness; insomuch, that some of their Teeth have weigh'd above two hundred weight: in Congoish Language, such a Tooth they call Mene-Manzo, and a young Elephant, Moane-Manzo.

The Elephant (if the Blacks report true) casteth not his Teeth, having in∣deed but onely two. But they Hunt and Shoot them with Lances and Darts, making from them a double advantage, both of Merchandize and Victuals. There are many scurfed or hollow Teeth found in the Wilderness, which by lying many years in rain and wind become so. This Commodity, from the in∣finite abundance brought thence, within these fifty or sixty years, begins to abate much, because they are compell'd to fetch them further out of the Countrey.

The Elephant being struck with a Lance or Assagay, will use all means to assault and kill the person that wounded him; but as if teaching humanity to the beastial Blacks, neither eats the body nor insults over it, but making a hole with his Teeth in the ground, puts the dead body thereinto, and covers the

[illustration]

place again with earth and boughs of Trees: therefore such as go to hunt af∣ter a wound given, hide themselves at first, and afterwards following afar off, till loss of blood bringing faintness, they dare approach nearer, and add more fatal wounds, to accelerate his death: For these Blacks have no knowledge how to take the Elephant alive, as they in the East-Indies: Some of these beasts have in their head a sort of Bezar-stone of a purple colour, which divers have sup∣pos'd to have a Medicinal quality.

The Buffle, in the language of the Countrey, call'd Empakasse, hath a red Skin, and black Horns, of which the Inhabitants make musical Instruments. It is a mischievous beast, and dangerous to be hunted, especially after they are shot, if not right struck; wherefore the Huntsmen, who mean to shoot a Buffle, first choose out a secure place, where they may not fear the furious assaults of the enrag'd Creature. They say, that if a Cow happen to eat where a Buffle Pastures, it will instantly die; for that the breath of the Buffle proves mortal poyson to other Cattel: The flesh of it is very gross and slimy, yet the Slaves eat freely of it, cut in slices and dry'd.

Here breeds in the Woods another Creature, * 1.202 seldom to be found elsewhere; they stile it Zebro, or Zebra, in shape like a Mule, with a Skin strip'd, on the head, and over the whole body, with colours of white, black, and blewish. They are very wild and swift, hard to be taken alive, and if taken, more dif∣ficult to be tam'd, though the Portuguese say, that some years since they sent four of these Azebras to Portugal, for a Present to the King, who us'd them for a Caroch, and rewarded the person who brought them over, with the No∣taryship of Angola, to him and his Heirs.

Empalanga, * 1.203 is a great Beast like an Ox, having two Horns, and very savoury; they are of several colours, some brown, others red, and some white.

Envoeri, * 1.204 also a great Beast like a Stag, with two Horns.

The Makoko, * 1.205 differs little from a Horse in bigness, but hath long and slender Legs, a long and gray Neck, with many white small stripes, and upon his

head long sharp Horns, wreath'd below: the Dung of this Creature resembles that of a Sheep.

Tygers, in the Congoish language call'd Engri, never hurt the Whites; * 1.206 so that when he meets a White and a Black together, he will assail the Black, and let the White pass unmedled with; therefore the King of Congo hath appointed a re∣ward for those, that can make appear by bringing of a Tygers Skin, that he hath kill'd one; with this proviso, that the hair of the Lips remain upon it, be∣cause they account them a venomous and mortal poyson.

The Leopards generally prey upon Cattel, so do the Lions, but they are not so cruel as the Tygers, nor so much dreaded.

The Quumbengo, or Wolves, here very numerous, have a thick head and neck, almost like the Wolfs in Europe, but much bigger, gray headed, speckl'd with black spots like the Tyger, but much more ill-favour'd: Foxes, Stags, Deer, Conies, and Hares, swarm in incredible multitudes, because they are never hunted as here with us.

Civet-Cats, the Blacks catch and make tame, for their perfume.

The Territory of Batta affords many Beavers, * 1.207 whose Skins are of great va∣lue, one of them being as dear as a Sheep; so that none is suffer'd to wear them without the King's Licence.

Moreover, Apes and wild Cats grow troublesome by their numbers, especi∣ally in Songo, by the River of Zaire.

Wild Boars, by them call'd Emgalo, may be seen here with two great Tusks, * 1.208 with which he tears violently; the Blacks stand more in fear of this, than any other Beast, and if they do but hear him, will make away with all speed possi∣ble. The filings of their Teeth (which the Portuguese highly esteem, and are very seldom gotten) taken in some Liquor, are reputed for a powerful Medi∣cine against Poyson; and Teeth themselves rubb'd against a stone, and admi∣nistred in a little Water, proves an infallible Cure against an Ague. They say, this Beast finding himself sick, regains his health by such rubbing of his Teeth upon a stone, and likewise with his Tongue.

Roebucks, call'd Golungo, breed here abundantly, but no bigger than Sheep, * 1.209 of a brown colour, with some white specks, and two sharp little Horns: seve∣ral of the Blacks kill and eat them, but the Congoians, * 1.210 and Ambondes will by no means taste their flesh; nay they bear such an antipithy to it, that they will not touch any thing out of that Pot, where their flesh hath been boyl'd, nor come into the place where the fire was that dress'd it, nor lay their hands on ought wherewith it was slain: But of this niceness can give no other rea∣son, but that the flesh is their Quistilla, that is, a food prohibited to them by Authority, and antient Custom, by Traditions deliver'd from hand to hand by their Fore-fathers; for they firmly and undoubtedly believe, that if they should do the contrary, they should not onely be lame in their bodies, but their fingers and toes would rot off.

Lastly, Bears, Foxes, and poysonous Serpents, frequent the Woods, and infinitely damage the people.

Besides these varieties of Quadrupeds, they shew many sorts of Wing'd Ani∣mals; as

First Peacocks, which none but the King onely may have, * 1.211 and he keeps them with great care in inclos'd Woods, upon the borders of Angola.

Of Partridges they have two sorts, tame and wild; as also Pheasants, Pi∣geons, Turtle-Doves; Eagles, Falcons, Merlins, Sparrow-Hawks, Pellicans,

green and red Parakitoes, Cranes, Storks, with red Bills and red Legs, and half white and half black Feathers.

There are also Owls, which they call Carjampemba, that is, Devils, because their appearing presages ill luck.

This Region produces two sorts of Bees; * 1.212 one that Hive in the Woods, in hollow Trees; and the other in the Roofs of Houses.

The Pismires, * 1.213 by them styl'd Ingingie, are of four sorts; the biggest have sharp stings, with which they raise swellings upon men; the other three are somewhat smaller.

Ensingie, * 1.214 is a little Beast, with a Skin speckled black and grey.

The Entiengio, a small Creature, very curiously streak'd, slender body'd, with a fine Tail and Legs, never comes upon the earth, for the very touch thereof proves mortal to it, therefore keeps in the Trees, and hath always twenty black Hair'd Creatures call'd Embis attending, that is, ten before it, and ten behind it. This they take in Snares, and when the ten first are taken, the ten behind be∣take themselves to flight; by which means the Animal bereav'd of its Life∣guard, at last is also taken.

The Skin of this little Beast bears such a value, that the King onely may wear it, unless perhaps by particular favour, some great Lords may be admitted; among which the Kings of Lovango, Cakongo, and Goy, are taken in.

Some have reported, * 1.215 that about Saint Salvadore there are Gold-Mines; but without any ground of probability, because the Portuguese are greedy of Gold, having convers'd so long in the Countrey, would not have left them un∣discover'd.

But they find many Copper-Mines in several places, * 1.216 especially in Pembo, near the before-nam'd City, whose Mettal shews so deep a tincture of yellow, that reasonable Artists have mistaken for Gold; but upon proof, the errour becomes quickly rectifi'd.

The like Mines are found in Songo, yielding better Copper than that of Pem∣bo; whereof in Lovando the Purple Armlets are commonly made, which the Portuguese carry to Calabare, Rio de Rey, and other places.

In Bamba, * 1.217 saith Linschot, there are Mines of Silver, and other Mettals; and in Sundo, to the East-side, of Crystal, and Iron; the last bearing the highest value, because it makes Knives, Swords, and other Weapons.

Quarries of Stone they meet with frequently; * 1.218 as also Rocks of red Mar∣ble, besides many precious Gemms; as Jasper, Porphirie, Jacinth, and the like.

The Inhabitants of Congo, * 1.219 known by the name of Macikongen, are very black; yet some few differ, being onely a kind of Olive-Colour: their Hair black, curl'd; their Bodies of a middle stature, and well Set; the whites of their Eyes of a Sea-green, and their Lips not so thick as other Blacks; wherein those of Congo differ from the other Blacks, especially from those of Nubia and Guinee.

Although some of them be surly and proud, * 1.220 yet in general they carry them∣selves very friendly towards strangers, being of a mild conversation, courte∣ous, affable, and easie to be overcome with reason; yet inclin'd to drink, espe∣cially Spanish-Wine and Brandy: Such as converse much with them, discern a quickness of reason and understanding, ordering their conceits and discourses so rationally, that the most knowing Persons take great delight in their facetious humor.

[illustration]

In the Wars they shew little Courage, for the most part going by the lose, if the Portuguese give them no assistance; for twenty Whites will put to flight a thou∣sand Congoians.

These of Sango, are a proud, lazy, and luxurious people; but have a winning behavior and volubility of speech, beyond those that dwell on the Northside of the River Zaire.

These of Bamba have the repute of the most Warlike and strongest of all in these parts, for they are such men, that can cut a Slave in two in the midst, with a Sword; or strike off the head of an Ox at a blow: And which is more, seem∣ing incredible, that one of their strongest men can with one Arm, hold up a vessel of Wine, which weighs three hundred and five and twenty pound weight, till the Wine be drawn out at the Spigget.

They have all a native propensity to Stealing; and what they so get, * 1.221 they drink out instantly with their best Companions in Wine; one of which goes before the maker of this Feast, and other Friends crying aloud, Behold the King of Congo! doing him that honour, for the good Chear and Courtesie receiv'd from him that day.

In the ways from the Cities Saint Salvadore, and Lovando Saint Paulo, many discarded Noblemen, fall'n into disfavor with the King, keep in great Troops and Companies, Robbing and Plundering all Travellers, till restor'd again into the Princes Grace.

They much practice the villanous Art of Poysoning, * 1.222 whereby for the small∣est trifle, they execute a fatal revenge: * 1.223 But those that use it had need have a care, for if the Author or Contriver be detected, he must die without mercy; which severity they abate nothing of at present: and for discovery, so strict inquiry is made, that it is very difficult to pass unknown; by which means this inhumane Custom begins to decay.

Eminent People, especially in Cities, go richly habited, * 1.224 in great and long Mantles, of fine Cloth or black Bais; under which white Shirts appearing on the

[illustration]

upper-parts of their Bodies; and upon the lower, wide and long Coats, of Sat∣tin, or Damask, Border'd or Embroyder'd about the edges: Some wear Clothes made of Peelings of Matombe-Trees, and Leaves of Palm, colour'd black and red; but all bare-legg'd, and upon their Heads onely white Cotton Caps, but adorn their Necks and Arms with Gold and Silver Chains, or Strings of the best red Coral.

Those of Sango wear Coats from the Navel to the Ankles, and Mantles over the rest; but the Women cover their Breasts.

They play at Cards for Pastime, * 1.225 Staking little Horns or Shells, reckon'd among them as current Money.

The Citizens of Congo maintain themselves chiefly by Merchandize; * 1.226 but the Countrey people, by Tilling of Land, and keeping of Cattel. Those about the River Zaire live by Fishing; others by drawing of Tombe-Wine; and some by Weaving.

When they travel from one place to another, * 1.227 they ride not, but are carry'd by men in Hammacks, as the foregoing Plate sets forth; or else sitting upon a kind of Biers, made fast with a Cord to a Pole, upon the shoulders of their Slaves, or by hir'd people; with an Umbrella overhead, to prevent the scorch∣ing of the Sun: wherefore those that will go speedily, take with them many Slaves for their Journey, that when the first grow weary, he may be carry'd by the other.

They Marry and Betroth in Congo after the manner of the Christians; but will not be circumscrib'd thereby from keeping every one as many Concu∣bines, as they can provide Clothes and Expences for.

When the young Maids in Congo dispose themselves for a double Estate, they go into a dark house, and Paint themselves red with Oyl and Takoel, Wood of Majumba, staying therein about a moneth; and then chooseth out her eldest Free-man, that hath been most diligent and serviceable to her, and takes him to Husband.

When any Man or Woman among them dies, they blame the Survivor, * 1.228 firmly believing such Persons cannot die by being called: to explain which, we must tell you, That they conceit, that none die either by Poyson, Violence, or otherwise, until their Friends in the other World call them; whereupon the Relations of the Deceased take away all things from the Survivor, and for eight Days afflict him with divers Pains and Torments, as shaving his Skin, and the like, saying, Thus must you bear the Punishment, if guilty, or having a hand in the Death of our Friends. The eight days ended, they bring him or her to a new Tryal, by Pleading; and if upon that quitted, they dwell still in the House, as before; but if found guilty, are banish'd thence.

There is a prevailing Custom among them, That if there be three Brothers, * 1.229 and one of them die, the two that survive, share his Concubines between them: And when either of the two remaining die, the longest Liver takes all: Af∣ter whose Decease, all the Concubines stay in the House, and become his due that happens to dwell therein afterwards.

Those of Congo reckon the Year by the Cossionoes, or Winter-seasons, * 1.230 which there begin upon the fifteenth of May, and end the fifteenth of November; The Months by the Full Moon, and the Days of the Week by their Markets; be∣cause they have every Day one in a several Place; but know not how to par∣cel out Time into Hours, or less Spaces.

These People, before the Arrival of the Portuguese, who instructed them in the Christian Faith, had no particular or proper Appellations; for the Com∣mon People call'd themselves by the Names of Herbs, Plants, Stones, Fowls, Beasts, and Living Creatures. The Lords bare the Title of the Lordship they commanded, as the Lord of Songo was call'd Mani-Songo, that is to say, Lord of Songo; Mani signifying Lord, and Songo the Countrey. But at this day, both Men and Women, Persons high and low, even the King himself, commonly re∣ceives a Name in Baptism.

They seem well experienc'd in several Handicrafts, but yet will not take upon them any Works of hard Labor.

Congo, Songo, and Bamba, vent few Slaves, and those the meanest of all; be∣cause being us'd to live idly, when they are brought to Labor they quickly die. The best come thither out of Amboille, Gingos, Jages, Caseudas, Quilax, Lem∣bo, and other Territories thereabouts, above Massignan in Angola.

The Europeans also drive a little Trade with Simboes: But the chief Dealing in Songo, consists in Pannos Sambos, Oyl of Palm, Palmito-Nuts, and such like. Heretofore they brought thence many, and those very large Elephants-Teeth; but of late fall'n to nothing.

The City Saint Salvadore is the Staple for the Portuguese Merchants in those Countreys, of whom the Natives desire chiefly to buy Cypress Clothes, or painted Table-clothes, call'd Capes de Verdura, blue Cans, Biramks, or Surats, Copper Basons, English Cloth, great Simbas of Lovando, Baesier, and other incon∣siderable Trifles, as Rings, Beads, and such like.

They use no Measure or Weight, except among the Portuguese; * 1.231 nor have any Housholdstuff, save onely Swords, Shields, and a few Slaves.

Their Wealth consists chiefly in Elephants-Teeth and Simbos, or little Shells, * 1.232 which pass in stead of Money.

The Citizens of Saint Salvadore amount to near forty thousand, of which most are Gentlemen and Nobles; yet wretchedly poor: For among them all, you shall scarce find ten or twelve that have a Gold Chain, or small Jewel.

The Revenues of the King consist especially in yearly Tributes, * 1.233 paid him by the Dukes of Bamba, Batta, Sundo, Nambanganga, Bumby, Mussulo, Oando, Quin∣gengo, and others under the Titles of Earldoms, as those of Pembo, Pango, and many others, which falls out on St. James his day, when the King rewards them with some small Trifle, as a Mark of his Favor. Some have not doubted to aver, That the whole Income of the King amounts not to above one hundred and twenty French Crowns, besides some small Presents made by every Lord above his Tribute, the greatest whereof rises but to a couple of Goats, the most onely giving Fruits, as Bacovens, Wine, Nuts, and Oyl of Palm.

They have no Coyn'd Money, * 1.234 either of Gold, Silver, or Copper; but, as we have often mention'd, make all their Markets with little Shells, call'd Sim∣boes, which pass here as Current, but in other Countreys of no esteem or va∣lue: And the Portuguese use them in their Passage, when they or their Pombe∣roes, that is Slaves, are sent with Merchandise to Pombo, and other Places lying up the Countrey, out of Angola, Lovando, Sante Paulo, through Congo.

Apothecaries or Doctors they have none, * 1.235 nor any Physick but what them∣selves make of Plants, Barks of Trees, Roots, Stones, Waters, and Oyl, which they administer for Agues, Fevers, and almost all other Maladies.

Fevers, * 1.236 the most common Distemper of this Climate, they cure with the beaten Root of Zandel-wood, * 1.237 mixt with the Oyl of Dates, anointing there∣with the Body of the Sick two or three times from Head to Foot. Pain in the Head, by letting Blood in the Temples, with little Shells sharpned; where∣with opening the Skin, they suck with the Mouth till they draw the Bloud.

The Pox, or Venerial Distemper call'd Chirangas, rages among them ex∣tremely, which they cure with red Wood call'd Tavilla.

The King appoints a Judge in every particular Province, * 1.238 to hear and deter∣mine Civil Causes, and Differences that happen; who, though there be no settled Laws or Statutes, may Imprison and Release, or impose a Pecuniary Mulct or Fine upon them. But in more weighty Matters every one may ap∣peal to the King; before whom also Criminal Causes come, wherein as Su∣preme Head he giveth Sentence.

In Matters of State, * 1.239 and such as concern Peace and War, the King takes ad∣vice of ten or twelve Councellors, his Favorites, who conclude for the Well∣fare of the Kingdom, and set forth and publish the Decrees, by his Order, and in his Name.

These punish Witchcraft and Idolatry openly, * 1.240 with great Severity con∣demning the least Sorcerer to the Fire. Whosoever killeth a Man, first having his Offence openly read before him, and then convicted by Witnesses, is con∣demn'd to die.

When an Offender suffers Death by Judgment of the King, * 1.241 he forfeits all his Goods and Slaves; so that none of his Relations enjoy ought that was his: And sometimes, to supply the King's Coffers, others are for small cause, or if but suspected, though the Witnesses fall short in the proof of the Fact, Banished, and their Goods Confiscate, and seized to the King's Use.

When they march out with an Army to incounter their Enemies, * 1.242 the Com∣manders wear Square Caps or Bonnets, trimm'd with Ostriches, Peacocks, and other Feathers; partly to make the greater shew, and partly to seem the more terrible. The upper part of their Bodies are naked, onely over the Shoulders they have Iron Chains hanging, with Links as big as ones little Finger.

The Common Souldiers use great and broad Swords, which they buy of the

[illustration]

Portuguese, Ponyards with Hafts like Knives, Bowes six Handfuls long, Ar∣rows, Muskets, Pistols, and Shields, made of Barks of Trees, and cover'd with a Buffles Hide. The whole Strength of their Battel consists in the Infan∣try or Foot-Souldiers; for they have very few or no Horse.

In the Onset and Retreat they use little Discipline or Order; * 1.243 but upon the Word of Command, the Drums beating, and Horns blowing, they march for∣ward far distant from one another, and in that Motion give the first Charge with a Flight of Arrows, which done, they very dexterously wheel about, and leap from one place to another, to avoid the Enemies Arrows. In the Van commonly some sturdy Youths draw out, who with the ringing of Bells that hang at their Girdles, incourage and animate the other. After the first have fought till they be weary, upon the sound of one of their Horns, directed by the Commander in Chief, they Retreat, and others instantly supply their Places; and this continues so long, till one of the Armies proves Victorious.

If it chance that the General of the Army be kill'd, they instantly betake themselves to Flight, and leave the Field, no Force or Authority being able to make them Rally.

In going out to War, they take little care to be furnished with Provision; so that many times when they come into a Countrey with their Army, they are forced for very hunger to leave the Enemy, though half Conquer'd, and Retreat into their own Countrey. But now at length they begin to take notice of these Miscarriages, and by the Instructions of the Portuguese, to alter and amend their evil Discipline.

Most of the Territories and Lordships of Congo, * 1.244 have peculiar Governors or Provincials, entituled Mani, that is, Lord; whereto they add the Name of the Province, as Mani-Vamma, that is, Lord of Vamma, Mani-Coansa, Mani-Hany, Mani-Kelle, and many others: But Bamba, Pembo, Pango, and Batta have the Ti∣tles of (a) 1.245 Dukedoms, and others of Earldoms; wherein the Blacks imitate the Portuguese, as their Apes: But the Portuguese stile themselves all Sovasen. When

they shew themselves openly before the People, they appear very Stately, sit∣ting upon great Velvet Chairs, with Velvet Cushions, and spreading upon the Ground before them costly Tapestries; and this also the Portuguese taught them, to strike an awful Reverence into their Subjects, of their Grandezza.

The Titles that the King uses to manifest his Greatness, * 1.246 are these: Mani-Congo, by the Grace of God, King of Congo, Angola, Makamba, Okanga, Cumba, Lulla, Zouza; Lord of the Dukedoms of Batta, Sunda, Bamba, Amboille, and the Territories thereof; Lord of the Earldoms of Songo, Angoy, Cacongo, and of the Monarchy of Ambon∣des; Ruler of the great and wonderful River of Zaire.

He rules with absolute Power and Sovereignty over his Subjects, * 1.247 who never approach near him, but with the most humble Postures of Reverence; and whoever fails to tender their due Respects and Obedience, he punishes with Perpetual Slavery.

But the Pomp of his Majesty and Greatness he shews especially when he Treats his Nobility, * 1.248 that are serviceable to him. This himself in Person deals out in the following manner.

At Noon the King causeth all the Noble-men, then in the Bounds of the Palace, to be numbred: Whereupon all the Pots are brought before them, one with boyl'd Beans, another with Flesh, and a third with Mille, without any Spicery but Salt, and some Oyl of Palm. To the greatest Lords he sends every one his Part, in a Wooden Platter, together with a small Flask of Palm-Wine: But those of less Quality are by Name call'd up, and Accommodated by six, seven, or eight together, to whom the King directs such a great Pot of Mille, Beans, or Flesh, according to their Number.

After the Feast is ended, they come all into the King's Presence, and falling upon their Knees, clap their Hands, and bow their Heads, in token of Thanks and Submission, and so depart to their own Homes; onely some Favorites stay all the day long, and drink so much Tobacco and Wine of Palm, that every one, as well the King as Nobles, are so highly fluster'd, that they cannot go from the Place.

When the King goes abroad, * 1.249 not only the Nobility, but also those that dwell about the Court, or by occasion are found there at that time, attend him; some going before, others following; but all dancing and tumbling with an∣tick Postures, to the Musick of certain ill-tun'd Drums, and long Ivory Flutes like Cornets, until the King be within his House.

At the King's going to Church, presently, as soon as he is come without the Palace, not onely his own Grandees, which at all times are ready, but also the Portuguese, as well Temporality as Clergy, must wait upon him, and again from the Church to his Palace; but at no other time are the Portuguese oblig'd to such Attendance.

When he sheweth himself openly to the People, he is always attired in his richest Robes, that is, a great long Mantle or Cloak, of Silk, Velvet, or fine Cloth, most splendidly beautifi'd: On his Fingers he hath some Gold Chains, intermixt with fine Coral; and upon his Head, a bordered and preciously adorned Cap.

He hath in his Palace about a hundred Waiters, who all have Lodgings in the Court. He eats his Meat after the manner of Europe, at a high Table, where he always sits alone, with some few Pieces of Plate for his use. All his Waiters go cloathed in black Mantles of Bais.

The Chair upon which he sits hath Covers of red or green Velvet, fastned

[illustration]

on with great gilt Nails, and costly Tapestry spread before him, and Cushi∣ons for his Foot-stool.

When the Hollanders in the Year Sixteen hundred forty two, * 1.250 came the first time to the King, as Ambassadors from Lovando Sante Paulo, immediately after they had forced it from the Portuguese, they got Audience at the Evening, in the Dark, passing through a Gallery two hundred Paces long, set on both sides with two Ranks of Men, with Wax Candles in their Hands burning.

The King sate in a small Chappel, hang'd with Rush Mats, * 1.251 from the top of which a Branch hung with Wax Candles; Habited in a Cloth of Gold Coat and Drawers, and about his neck three heavy Gold Chains: He had on his right Thumb a very large Granate or Ruby Ring, and on his left Hand two great Emeraulds; upon the left Sleeve of his Coat, a Gold Cross was fastned, richly enclos'd in a piece of well-polish'd Crystal: On his Head a fine white Cap, and on his Legs a pair of Russet Boots. At his right side stood an Officer, that sometime gently fanned the Air with a Handkerchief; and at his left side another, holding a Tin Bowe, and a Tin Scepter, cover'd with fine strip'd Cloth in his Hand. His Seat a red Velvet Spanish Chair, aloft above which, upon a Border, was embroider'd in Letters, Don Alvarez King of Congo. Right before him lay spread a great Turkey Carpet, and over his Head hung a Canopy of white Sattin, set with Gold, and trimm'd about with a deep Fringe. A little on the right side kneeled before him Don Bernardo de Menzos, his Interpreter and Secretary.

The King's Apparel is very glorious and rich, * 1.252 being for the most part Cloth of Gold or Silver, with a long Velvet Mantle.

This King wears commonly a white Cap upon his Head; * 1.253 so do his Fidal∣goes, or Nobility, in his Favour: And this is indeed so eminent a token thereof, that if the King be displeased with any of them, he onely causes his Cap to be taken off from his Head: For this white Cap is a Cognizance of Nobility or Knighthood here, as in Europe every Order hath a peculiar Badge to distinguish it.

When the King goeth abroad with all his Nobles adorn'd with white Caps on their Heads, * 1.254 he sometimes puts on a Hat, and at pleasure lays that aside, and resumes his Cap, which he then puts very loosely on, upon set purpose that the Wind should blow it off the easier; which according to design hap∣ning, his Fidalgoes run to take it up, and bring it to the King again: but the King as offended at the Disgrace, will not receive the same, but goeth home very much troubled; the next day he sends two or three hundred Blacks abroad to gather in Taxes; so punishing his whole Kingdom, for the offence of the Wind in blowing off his Cap, which he caused of set purpose.

He hath one Married Wife, * 1.255 which they call Mani-Mombada, that is Queen; all the rest, * 1.256 being no small number, are Concubines. For this Wife a Yearly Tax is gathered through the whole Kingdom, by them call'd Pintelso; every House paying a Rate for their Beds, viz. a Slave for every Spans breadth: so that if it be three Spans broad, they pay three Slaves.

The Queen hath her Lodgings in the Palace, * 1.257 apart, with her Ladies of Ho∣nor, which have little Courtship or Art to set them forth; yet they go almost every night abroad to take their pleasure, and to satisfie their wanton desires; onely some stay according to their turns to wait upon the Queen, who will her self, if she finds a convenient opportunity, and a Person that dares venture to come in the Night over the Straw Walls into the Court, to her private Lodg∣ings, not be backward to receive their proffer'd Kindness: But this she doth with great circumspection; for if the King should hear of it, it would endan∣ger both their Lives.

The King, on the contrary, keeps as many Concubines as he pleases; as well of the Ladies of Honor belonging to the Queen, as of others, without check: but the Priests spare not to reprove him for it openly in their Preach∣ing.

When the King dies, his Relations put him into the Grave in a Sitting Po∣sture, to whom formerly a dozen young Maids leap'd out of free choice, and were buried alive, to serve him in the other Life, as believing, That he should not remain dead, but go into that other World, and live there. These Maids were then so earnest and desirous of this Service to their deceased Prince, that for eagerness to be first, they kill'd one another. And their Parents and Friends gather together all sorts of stately Clothes, and put them into the Grave, to the intent that when they arrive in that strange Countrey, they may buy such things as they have occasion for therewith.

The Funeral of the King, in stead of other Mourning, is celebrated eight days together with continual Eating and Drinking; and this kind of Mourn∣ing they call Malala, and every Year after Solemnize it with an Anniversary-Meeting in the same manner.

This Custom is not only us'd for the King, but also for the Nobility, ac∣cording to their Quality, and continues to this day; but by the progress of Christianity, teaching better things, they have laid aside totally the burying of People alive.

In the Succession to the Crown they observe no Order; * 1.258 neither Legitimati∣on nor Seniority taking place further than the Ruling Grandees please; they, according to the humor of barbarous Nations, esteeming all alike Honorable: For which reason the Nobles chuse one out of the King's Sons (whether Legi∣timate or Illegitimate it matters not) for whom they have the most respect, or think the fittest; or else perhaps sometimes sway'd by extravagant Fan∣cies,

relinquish all the Children, and give the Crown to a Brother or Nephew.

The Coronation of the King they Solemnize after this manner. * 1.259 All the Nobles and Portuguese assemble before the Palace, in a four-square open Court, built for that purpose of old, encompass'd with a slight Stone Wall about five Yards high; in the middle of which stands a great Velvet Chair and a Cushion, with a stately Carpet spread before it, and a Crown wrought of Gold, Silk and Silver-Wyre laid thereon; as also three Gold Armlets, about the thickness of a Finger, and a Velvet Purse, wherein is the Pope's Bull, or Letters of Confirmation to the new King.

The intended King after some time comes into this Congregation, by in∣vitation of the Nobless concern'd primarily in the Election; where all things prepared, there stands one up, which in the nature of a Herald proclaims these words:

You that shall be King, be no Thief, neither covetous nor revengeful; but be a friend of the Poor: You shall bestow the Alms for the releasement of Prisoners or Slaves, and help the Needy, and be charitable to the Church, and always endeavour to keep this Kingdom in Peace and Quietness, and fully observe and keep the same without breach of League with your Brother the King of Portugal.

After this Speech ended, the Musick begins to play with excellent Melody; which having continued a convenient season, the last two Fidalgo's go seeming∣ly to seek him amongst the People, the remaining part of them sitting upon the Ground. These two in a short time find him they sought for, and bring∣ing him one by the right Arm, and the other by the left, place him upon the foremention'd Royal Chair, and put the Crown upon his Head, on his Arms the Gold Armlets, and the usual black Cloth, or Bayze-Cloak, upon his Body; then he lays his Hand upon a Mass-Book and the Evangelists, which the Priest holds to him, Clothed in a white Garment, hung with white Tassels, and the King swears to do and keep all that he hath been forewarned of, by him the formention'd Herald. After the ending of these Solemnities, the twelve Noble∣men and the King go to the Palace, accompanied with all those that were pre∣sent at the Coronation, who cast Earth and Sand upon him, for a Token of rejoycing, and for an Admonition, that though he be now King, he shall be Dust and Ashes.

The King after his Crowning remains eight days in his Palace, never going forth; in which time all the Black Nobility, none excepted, and all the Portu∣guese come to visit and wish him good success: the Blacks do him a kind of Homage, lying down upon both Knees, clapping their hands, and kissing the King's Hand: the Portuguese sit kneeling upon one Knee, and so the Priests and Clergy, by that humble posture acknowledging his Soveraignty.

After the eight days past the King appears in the Market, and makes a Speech to the People, expressing his readiness for the performing of that which was propounded to him, with assurance to them, that he will seek nothing more than the quiet and welfare of his Kingdoms and Subjects, and the propa∣gating of the Christian Faith.

The People of Congo, take the Oath of Fidelity to their King, like other Christians, but forget it quickly, Murdering him upon any sleight occasion, ei∣ther by Insurrections or Treason; so that within these forty or fifty years they have had many Kings: for if all things go not to their minds, or if it Rains too much or too little, or if any other accident happens, the King bears the blame.

[illustration]

The Earl of Songo, the most Potent in all Congo, was subject to this King; but considering the Woods of Findemguolla, which surrounds his Countrey like a Bulwark, he fortifi'd it, and made it almost impregnable; so casting off the Yoke, he will not acknowledge the King of Congo for his Soveraign, but onely as a Friend of Songo.

Formerly this Earl, before the taking of the City Lovando St. Paulo by the Netherlanders, in the Year Fifteen hundred forty and three, by instigation of the Portuguese, would have burnt their Ware-houses, but that he was afterwards prevented, and his anger aswaged.

This Province of Songo yields Copper, * 1.260 much better than that of Congo, and some Cotton, but they Vend little of it.

In the Year sixteen hundred thirty six, * 1.261 the King of Congo, Don Alvares, the se∣cond of that Name, for some cause given by the foremention'd Earl, with a great Company of Men, and the assistance of a Company of eighty Portuguese Soldiers of Lovando St. Paulo, drew into the Field: But the Songo's, by a sudden Sallying out of the Wood, * 1.262 routed the King's Army, and took him Prisoner; so that for his release and restoration to his Kingdom, he was forced to give to the Earl two Territories, the one a Principality, call'd Mokata, a great Land of Tillage, lying where the River Zair bordereth nearest to Songo. Yet after∣wards the Quarrel was renew'd, and Forces on both sides drawn into the Field, * 1.263 and the Controversie coming to be decided by the Sword, the King lost the Day, and together with it many Slaves. These two Victories exceedingly puffed up the Earl. It was imputed to the King as a great miscarriage, that this last he drew into the Field with a small Force, whereas he hath innumera∣ble People under his Command: but this oversight he quickly amended, and hath taken severe revenge of the Songo's for the Losses formerly received. But this kept them not long quiet, * 1.264 for the old Earl being dead, in the Year Sixteen hundred forty and one, there arose a new and bloody War between the King and the Earl Don Daniel du Silva, arising upon this ground: When after the

Decease of Don Michael, who Rul'd about the Year Sixteen hundred and six, his Son, the foremention'd Don Daniel du Silva, could not come to succeed, be∣cause a Faction rais'd against him was too strong, he fled to the Duke of Bamba; in whose Court he remain'd a long time: but at last, by the help of his Confe∣derates, got the possession of his Inheritance, and burning with revenge for his sufferings and disgrace, he gave occasion of Quarrel, by refusing to request of the King of Congo, according to the old Custom, the confirmation of his Possessi∣ons, first accusing him as one that had a hand in his long Expulsion, and there∣withall adding, that the Election of his Subjects did enough confirm him in his Government, and therefore he needed no other. The King of Congo enra∣ged hereat, and accounting it a great dis-reputation and diminution to his Royal Authority, to be so Bearded, as a manifestation of his high displeasure, placed his Son, the Prince Don Alphonso, in the Principality of Makata, former∣ly given, as we have said, to the Earl of Songo, for releasing of the King Don Alvarez, giving him in charge not onely to keep it, but from thence to make War upon the Earl. Hereupon Discontents daily growing on, the King of Congo raised a great Army, which he gave to Don Alphonso, who therewith invaded Son∣go, and using all the extremities of War both against his Countrey and Subjects: But the Songo's, a very Warlike People, in the Year Sixteen hundred forty and five, the nine and twentiteth of April, in a Pitch'd Battel, defeated and put to flight the King's Army, and took the fore-mention'd Prince of Mokata, toge∣ther with many Grandees, Prisoners, and according to the Custom of the Countrey, chopt off all their Heads; onely he kept Alphonso Prisoner, being his Cousin, and would not suffer him to depart from him.

The King by this overthrow provoked more than ever to take revenge, raised in the following Year so great a Force, that he doubted not therewith to over-run the whole Earldom at once: Of this Army, consisting of almost all the Nobility, together with three or four hundred Moulatto's, the Duke of Bamba was made General, and therewith drew near to the Borders of Songo; but was unawares fall'n upon by an Ambuscade out of the Wood Emtinda Guola, on the last of July, and his Army not onely totally defeated, * 1.265 but the Duke himself necessitated to yield to the Earl some Places and Countreys, * 1.266 before wrested from him, for the release of Prince Alphonso his Son. Who was no sooner come, home in safety, but the Congo's, inclin'd to the old revenge, and not being able to digest the disgrace, began new Quarrels, which quickly broke forth into a great flame.

During this War the King sent Ambassadors with Letters to Brazile to Grave Maurice, * 1.267 who had the Government of that Countrey for the States of Holland, together with many Slaves for a Present to the Council, and two hun∣dred more, with a Gold Chain, to Grave Maurice himself. Not long after their ar∣rival came thither also three Ambassadors from the Earl; one of which was Shipt from thence to Holland to the States; the two other required of Grave Maurice, that he would give no Assistance to the King of Congo; which in some manner he hearkned to, and to that end wrote Letters to their Governors in Congo and Angola, not to intermeddle in the Wars of these two Princes, for that they were both in League with the Hollanders.

The Ambassadors having been treated with all Civility, * 1.268 and receiv'd their Dispatch, return'd with Letters and Gifts: to the King was sent a long scarlet Mantle, border'd with Gold and Silver Lace, a Silk Coat, and a Beaver Hat, with a Hat-band about it, wrought all over with Gold and Silver; and to the

[illustration]

Earl, a Sedan, cover'd with red Silk, edg'd with Gold and Silver, a long Mantle, and a Beaver Hat; besides, in particular from Grave Maurice, a Sword, with a Girdle richly embroider'd with Silver.

Afterwards the King and the Duke of Bamba the second time sent Ambassa∣dors to Grave Maurice, * 1.269 which he receiv'd and entertain'd sumptuously, desiring his favour, that they might go into the Netherlands; which being granted, and they arrived in Holland, they shew to that State, and to the Prince of Orange, their Credentials from the King, and other Letters to the Governors of the West-India Company; to whom, among other things, they declared many Cu∣stoms of their Countrey, and in particular, how their Kings sits upon his Throne, causing his Greatness to appear by long silence; As also how the Inhabitants, after the manner of the Heathens, did worship and adore him.

Before the coming of the Portuguese into these Countreys, * 1.270 and their con∣verting them to Christianity, the People of Congo had several sorts of Idols; for every one according to his pleasure, without any rule or reason, chose him∣self a god which seemed most for his advantage. Some worshipped Dragons, Serpents, Goats, Tygers, and many other living Creatures; others adored Fowls, Plants, Trees, yea, the very Skins of these Beasts stuffed with Straw. To these Idols they used several Ceremonies, which chiefly consisted in humi∣lity, as bending of Knees, laying their Faces on the Earth, and daubing them with Dirt, and sacrificing, or offering to them all their best and dearest things; but at last they were brought to light out of this Idolatry, in which they had for many Ages lay'n drown'd, by the endeavors of the Portuguese; the manner and occasion whereof happen'd thus:

When Don John, the second of that Name, King of Portuguese, was bent up∣on the discovery of the East-Coast and Countrey of Africa and the East-Indies, in the Year Fourteen hundred and eighty four, he equipped a Fleet to that purpose under the Command of Johan Cano, who being come before the River Zair, sent Agents to the King of Congo; but they not returning, he took four

Congo's that came to see the Ships, and after some time spent in Coasting re∣turn'd, carrying them with him, whom the King receiv'd with great courtesie, and immediately dispatched Cano back to Congo with great Presents; who being come upon the Coast, sent one of these four Natives to the King of Congo, en∣treating the return of the Portuguese, whereto easily consenting, Cano sent home the three remaining Congo's.

The fore-mention'd Portuguese, during the time of their stay and detention in Congo, became so intimately acquainted with the Duke of Songo, Unckle to the then King, and a Man of a noble spirit, that they instructed him in the Christian Religion, and demonstrated so plainly the errour of their Idolatrous Ways, that the Duke went himself to the King in Person to relate it to him, and advise with him about the change of their Religion; whereupon the King after many perswasions and arguments, at length condescended to send an Embassy to Portugal, requesting the King to send some Priests for their in∣struction; and accordingly Zakuten that had been there before, was sent with Instructions, Letters, and a noble Retinue, who arriving there, first learn'd the Portuguese Tongue, and soon after he, with all that belong'd to him, received Baptism: This gave such encouragement to King John, that according to de∣sire he dispatcht away Zakuten, with some Priests, and all sorts of Church-Ornaments, where both Prince and People received them with inexpressible joy.

The first that publickly received Baptism was the Duke of Songo, * 1.271 with his Son, in the Year Fourteen hundred ninety one, himself being named Emanuel, and his Son, Anthony: afterwards the King himself follow'd the steps of the good Earl, taking the Name of John; the Queen, Eleanor; and his youngest Son, Alphonso. This good example prevailed with many, not of the Nobles onely, but of the Commonalty of all sorts, and each succeeding day increased their number; since which time the Portuguese have not spared any hazards, labour or pains, both to increase and confirm the new planted Religion, which hath been answered with a suitable success.

Amongst these are many Schoolmasters, who besides Reading and Writing, teach the Catechism, wherein they make their Scholars perfect; who in gene∣ral follow and obey the Commands and Canons of the Holy Catholick Church.

But although most of them at this day in some measure profess the Christian Religion, many still retain Idolatry according to their antient Use; * 1.272 and others who boast themselves Christians, practice nothing agreeable thereto, except in the presence of the Whites, and in a place where it may redound to their Profit, and then they will cunningly play the Hypocrites: and at best intermingling their vain Idolatry therewith.

The Churches there are built after the manner of their Houses, wherein are always attending many Priests, both Mullato's and Blacks, which oftentimes ce∣lebrate Mass.

When the Duke goes to those sacred Duties, he puts on his most costly Ap∣parel, adorn'd with many Gold Chains, or Strings of pure Corral, Usher'd by Musick, attended with a Guard of Musquetiers, and follow'd by a great throng of People.

In the Year Sixteen hundred and four, and again in One thousand six hun∣dred forty seven, by order of the Pope, at the entreaty of the Congian King, Don Alvares the second, fourteen Capuchins from Sicily and Cadiz Landed in Songo,

from whence with Licence they travel'd to Congo, onely leaving some of their number to propagate and Preach there.

Those of Oando say they are Christians, * 1.273 and if they listed, might be so re vera, having such excellent Instructions daily inculcated to them.

In the Reign of Alvarez the first of Congo, the Christians received not onely a Check, but underwent heavy Persecution, when Patience onely used Arma Ec∣clesiae, Preces & Lacrymae; but Providence never suffering such raging impiety to go unpunisht, for Sequitur impius, ulter a tergo Deus, the Jages, who had long possessed the Kingdom of Ansiko; a savage People, residing in Huts and Woods, without Prince or Government, like the wild Arabs, fell into the Kingdom of Congo like an irresistible inundation, * 1.274 ruining the same with Fire and Sword. The Province of Batta lay first in their way, where, on a certain Plain before the City of St. Salvadore, the King gave them Battel, but with the loss of many People, insomuch that he was forced to retreat into the City; from whence, not after driven, he fled for safety, together with many Portuguese and chief Lords of the Realm, to Ilhas das Cavallus, that is, Horse-Island, leaving the City to the Jages for a Prize, who burnt it, together with the Churches, laying waste the whole, and carrying away the Inhabitants, whom they kill'd and eat: The Husbandmen fled to the Woods and Wildernesses, chusing rather to die there of Hunger, than to fall into the hands of such inhumane Cannibals: Nor did that necessity onely follow the Woods, but the Famine spread over the inhabit∣ed Parts, so that for a little Meat a Slave was given, at that time worth at least ten Crowns; nay more, thousands sold themselves for Slaves to the Portuguese of the Island of St. Thomas, to preserve themselves from starving; amongst which were some of the Royal Blood, and many of the chief Lords.

The Congo's King finding himself too weak to withstand his Enemies, by the Counsel of the Portuguese sent an Agent to Don Sebastian, then King of Portugal, praying his Aid; who immediately sent him a Supply by Shipping of six hun∣dred Soldiers: In which Expedition many Nobles and Reformado's put them∣selves into the Service, under the Command of Don Francis de Govea, a Man who had often been in Asia and Africa; who after a fortunate Voyage arriving at St. Thomas Isle, where by Order they put in for Recruits of Ammunition, and to Victual and refresh, they went over to Congo, and Landed at Horse-Island, where the King of Congo then had his abode; where the General having received new Supplies of Portuguese and Congo's, went over to the Main Land, and Fought the Jages, beating them in divers Battels; insomuch that Alvarez, after a year and a halfs exile, was restor'd to his Realm.

The King being thus re-setled in his Throne, required for the establishing of the Christian Religion, that Priests might be sent thither; and as an acknow∣ledgment of this Aid and Assistance, he obliged himself by a Written Obliga∣tion, to send yearly a Present of Slaves, and withall to own him as his Lord: The King of Portugal refused the same, modestly returning, That he acknowledged the King of Congo for his Brother at Arms; but answer'd his Desire for establish∣ing the Christian Religion. At length after four years the General departed, onely leaving behind many Portuguese, as a Guard to secure the Peace of Congo for the future. Thus far we have proceeded in the Affairs of Congo: But Eastward of Lovango, and North-east of Goy and Cakongo, lie divers unknown Countreys, as Bokke, or Bukkemeale, Ukango, Sondy, Pombo, Fungeno, Makoko, Giri∣tuma, Combo, d' Okango, Amboille; of which we shall give you some particulars.

The TERRITORY of BOKKE, or BUKKE-MEALE.

THis Territory, whose Inhabitants are Jages, lieth (according to suppositi∣on) about a hundred Leagues up in the Countrey, to the North-East of Lovango; for the Blacks which go thither to Trade; are three moneths in their journey, going and coming.

Out of this Countrey cometh most of the Elephants Teeth, which the Moui∣risen of Lovango buy of the Jages, who go higher up in the Countrey to buy them of a sort of little people, call'd Mimos, who are under the great Makoko's Com∣mand, and live in the Desarts. The Jages report, that these Dwarf-like Race, can by Enchantment, make themselves invisible, and so kill or shoot the Ele∣phants, whose flesh they eat, and sell their Teeth to the Jages, which barter the same with the Mouirisen for Salt, carry'd from Lovango, by Slaves in Matteten, or Bakets upon their heads.

But here we must take notice, that all the Teeth which the Mimo's bring, are not of Elephants which they Shoot, but many are of those which die naturally, and are found in the Woods, and therefore look of a decay'd colour, as if they were rotten.

The Inhabitants of Bokke-Meale are subject to the Command of the King of Lovango, pay him Tribute, and serve him in the Wars. * 1.275

Between Lovango and Bokke-Meale, lieth a desolate place, full of great Woods, six or seven days journey, and without other Inhabitants than Elephants, Ty∣gers, Wolves, and such like wild Beasts.

The Countrey of OKANGO.

OKango, a large and mighty Territory, lieth to the East of Kongo. * 1.276

The Inhabitants file their Teeth sharp, and lead an idle and shirking life; neither able to endure labour or hardship, and therefore con∣temptible among their neighbors and strangers.

In this Countrey they make Clothes of the Bark of Trees, some with Flow∣ers, and others without, which they send to other Countreys, in exchange for such things as they want, and submit to the Commands of a Sovasen, whom they entitle Mani.

The Territories of CONDE, or POMBO de OKANGO.

ABout a hundred and fifty-miles, North-East from the Dukedom of Batta, you come to a Countrey call'd Congo, or Pombo de Okango, wa∣ter'd by the swift and deep River Coango, which looseth its course by running into the River Zaire.

The Natives aver, that there are found Eastward of the River Coango, a white People with long Hair, though not so fair as the Europeans.

THE KINGDOM OF FUNGENO.

THis Jurisdiction of Fungeno is tributary and subject to the great Makoko, * 1.277 and lies between the River Zaire, and Coango, Eastwards of Konde, or Pombo d' Okango.

The Portuguese Trade here for few Slaves; chiefly with a sort of small Pans, or Clouts, made of the Pith or Bark of the Matombe-Tree, pull'd out long∣ways.

These Clouts the Portuguese always us'd at Lovando, in stead of Money; and every thing may be had in the Markets for them: nor do the Portuguese make a small gain out of them.

The Trade of the Portuguese, limits not it self to these people onely, but ex∣tends further to the Dominion of Nimeamay, lying to the South-East of Makoko, who travel from their own Countrey thither without any fear or hazard, in regard the Kings of Nimeamay and Makoko hold a friendly correspondence, and firm league of amity with each other.

THE KINGDOM OF MAKOKO.

MAkoko, a potent and large Jurisdiction, lieth Northward of Zaire, be∣hind Congo above two hundred, or (as others) two hundred and fifty Spanish miles, from Lovango, or Congo.

The Inhabitants bear one general name of Monsoles, or Metica's; being also Anthropophagi, or Men-eaters, like the Jages, or rather indeed the right Jages.

The eminentest place of this Kingdom, known to the Whites is Monsol, seated about two hundred miles from the Sea-shore.

This King hath the repute of greater puissance than he of Congo, as having ten other Kings Tributary to him.

This King keeps constantly, within appointed places in his Court, two hun∣dred Slaves; of which, part are given him yearly for Tribute, and part con∣demn'd persons; all fed by their keepers, like stall'd Oxen, or fatted Sheep and Hogs, being the store to supply the King and his Courtiers with choice Provision, for whose use slain, and their flesh serv'd up as a delicate Morsel; for they eat it rather out of a devilish wantonness, than necessity, for that al∣most all sorts of Cattel breed there in infinite multitudes; neither is the Land wanting of any other product fit for humane Food.

In Monsol is kept a great Market of Slaves, * 1.278 whither the Portuguese of Lovango send their Pomberoes with Merchandizes, which sometimes tarry out a year or two; when at last, having bought some Slaves, Elephants Teeth, and Cop∣per, they make the new-bought Slaves to carry all on their heads to Lovango; so that they are at no charges, to bring their biggest Teeth or Copper out of the Countrey.

The King according to his manner, keeps in great State and Pride, * 1.279 though falling short of Congo, whose Princes have been instructed to bear a Majestick Port, by the Portuguese so long resident among them.

The Treasure and Riches of this great Prince, consists chiefly in Slaves, * 1.280 Simbos of Lovando, Boesies, or small East-India Horns, and some Clothes; things with the Whites of a small value, but by them esteem'd more than the best Gold or Silver.

He keeps continually a mighty and very numerous Army upon his borders, * 1.281 to prevent the Innovation of an implacable Enemy, call'd Mujako; who lives Northward from him; of whom we have as yet no other knowledge, than to guess him powerful, in regard he could never be subdu'd by Makoko.

In the Desarts of this Kingdom inhabit those little men mention'd before, to shoot and kill the Elephants, and sell their Teeth to the Jages; as they again to those of Congo and Lovango, who exchange them for other commodities with the Portuguese, and other Europeans.

The Kingdom of GIRIBUMA, or GIRINGBOMBA.

THis Principality hath its scituation to the North-East of Makoko, * 1.282 and the King thereof very powerful, holding as his Tributaries fifteen other great Lords; yet willingly, never drawn to quarrel with his neighbours, especially of Makoko, with whom he holds a firm allyance, which is the easier maintain'd, because they all agree in their heathenish Supersti∣tion.

East South East from the great Makoko, you arrive at another mighty King∣dom, call'd Monimugo, and by others Nimeamay; whose Jurisdiction reaches to the borders (as some say) of the Kingdoms of Mombase, Quiloe, Soffale; as in the Description of those Countreys shall be more spoken of at large.

POMBO.

THe Countrey properly call'd Pombo, lieth more than a hundred Leagues from the Sea Coast, and (as some say) touching upon Aethiopia supe∣rior Abysine.

Others divide Pombo into divers Kingdoms, stretching themselves as far as a great Lake (perhaps the Lake Zambre) between both the Seas. But the cer∣tain place where this Lake arrives, is altogether unknown, which no White ever yet heard of, or hath seen; onely the Portuguese relate, that a certain Kaffe of Mosambique which travel'd cross through the main Land of Saffola to Angola, came by it.

Both the Portuguese and Blacks that live in Lovango, * 1.283 Congo, and Lovando Saint Paul, drive a great trade here by their Servants sent thither with Merchandize; who chiefly for Slaves, * 1.284 Elephants Teeth, and Panos Limpos, barter and exchange Canary, Malago, or Medera-Wines, great Simbos, Boxes, and other Com∣modities.

These Servants or Pomberos have yet other Slaves under them, sometimes a hundred, or a hundred and fifty, which carry the Commodities on their heads up in the Countrey, as we have heretofore related.

Sometimes those Pomberos stay out a whole year, and then bring back with them four, five, and six hundred new Slaves. Some of the faithfullest remain oftentimes there, sending what Slaves they have bought to their Masters, who return them other Commodities to trade with anew.

The Whites are necessitated to drive their Trade in this manner, * 1.285 by reason (according to their relation) it is impossible for them to wade through the bad∣ness of the ways, and undergo so great hunger and trouble, as attends that Journey, besides the unwholesomeness of the Air, which causes extraordinary swellings in the heads of the Whites.

Their journey from the Sea-Coast out of Lovango, and Lovando Saint Paul to Pombo, proves very toilsome to the Blacks themselves, because there be many Rivers, which sometimes after the Rain, grow so deep, but they stop the other hazards, often arising by the barbarous Jages.

This Province owns for its supream Lord and Governor, the great Ma∣koko.

The Dukedom of AMBUILLA, or AMBOILLE.

EAstvvards of Quingengo, one days Journey, * 1.286 begins the Dukedom of Am∣buila, or Amboille in the North, and North-East, divided by the River Loze, from Oande. On the East side, this Dukedom hath the Territory of Quitere, Quiandange; and to the South, Kanvangombe, where the Rivers Danda and Loze (as some say) take their original.

This Principality hath many pleasant Fields, Trees, and Fruits, and abounds with Cattel, as Goats, Sheep, Hogs, and Cows: It was never subject to Congo, * 1.287 but vies with it for wealth and magnitude, holding in subjection above fifteen Domi••ions; whereof the five chiefest are Matuy-Nungo, Pingue, Hoiquyanbole, Ambuibe, and Lovando; the other not nam'd.

This Countrey affords many Slaves, and the Trade driven there, is in Pombo.

The Kingdom of ANGOLA, or rather DONGO.

THis Countrey, by the Portuguese call'd Angola, * 1.288 lies between the Ri∣ver Danda and Quansa; the name of Angola belongs not properly to the Land, but is the Title of the Prince, who assum'd and continues it from the first King thereof, who fell off from Congo, to whom it belong'd, by right of inheritance: the right name being Dongo, although formerly, * 1.289 and still by some call'd Ambonde, and the Inhabitants Ambond's.

It spreads in the West to the Sea Coast, and then from Danda or Bengo, * 1.290 to the River Quansa, a tract of about fifteen miles, but runs about a hundred miles up into the Countrey. Jarrik gives it for borders; in the North, the Kingdom of Congo; in the South, that of Mataman; in the East, Malemba or Majemba; and in the West, the Sea; where it spreads (saith he) from the River Quansa, about ten degrees South, Latitude, and ends at the Sea near Cowes-bay, a tract of five and thirty Leagues. Pigafet adds to it all the Countreys, from Cowes-bay before∣mention'd, to Cabo Negroe; a tract of about fifty more.

This Kingdom of Angola (for so we shall stile it) is water'd by divers Rivers; as Bengo, Quansa, Lukala, and Kalukala.

The River Quansa, for Danda and Bengo, are included before in Congo; * 1.291 lying in nine degrees and twenty minutes South-Latitude; four miles and a half

Southward off The Sleepers-Haven; or six miles from Cape de Palmarinko; and five to the Northward of Cape Ledo, * 1.292 hath an uncertain original; for it is reported, that no Whites have ever been so far, as where the same rises: But the common opinion holds, that it comes out of the great Lake Zambre, by many made the head of the Rivers Zaire, Nyle, Niger, and many others.

It hath been liken'd to the River Lukar, * 1.293 in Spain, being at the entrance about half a League wide; and at the Northside, deepest to come in with Ships. It car∣ries but twelve foot in depth at high-water, ebbing and flowing about four foot; but within they find water enough, yet Navigable no higher than the Village Kambambe, by reason of the strong water-falls.

It runs up from the East to the West, very full of winding Reaches, by rea∣son whereof, from the Mouth to Motahoama, is thirty Leagues Sailing, whereas the direct way is but twenty. In Sailing by it, the opening can hardly be seen at the Sea, by means of a black and woody Island, lying right before it.

Several Islands discover themselves herein; * 1.294 for about nine miles up, it divides into two Arms, which include an Island about four miles long, and half a mile broad, call'd Massander, or Massandera.

This Island produces many sorts of Fruits, especially Mandikoka, which plan∣ted there, grows extraordinary thick; of which they make great quantities of Tharinka, or Maiz; also Mille three times a year, besides Palm-Trees, and a Fruit nam'd Gojaves.

Ten or twelve miles above this, * 1.295 lieth another, intituled Motihiama; three miles long, and half a mile broad, very low ground, excepting two Moun∣tains, beset with all sorts of Plants, and Herbs, and Feeding; there are many Goats, Sheep, Hogs, and Hens.

Some years ago five or six Families of Portuguese liv'd here, who had many Slaves, and maintain'd themselves chiefly with Mandihoka.

Lucala, * 1.296 by Pigafet call'd Luiola, comes out of Amboille, having its head near the rise of the River Danda; and running South Westward, till about six and twenty miles from the Sea, joyning with Quansa, and by that mixture loosing its name.

The small River Kalukala, runs cross the Territory of Ilamba, with such ex∣traordinary Creeks and Meanders, that there is hardly one of the two and forty Dominions, wherein this Kingdom is divided, that lieth above an hours walk from it.

Some Lakes appear at the corners of Quansa or Bengo; the chiefest whereof may be seen in the Lordships of Quihailo, Angolome, and Chame.

Angola containeth divers inferior Ditions; * 1.297 as Lovando, Sinso, Ilamba, Ikollo, Ensaka, Massingan, Embakka, Kabamba; every one of which comprehends several Provinces, rul'd by particular Jovassens or Governors, viz. Lovando contains nine and thirty Ilambas; forty two Ikollo; and Ensaka divers, but uncertain; Mas∣singan twelve, which some bring under Ilamba; Kambamba sixty; and Embakko sixty.

In Lovando, * 1.298 stands the City Lovando Saint Paulo, on the rising of a Hill, by the the Sea-Coast.

On the Northside of this, appears another Mountain, call'd Mora Saint Paulo, somewhat higher than that of the City, and so steep, that its with much diffi∣culty ascendable; yet on the sides thereof, the Jesuites have erected a Cloyster, neighbour'd by three or four adjoyning houses.

[illustration]

LOANDA•••• S. PAUL••••

This City was built by the Portuguese in the Year Fifteen hundred seventy eight, when Paulus Dias de Nevais was sent thither to be the first Governor for them in this Countrey.

The City takes in a great compass of Ground, being built with many fair Houses, Churches, and Cloysters; but neither Wall'd nor Fortifi'd. Some Forts are raised at the Water-side, for the securing of the Haven.

Before the subduing of it by the Netherlanders, in the Year Sixteen hundred forty one, the Portuguese had six Churches there; two greater, one call'd Saint Maria de la Conception, and the other Corpo Santo; and four lesser, one for the Je∣suits, nam'd Saint Antonio; one for the Blacks, stil'd Saint Gosce; one Cloyster and Church for the Franciscans, and an Alms-house, with a Church intituled Misericordia. Over this Alms-house, besides the Receptions for Poor, are four and twenty Chambers, for the Governor and other Officers, viz. a Steward, a Doctor, a Barber, an Apothecary, and others.

This House hath some Revenues of Land, which being but mean, hath been augmented by a Rate upon Ships: for every Ship which puts in there, must pay two Rees to the Treasurers of this House.

Sinso is the Countrey situate to the North of Lovando Sante Paulo, up the River Bengo.

Ilamba, or Elvama, a large Tract of Land, above an hundred Miles in length, * 1.299 beginning South-East, and East-South-East from the Territory of Ikollo, and spreading from the River Bengo to Quansa, and from Kalumba to Massinga, still growing wider the further you go; and every where so well Peopled, that in two or three Miles distance is a Village; which proceeds from the Negroes se∣parating themselves from each other by peculiar Marks: So that the whole stands divided into two and forty Dominions.

The first of these, neighbouring Ikollo, is call'd Chonso; * 1.300 and afterwards the rest lie one behind another, according to their Order, viz. Namboa, Quolomba, Bamba, Golungo, Makea, Kombi, Quitendel, Etombe, Quitalla, Kambkaita, Andalladongo, Quiambatta, Nambaquiajamba, Kangola, Quihaito, Chombe, Angolome, Gumbia, Massin∣gan, or Massagan, Kaoulo, Kahango, Karanga-Pase, Guenka-Atombe, Hiangonga, Qui∣lambe, Quapanga, Kabanga, Kabuto, Kandalla, Gongue, Kahonda, Kunangonga, Mossun∣guapose, Kamanga, Kalunga, Bagolunge, Quibilacapose, Koslakase, Nambua, Kallahan∣ga, Nimenesolo. These are the chiefest which make up Ilamba, and wherein may be rais'd ten or twelve thousand Fighting Men, arm'd with Bowes and Arrows.

The Sovasen maintain the Boundaries so exactly, that never any Complaint is heard of one wronging or incroaching upon another, unless it be in open Wars; and then the Conquerer becomes wholly Master of his Enemies Coun∣trey.

This Territory can shew neither Artificial Forts, or Natural Fastnesses of Woods for a Defence against their Enemies; some little Groves may be seen upon Hills, but so inconsiderable, as hardly worth mentioning: Yet these Peo∣ple cannot easily be conquer'd, because they use such good Discipline, shoot∣ing their Arrows either lying upon the ground, or kneeling.

From Ilamba North-west, and West-north-west, lies Ikollo. * 1.301

Ensaka takes beginning six or seven Miles Eastward of Lovando Saint Paulo, * 1.302 and situate between the two Rivers Quansa and Bengo. 'Tis but a small Juris∣diction, and may be travell'd through in half a day.

Here in some few Places the Inhabitants Till their Ground.

Two or three Miles in the Countrey, on the Hills, stands a Wood, enclosed

about with Bushes and Thorns, to the great accommodation and strengthen∣ing of the whole: For if the Inhabitants should retire thither, it were impos∣sible to force them out, save onely for want of Water, there being none but what the Rivers Quansa and Bengo bring thither.

Nine Miles Eastwards, * 1.303 and above the Island of Motchiama, in the Province of Missingan, or Massagan, stands a small Town of the same Name (where the Portuguese have a Fort) erected between Quansa and Sunda, the last of which en∣virons it on the North, as the former on the South: And about the distance of two hours walk, intermingle their Streams, from which Conjunction the Town derives its Appellation, Massingan signifying A mixture of Waters. It was at first an open but pretty large Village, but since augmented with many fair Stone-Houses, whereby at length 'tis become a City. The first Portuguese Go∣vernor of Angola, in the Year Fifteen hundred seventy eight, by command of his Master erected this City of Lovando Saint Paulo, and also the Fort there, when by the help of the Congeses he warred against the King of Angola in the Coun∣trey: And now inhabited by many Families of Portuguese, besides Mulattoes and Blacks.

Kambamba edges upon Quansa, * 1.304 where stands a Village denominated also Kam∣bamba, Eastward of Massingan about a dayes Journey. The Portuguese have a Fort here also, wherein divers Families reside, and many Free Blacks, that have good store of Slaves.

About eight days passage up the River Lukala, * 1.305 you arrive at Embakka, where is a Village of the same denomination, twelve days Journey from the Sea side. In this place the Portuguese have their Bounds, beyond it claiming no Interest.

The unwholsomness of the Air breeds divers Sicknesses, * 1.306 especially violent and burning Fevers, which kill in few Hours, unless prevented by frequent Phlebotomy.

The Pox is so common among them, * 1.307 that they think it no Disgrace; and for Remedy use Oyntments, and Physical Herbs taken inwardly; but through want of Skill, the Cure remaining imperfect, many die.

They have another frequent Distemper call'd Bitios de Kis, suprising them with Melancholy, great pain in the Head, Faintness and soreness of Limbs, and makes their Eyes stand out staring, as if they would fall out.

The Cure, which immediately must be used upon the appearance of the Symptomes, they perform by washing the Fundament very clean, and put∣ting a Pill made of a quarter of a rinded Lemmon therein, with the Finger holding it in as long as may well be endur'd; which is not done without great pain and burning, a sign of the right Bitios. This Medicine, though seeming but mean, yet proves the onely Remedy against this Disease, if time∣ly applied: But if the Distemper be grown inveterate, and far rooted (which the swelling out and opening of the end of the Gut, and a whitish loosness testifies) then a Mixture of Juyce of Tobacco-leaves, Salt, and Vinegar, steeped together two hours, then stamped in a Mortar, and so much thereof put into the Fundament as can well be done, and kept there as long as possi∣ble, reduces the Part again to its proper condition, and absolutely cures the Disease. But this Medicine is so painful, and hardly to be endured, that the sick Person must be fast held by two strong Men, else he can never receive the intended Advantage.

The Bitios also are cured by frequent Clysters, or Serringing the Fundament-Guts with the purified Decoction of the Plant Orore de Bitos, and dried Rose∣leaves

mixt, with one or two Yelks of Eggs, and a little Allom, and Oyl of Roses. For the preventing hereof, so soon as the tokens of it are perceived, the Fundament must first be well cleansed; then a Medicine made of a new∣laid Egg, well beaten with a little Rose-water and Sugar, with which mix White Lead scraped small; then dipping fine Lint into it, put it up into the Fundament. Observe here, That White Lead is taken for a rare Cure against this Evil.

Another Disease sorely afflicts them, taking away in a manner their Sight, so that they grow Pur-blind; but by applying the raw Liver of a Hey, re∣gain their former Health. Few escape the misery of sore Legs, whose malig∣nity is such as will hardly admit Cure.

They labor under another sort of Distemper, * 1.308 which the Indians call Beri∣beri, being a Lameness of all the Limbs, and supposed to have its original from the ill curing of the Bitios, and not cleansing the Blood enough.

The best Medicine against this is, to anoint the Joynts before a Fire, with an Oyl by the Indians call'd Man-Tennah, which in the Island of Sumatra drops out of the Rocks, like Stone-oyl, and proves very wholesom and serviceable against all Colds, weakness of Limbs, and Strains.

The Boasi is a Malady very common and pernicious, rotting off the Nose, * 1.309 Hands, Feet, Fingers, and Toes; spreading from Joynt to Joynt with great pain, until without Remedy it brings them to their End.

Embasser, a usual Sickness, proceeds from the hardness of the Spleen, * 1.310 which makes them grow melancholy, yellow of colour, heavy-hearted, and faint: But Broath made of the Root of the Tree Embotta, that part especially that lies to the Morning-Sun, restores their Health.

Of the Branches of this Tree, being very strong and tuff, they make Bowes.

The Small-Pox also rages here much; * 1.311 and by reason of their unskilfulness in the use of fitting Medicines, proves many times very mortal.

The Land about Lovando, for want of convenient Moisture, proves barren; * 1.312 but on the opposite side, by the River Bengo, fruitful, yielding store of Mandi∣boka, Mille, Beans, and many sorts of Fruits and Herbs; which, upon the Por∣tuguese first arrival, was over-grown with Bushes and Brambles: But the Por∣tuguese Governor of Lovando, Ferdinando de Sousa, in the Years Sixteen hundred twenty nine, and thirty, commanded the Inhabitants, every one acording to the number of Slaves they had, to take each of them a piece of Ground at the River, and clear it from the Bushes, Brambles, and Weeds, and make it fit for Sowing and Planting; by which they brought it to the present Fertility.

This Labor at first was ill resented by the Inhabitants, who were drawn to it with great difficulty; but when they tasted the Profit, and saw the Fruit∣fulness, every one sought to get a Plantation, and took so much Ground as they could Manure. In this manner the Ground was planted with Mille, Beans, and all sorts of Herbage; and by Time and Practice the People still improving, became not onely a necessary Plantation, but as it were a pleasant Garden for the whole Countrey. But afterwards, in the Year Sixteen hundred forty one, when the Netherlanders took the City Lovando Saint Paulo, all was burn'd and ruin'd: So that this Tract of Land, formerly, as we said, a Garden of Plea∣sure, became afterwards a Den for Lions, Tygers, and other wild Beasts: However, after some time a Peace being settled between the Dutch and Portu∣guese, their joynt Endeavors restor'd it to the former Beauty and Fertility.

The chiefest Products of these Parts are small and great Mille, * 1.313 whereof they make Bread; Chesnut-colour'd Beans, call'd Enkossa, a fatning and delicate Food, yet too much eating of them causes a pain in the Belly: Also Oranges, Lemons, Dates, Bananos, Ananasses, Potatoes, Cocos, Arosses, and Palm-oyl-Trees, Anones, Guajaves, Wine, or Gegos.

Anones, * 1.314 so call'd by the Portuguese, from a Duke which brought this Fruit first thither, is a pleasant Fruit, very delightful in taste, Ash-colour'd, as big as ones Hand, and almost round, like a Pine-apple.

Guajaves, * 1.315 or Gojava, so call'd by the Portuguese, by the Natives Cienko, and by the Dutch, Granate-Pears, is a Fruit very delicious in taste, but the coldness of its Quality makes it thought unwholesom.

Arosses, * 1.316 or Granate-plums, a Fruit almost like Guajaves, but smaller, whole∣som to eat, and of a pleasing sharp taste.

Gegos grows on high Trees, * 1.317 in shape like a Prune, but of a greenish yellow colour, having great Stones within, with some Pulp, sharp of taste, cooling, and wholesom; given to the Sick in stead of Refrigerative Juleps.

Tamarinds also grow here plentifully, * 1.318 and very good. Small Coco-Nuts, which by some are taken to be of the same sort, and the same nature against Poyson, as the Coco-Nuts of the Island Maldivia, lying between Madagascar and the Cape of India, call'd Komorri; and therefore call'd by the Portuguese, Coquos de Moleva.

Maginette, a sort of Grain like Pepper, but bigger, grows on Bunches, with∣in which are Seeds like those of a Pomegranate; which taken out, shew of a purple or dark red Colour; but afterwards, by drying in the Sun it grows black, and hath a biting taste like Pepper.

There grows also a small Tree, * 1.319 to the height of three or four Foot, with small and narrow Leaves, whose Fruit bears the resemblance of Coriander, at first appearing in green Knots, afterwards in Blossoms, and lastly in a kind of small Grain. These Benies grown ripe, and dried in the Sun, shrink like East-India Pepper, turning black and hard, and little differing from it in taste, one∣ly not so hot, which makes it pleasant to eat, and fit to be used in all Food. It grows much in Benyn, and many other places of Nether-Ethiopia. Cotton grows wild here; and if it were manur'd and look'd after, might be had in great abundance: It blossoms in June and July, and is ripe in December.

Both Garden and Field-Fruits spring here with little Labor; viz. Turneps, Radishes, Cabbages, but more open than those with us; Caulyflowers, Car∣rots, Purslane, Spinage, Sage, Hyssop, Thyme, Sweet Majoram, Coriander∣seed, and such like.

The Tree call'd in Portuguese, * 1.320 Poa del Cebra, that is, Serpents-wood, hath a pow∣erful Operation against Fevers, as the Mofrossasonho prevails against Poyson.

Of the Root call'd Mandihoka by the Blacks of Angola, * 1.321 and by the Islanders of New-Spain, and the West-Indies, Juca, by the Mexicans, Quauhkamotli, and by the Portuguese, Farina, yields very good Meal, whereof they make Bread, as we of Wheat or Rye, and other sorts of Dainties. No Place in Angola besides produ∣ces so much of this Grain; partly caused from the fruitfulness of the Soyl, and partly from the neerness to the City Lovando Sante Paulo, where the Markets are always ready to vend it.

This Plant is of divers sorts, which seem all one at a distance, yet both in Roots, Colour, and Worth, are known to be far differing by the Husband∣men.

The Leaves of this Plant resemble those of an Oak, of a deep Green, * 1.322 with many Veins and Prickles; the Stemm or Body shoots upright ten or twelve Foot high, spreading with many Branches: the Wood weak, like a Willow, the Blossom small, and the Seed like Palma Christi, but of no value; onely the Root may be eaten.

In the Planting and using Mandikoka they practice this method: After the Earth is prepared, by being well wrought, beaten small, and thrown up in Hills like Mole-hills, little Twigs or Slips cut off from the Branches of it, about a Foot long, and an Inch thick, are set sloaping one against another, on every Hill two or three Sticks, with the ends about a Hand-breadth above the Earth; which immediately take Root, and in nine, ten, or twelve Moneths, shoot up to the heighth of twelve Foot, with many Branches, and a Body as big as a Man's Thigh: Then to make the Root grow large, the Ground must be Weeded two or three times, and kept clean: And when it is grown to its perfect maturity, they cut the Stemm close to the Earth, being good for no∣thing but Fewel; but the small Boughs they fit for the next Planting, * 1.323 and so from time to time. Afterwards the Root being digg'd up, and the Shell taken from they make it Farina, by Grinding it in a Mill made like the Wheels of a Waggon, but a Span broad upon the Soal, Shod with Copper; in which are made many sharp Points in manner of a Grater, and underneath a Trough, into which the Meal falls. He which holds the Root to the Wheel, hath di∣vers little Boys to attend and bring him Roots, as there are Slaves to take the grinded Meal out of the Trough, to dry it in Copper Pans, which to that end like a Furnace stand over the Fire.

For this work many Houses are built, above a hundred Foot long, and thir∣ty or forty Foot broad; wherein on both sides stand the Furnances, that is, on each side ten, and three Mills unfixt, and movable upon occasion from place to place. Every Husband-man may make as much Farina, or Meal, as he thinks fit, both for his own use, and to sell; and if he hath a House with twenty Fur∣naces, useth commonly for Planting, Weeding, Howing, Grinding, and Drying, fifty or sixty Slaves. Every Alquer of Meal, or two Aroben, * 1.324 they sell sometimes in Lovando St. Paulo for two hundred and fifty, or three hundred Rees.

The Gumm Almesiga distills from a Tree, and smells like Gumm Elemi, * 1.325 be∣ing a wholsom Medicine for many Distempers, especially Colds, and bruised Limbs.

From another Plant they extract Aloes, found by experience no worse than that which comes from the Island Sokotorina.

Orore de Bitios, an Herb so call'd for its Curing the Disease Bitios.

By the Rivers side grow the Trees Mosuma, * 1.326 of which all the Canoos in that Countrey are made. This Wood hath some similitude of Cork, and sinks not though it be full of Water. On these Trees grows the Kapok, a Woody and soft Stuff, which by Sea-faring People is used in Cushions and Bolsters, in stead of Feathers.

The rest of the Trees are generally call'd Likonde, or Alikonde, * 1.327 delighting in dry Grounds. Some of these enlarge to the thickness of eight, ten, or twelve Fathom in the Body, but the Root never goes above a Foot under Ground, so that the greatest of them may easily be blown down. The Fruit resembles for bigness Palm-Nuts, but somewhat longer, having within, a white Kernel, yet never eaten by the Blacks but for hunger and want, for it is a dangerous Food,

and causeth great Mortality. The Wood of it is not fit to burn; but of the Peeling of the Rind, as we of Flax, they make Clothes, and Sacks for Mille; and of the Stems, or Bodies, Canoos and Boats.

In Marshy places grow many Sugar-Canes, * 1.328 but by report of the Inhabi∣tants unfit for use, and therefore not much Planted. The Extract of the Cane is brown, yet better than St. Thomas to make Sugar-Loaves.

On the Shore of the River of Kalukala, and Ilamba, they have many delicate Oranges and Lemons, Citrons, Pomegranates, Pears, Guayavas, Gego's, Ananasses, and in some places Vines, Planted by the Portuguese; for the Blacks take no care to propagate foreign Plants.

In the Kingdom of Angola are almost one and the same Beasts as in Congo, viz. Tygers, Leopards, Lyons, red Buffles, Bears, Wolves, Foxes, very great wild Cats, and Catamountains, the Beast Makako, Empalanga, Civet-Cats, Rhi∣nocerots, wild Bears, Emgalla, and Camelions: Besides Cattel for Provision, as Sheep, Goats, Hogs, and the like.

The Woods of this Kingdom, are much frequented by the Beast call'd by the Africans, Quoias Morrou, and by the Indians, Orang-autang, that is Satyrs, or Wood-Men, found also in the Kingdom of Quoia, as is before mention'd, and in the Island of Borneo in the East-Indies. This Beast in shape so much resem∣bles a Man, that some have held opinion, that it is of humane mixture with an Ape; which fancy nevertheless the Blacks themselves explode. Such a Crea∣ture was some years ago brought from hence into Holland, and presented to Frederick Henry Prince of Aurange. * 1.329 It was as tall as a Child of three years old, neither fat nor slender, but square-set, and well-proportion'd, very nimble and quick, with strong, and brawny Limbs: in the fore-part all over bare and naked, but behind rough, and overgrown with black Hair. The Face seem'd like a Man's at a glimpse, but the Nose flat and crooked: it had Ears also like a Man's, and on the Breasts plump Paps, (for it was a Female) and a Belly with the Navel sunk in: the Elbows had also their proper Joynts and Li∣gaments, the Hands had orderly Fingers and Thumbs, the Calves of the Legs and the Feet beyond the Heel-bone, plump and brawny, and would often go upright, and could lift heavy weights, and carry them from one place to another. When it would Drink, it lift up the Cover of the Can with one Hand, and held the other under the bottom, and afterwards wiped the Wet from his Lips with a singular comeliness: it laid it self suddenly to sleep, with its Head upon a Cushion, and cover'd the Body over with Clothes with such dexterity, that any would think it were a Man lay there.

The Blacks report strange things of this Animal, averring, that it not onely sets upon, and overpowers Women and Maids, but also dares attempt upon Armed Men: in brief, it seems to be the very Satyr of the Antients, whereof Pliny and others, by report, and Poets, in the way of Fiction, have Written so much.

The Beast Goulongo bears the similitude of a Sheep or Goat, * 1.330 and the Flesh hath the same taste. The People of Congo eat not of it, by vertue of an anti∣ent Custom imposed upon them by the Devil, or Fetisies, when they were Heathens, which yet to this day is observed by them.

They have also there Night-Owls, very fine colour'd Hens, Storks, white Ravens, and a few Ostriches, besides many Birds of Prey, as Eagles, Hawks, and such like; Ring-Doves, Geese, Ducks, Sparrows, Swallows, great Bats in abundance, Canary-Birds, Parrots, Parakito's, Magpies, two or three sorts of

[illustration]

Partridges and Pheasants, with very fine colour'd Feathers. The first sort have a Cap of Feathers on their Heads; the second is callow, or ball'd, but have blue and black Plumage upon their Bodies, with some white intermixed: black and white Pelicans, much larger body'd than a Kite, but with a streight Bill, but their Necks very long, which they can turn so round, that they open their Breasts with their Bills, and feed the Young with their Blood. There is also a certain small Bird, as in Lovango, whose Whistling or Singing, being heard by the Blacks as they Journey, is by them taken for a certain sign of the approach of some wild Beasts.

The Houses of this Territory are much infected with poysonous Vermine, * 1.331 Scorpions, Millepedes, Otters, and Serpents; among which one is by the Blacks of Quoia, call'd Minia; by those of Angola, Embamma: * 1.332 It hath a Mouth wide enough to swallow a whole Buck or Hart, lying in the Ways like a dead Trunk of a Tree, but falls upon transient Beasts or Men with great nimbleness.

Another sort of poysonous Serpents breed there, whose Back-bone they wear about their Necks as an infallible Remedy against the King's-evil.

The Lakes feed also many Creatures, especially those of Angola, Quihite, and Angolm, in the Province of Massingan; wherein, among others, is taken a Fish, by the Inhabitants nam'd Ambisangalo and Pesyengoni; by the Portuguese, Pezze Mouller; but by the other Europeans, Mere-men, and Mere-maids; they con∣tain in length full eight Spans, having two short Arms, and Hands with long Fingers, but they cannot close them fast together like Men, but onely bend them a little: their Fingers, by reason of some Flesh that grows between them, cleave together, as the Feet of Swans or Ducks: Their Heads hath an Oval shape, small Eyes, a flat Nose, wide Mouth, but without a Chin, or Ears apparent.

The Males have Genitals like Horses, and the Females two strutting Breasts, yet not distinguishable one from the other in the Water, being both of a sad gray colour: they do no hurt, neither come upon the Shore; their Flesh tastes

like Pazke in the upper part, but downwards is somewhat leaner, yet affords the Inhabitants pleasant Food, especially if broyl'd.

They take them with Nets, * 1.333 and afterwards kill them with Harping-Irons, and Lances.

In the Heads of these Monsters is a certain Bone, * 1.334 which beaten small, and taken in Wine, powerfully helps the Gravel in the Reins or Bladder: that of the Male is best. The Bone about the place of the Ear the Portuguese wear as a Soveraign Remedy against the infections of ill Air. Of the Ribs, in Angola, they make Bead-Bracelets, held to be very good for stenching of Blood, espe∣cially those made of the left Rib, lying next the Heart.

These Creatures are also caught about Sofala, on the East-Coast of Africa, and being Salted make good Food at Sea, if quickly spent, but if kept stale, grows ranck, and becomes dangerous Meat for those which have foul Diseases, as the Pox, or such like, in their Limbs.

In these Lakes breed moreover great numbers of Sea-Horses, Alligators, or Crocodiles, and many other amphibious Animals.

The Rivers Quansa, Lukala, and Bengo yield great plenty of excellent Fish; among which great Crabs. And the Sea affords almost infinite sorts, parti∣cularly Pergomoulato's, which the Portuguese style Pellado, almost like a Roach. Esquilones, Quikousses, Kussones, Syopos, Dorades, Benitos, Halbekores, Pergos de Moro∣chermes, Roukadores, Koruines, as also Mokerell; besides Oysters and Mussles.

The Blacks in Angola about Lovando St. Paulo, * 1.335 are very lazy, and will rather suffer hunger, than take pains to Plant or Sowe their Ground; and to supply the wants brought on them by idleness, buy Provisions of their Neighbors for Slaves.

In every Dominion of Angola are four sorts of People, * 1.336 the first Noble-men, call'd Mokata's; the second styl'd Children of the Dominion, being Natives, and for the most part Artificers, or Husbandmen; the third, Quisiko's, or Slaves, and so propriated and united to the Lords Dominions, as his other Goods, and inhe∣ritable as them; the fourth Mobika's, also Slaves of the Sovasen, gotten by War, or otherwise. Many times some of the second sort by misdemeanors, how small soever, become Slaves; for if Sovase have but the least notice, that one of his Vassals, or Tenants, endeavor'd to do him wrong, or sought to assist his Enemy in the Wars, he would not onely make him alone a Slave, but also his Wife and all his Friends, or Kindred, nay, and perhaps put them to death.

In all this spacious Tract of Nether-Ethiopia, * 1.337 there are no Houses with Roofs, save onely in Lovando St. Paulo, and Massingan, both Cities, and built by the Portuguese. The rest are made of Sticks and Thatch, very poorly and sleightly, though in some places stronger than other. The Houses of the Nobility have Rooms jetting out, inclosing a Court, and an outward place of Receipt.

Their Musick must needs be very mean and harsh, having but one sort of Instrument, call'd a Cas, made Basket-fashion of the Stock of the Palmito-Tree, Carved in Flowers, and cover'd with a Board, which being struck yields a Taboring sound.

Pigafet says, * 1.338 the Inhabitants have so great a love for Dogs-flesh, that they feed and fat them in great multitudes, and when kill'd, dress them as a dainty Dish.

Their Clothing comes very near to that of Congo; the Ornaments of their Necks and Arms consisting in round Glass-Beads, which they call Anzalos.

The Angolish Tongue differs from Congo's onely in the pronunciation; * 1.339 yet that makes it seem another Speech.

The Men, as we said before, may have as many Wives as they can feed, * 1.340 and the first is accounted the superior of all, if Married according to the Christian manner.

A Woman, as long her Children have no Teeth, keeps from her Husband; but as soon as it hath any, all the Friends and Acquaintance, both Men and Women, carries it in their Arms from House to House, Playing and Singing, to receive a Gift for it, and seldom or never are put off with a denial.

When any Person dies, they wind up the Corps, being first washed clean, * 1.341 then Combing out the Hair, and putting on new Clothes, they carry them to the Grave, made like a Vault, where they set them upon a Seat of Earth, with many round Glass-Beads, and other Goods about them. Among the better sort Blood is sprinkled upon the Earth, and Wine poured out for a remem∣brance of the Deceased.

The punishment of Offences is done in one and the same manner, that is, * 1.342 the Offender, together with his Wife and Children, and their whole Stock, are made Slaves to the Sova's. But sometimes they accuse not one another, but work their own revenge, by poysoning of their Adversary.

In the Enquiry they take no care whether the Party be guilty, or punisha∣ble indeed, but the Saying of the Sova's, or Averment of one single person, car∣ries the Cause.

In stead of Money they use, as in Lovando, * 1.343 the small Clothes call'd Libon∣ges, and Panos Sambos, whereof we gave you there a full account.

Of these some are single marked, with the Arms of Portugal; others double marked; and some unmarked.

The single-marked Clothes, as also four unmarked, ty'd together, go for a half Tester, and one alone for two Pence; but every double-marked Cloth is worth ten or eleven.

None of the Portuguese may bring those Clothes into Lovando, but onely the Factor of the Merchant who dwells at Lisbon, and sent thither to buy them up, whereof he makes no small Gain.

Out of Benyn come blue Cotton-Clothes, by them call'd Mouponoqua, but by the Portuguese, Panos res gatto de Berre; they are five Clothes together, and a a Yard and a half, or two yards broad. There is another sort, in Portuguese call'd Pannos de Komma de Figures, of blue and some white mingled, with Fi∣gures, about six or seven Yards long, and above a Yard broad. Both these sorts the Portuguese Vend in great quantities, and at high Prices in Congo, Amboille, the Kingdom of Gingo, and other Places.

The like small Clothes are brought from the Island St. Thomas; but the Dye is not so good, and the Stuff courser. These they exchange for Slaves, to send into Portugal.

They have two sorts of Simbo's, which serve in lieu of Money, viz. * 1.344 pure Simbo's, taken under the Island of Lovando, and used for Trade in Punto; and impure, or Brazile, brought from Rio de Janero, and used in Songo and Pinda, and in the Countreys of Anna Xinga, beyond Massingam, and among the Jages.

The Simbo's of Lovando are also of two sorts, a finer and a courser, separated by Sifting, the latter they name Simbos Sisado's; the other, Fonda and Bomba. Both these they send to Congo, being carried thither upon the Heads of the Blacks, in Sacks made of Straw, every Sack weighing two Aroba's, that is, three∣score and four Pound.

They use also in Lovando, in stead of Money, the red Takoel Wood of Ma∣jumba, and Pio de Hikongo, brought from Benguella; which cut into Pieces of about a Foot long, have their set value, which every one knows.

The Fruit Cola is there commonly sold for Clothes, four Fruits for one Li∣bongo, or unmarked Cloth.

The chiefest Trade of Portuguese and other Whites, * 1.345 consists in Slaves, carried from thence by Shipping to several Places in the West-Indies, as to the Islands of Porto, Rico, Rio Plata, Santo Domingo, Havana, Carthagena, and to the Main Land, especially to Brazile and other Places, to labour in the Engines and Sugar-Mills, and to dig and work in the Mynes; which toyl these Angolian Blacks, and no Whites can undergo: so that the Portuguese and Spaniards must thank the la∣bour of Slaves for most of their Riches which they possess in the Indies. It is certain the Spaniard used heretofore to send over upon his own account to the West-Indies every year above fifteen thousand Slaves for those Works; and 'tis judg'd, that the Portuguese to this day send no fewer.

All those Slaves the Portuguese cause to be bought by their Pombero's, as is be∣fore related, above a hundred and fifty, and two hundred miles up in the Countrey; from whence they bring them down to the Sea-Coast.

These Slaves get but little Food on the Way, and lie on the bare Ground every Night under the open Heaven, without any other Covering, by which means they grow poor and faint: but the Portuguese in Lovando, before they Ship them away, bring them first into a great House, which they have built there for that purpose, and give them their fill of Meat and Drink, and likewise Palm-Oyl to refresh and anoint themselves withall: But if it happen that there be no Ships ready, or that they have not Slaves enough to send away, then they use them for tilling the Ground, and to plant or cut Mandihoka: but at last when they put them on Board, they take great care to preserve them from Sickness; and that they may come safe and sound to their intended Port, provide Medicines, especially Lemons and white Lead, to use against the Bitios; and if by chance any fall sick, they separate him from the rest, and lay him alone to be Cured, where he is well provided for with warm Diet.

In the Ships they have Mats to lie on; of which they take great store with them, especially when they go over to the West-Indies, to give every ten or twelves days a fresh Mat.

But the Hollanders take no such care in transporting their Slaves to Brazile, but strip them poor and faint, without any Provision of Mats or other things, by which means many die at Sea.

In the Village Kambamba the Portuguese deal for many Slaves, but not so much as in Massingan and Embakko; for there when the adjacent Blacks want any Mer∣chandise, they bring their Slaves to the Portuguese Colonies for exchange.

The Commodities which the Portuguese and other Whites carry thither, are amongst others of all sorts,

• Cloth with red Lists.
• Great Ticking, with long Stripes, and fine wrought.
• Red Kersie.
• Sleasie, and other fine Linnen.
• Fine Velvet.
• Small & great Gold & Silver Laces.
• Broad black Bayze.
• Turkish Tapestry, or Carpets.
• White, and all sorts of colour'd Yarn.
• Blue and black Beads.
• Stiching and Sowing Silk.
• Canary Wines.

• Brandy.
• Linseed-Oyl.
• Seamens Knives.
• All sorts of Spices.
• White Sugar, and many other Com∣modities and Trifles:
• As great Fish-Hooks.
• Pins of a finger long.
• Ordinary Pins.
• Needles, and great and small Hawks-Bells.

The Inhabitants in general gather no great Riches, being content with a lit∣tle Mille, and a few Cattel, together with Palm-Wine and Oyl.

Their Arms consist in Bowes and Arrows, but the chiefest have Lances, Axes, and Chopping-Knives; which last they wear in their Girdles on their left sides: in short, they use almost the same Arms, as those of Congo, and ob∣serve the same order in Fighting.

This Countrey is so populous, that the King can in a very short time bring a hundred thousand men all Volunteers into the Field; and if occasion requires, ten hundred thousand press'd Souldiers; so that if they were as valiant as nu∣merous, they might well be dreaded: but their little courage, and less conduct hath appear'd in several Encounters with the Portuguese; particularly, in the year Fifteen hundred eighty four, twelve hundred thousand Angolians were put to flight by five hundred Portuguese, and some few Congians: And the following year, Six hundred thousand Angolians, by two hundred Portuguese, and ten thou∣sand Blacks.

The Territory of Ilamba can raise twelve thousand men, Arm'd with Bowes and Arrows, who Fight very circumspectly, and Shoot lying or creeping on the ground.

The Kingdom of Angola, or rather Dongo, hath at present a particular Gover∣nor or Prince, who acknowledges no kind of subjection to the King of Congo; although formerly, when divided into divers Lordships, the several Sovasen shew'd all due obedience to that King.

But a hundred and fifty years since, one of these Sovasen call'd Angola, with assistance of the Portuguese, Trading with him, made Wars with the other, and overcame them one after another, till he made them all Tributaries; yet he let them still remain in possession, each of his own Dominion.

This was he that afterwards came to the Crown, and nam'd himself Incue, from the great multitude of people under his subjection; and was not inferior in Power (saith Pigafet) to the King of Congo: to whom (as Linschot writes) he sends Presents, though he be not his Vassal.

After this Angola Incue, in the year Fifteen hundred and sixty, his Son Dambi Angola, a great enemy of the Portuguese, was chosen King, who Deceas'd in the year Fifteen hundred seventy eight, and his youngest Son, Quilonge Angola, or Angolaire, that is, Great Lord, was left his Heir and Successor to the Crown.

He renew'd the old League made by his Predecessors with the Portuguese, and Paulus Dias de Nevais their Governor; but afterwards without cause, cut off thir∣ty or forty of them on the way, going with several Merchandizes to the Royal City; whereupon Dias made War upon him, and took many places, subject∣ing them to the Crown of Portugal, which ever since, together with many other, from time to time subdu'd, have remain'd under them.

The King deceasing in the year Sixteen hundred and forty, * 1.346 without Male∣issue, left three Daughters, and a Nephew; the eldest of these call'd Anna Xin∣ga, notwithstanding she was Baptiz'd a Christian, would assume the Crown

after the Heathenish manner: But the Portuguese favour'd the Nephew, and so helped him with assistance of Arms, that by force he gat the Throne; whereupon Anna Xinga, with many Grandees, fled, but hath never ceas'd to claim the Kingdom as her Inheritance, alledging her Nephew but an Usurper.

In this Quarrel she fought three several Battels, * 1.347 and was as often routed and vanquish'd, and hath since kept her self an hundred and fifty miles up into the Countrey, beyond Embatta; where, notwithstanding her former ill successes, making new Wars towards the Wilderness Jages, she has gotten many Cities, Villages, and Countreys; whereby gathering fresh Vigor, she came again up∣on the Portuguese, by whom, under the Command and Conduct of Major Pa∣vo Darouva, Conquer'd, and two of her Sisters taken Prisoners; one of which Baptiz'd Dama Maja, of her own free will continu'd among the Portuguese, and kept her self stately according to her manner, oftentimes receiving many Slaves for her maintainance.

According to the last accompts, this Xinga can be little less than sixty years of age, and oftentimes for some past years, hath been reported dead; yet the Subjects conceal'd, * 1.348 and kept it so secret, that notwithstanding the Portuguese consign Commodities thither for Trade by several persons, they cannot by ours or others attain the certainty thereof: For all Decrees, Orders, and Trans∣actions relating to Government, are still Proclaim'd in her Name.

She is a cunning and prudent Virago, * 1.349 so much addicted to Arms, that she hardly uses other exercise; and withal so generously valiant, that she never hurt a Portuguese after Quarter given, and Commanded all her Slaves and Souldiers the like.

She and her People (for the most part) lead an unsetled life, * 1.350 roving up and down from place to place, like the Jages: Before any enterprize undertaken, though of meanest concern, they ask councel of the Devil; to which end they have an Idol, to whom they sacrifice a living Person, of the wisest and com∣liest they can pick out.

The Queen against the time of this Sacrifice, Clothes her self in mans appa∣rel, (nor indeed does she at any time go otherwise habited) hanging about her the Skins of Beasts, before and behind, with a Sword about her Neck, an Ax at her Girld, and a Bowe and Arrows in her Hand, leaping according to their Custom, now here, then there, as nimbly, as the most active among her Attendants; all the while striking her Engema, that is, two Iron Bells, which serve her in stead of Drums.

When she thinks she has made a show long enough, * 1.351 in a Masculine manner, and thereby hath weary'd her self; then she takes a broad Feather and sticks it through the holes of her boar'd Nose, for a sign of War.

She her self in this rage, begins with the first of those appointed to be sacri∣fic'd; and cutting off his head, drinks a great draught of his blood.

Then follow the Stoutest Commanders, and do as she hath done; and this with a great hurly-burly, tumult, and playing upon Instruments about their Idol.

Among all her most pretious things, she bestows no such care on any, as the Bones of one of her Brothers, who Raign'd before her, which lie together in a costly Silver Chest, long before gotten of the Portuguese.

The Queen keeps fifty or sixty young men in stead of Husbands, each of which may have as many Wives as they please, with this proviso, that if any of them be with Child, themselves must kill the Infant as soon as born.

[illustration]

In the year Sixteen hundred forty eight, the four and twentieth of June, the third day after the New-Moon, according to the relation of one Fuller, a Com∣mander in the Service of the Netherlanders; who was appointed with sixty men to assist this Queen against the Portuguese; and in that regard, stay'd so long time with her, that one of these her Gallants had a hundred and thirteen Wives, without any offspring; for that after the manner of their Devillish Superstition and Idolatry, he cursedly made away, or kill'd their Children.

The Queen us'd this very Custom at that time; neither dare any of those se∣lected young men own their Sex, or mention hers: And for the more orderly concealing thereof, she clothes them in Womens Apparel, according to her man∣ner, and goeth her self in Mans Habit; giving out, that they are Women, and she a Man. All these have Womens names, but the Queen (her self) a Mans, especially in the Army, and will acknowledge no otherwise; nay her Favorites dare not say the contrary, upon the peril of their Heads: and as a testimony herein of their obedience and constancy to her, permits them to go freely among her women; and if they fail in their obligations, they seldom escape to tell further news.

In the year Sixteen hundred forty six, she over-ran with her Army, * 1.352 and spoyl'd all the Villages of Oanda, and made the Inhabitants Slaves.

But the Quisamens residing on the South-side of the River Quansa, send every year Tribute to her, for an acknowledgment both of their Friendship and Sub∣jection.

After her death, the Portuguese set another of her Family as King of Dongo, * 1.353 by name Angola Sodesie, who always privately sent Presents to them, in token of submission.

The King holds his residence a little above the City Massingan, * 1.354 in a Stony Mountain, above seven Leagues in compass; inclosing within it many rich Pa∣stures, Fields, and Meadows, yielding a plentiful Provision for all his Retinue: into which there is but one single passage, and that (according to their method)

well Fortifi'd; so that he needs neither to fear any Enemies from the Queens side, nor from the Jages.

The King here, * 1.355 as he of Congo, keeps a great many Peacocks; a peculiar one∣ly to the Royal Family, and of so high esteem, that if any one should adven∣ture to come to take but one Feather from a Peacock, with intention to detain it, he should immediately be put to death; or else be made a Slave, with all his Generations.

This Kingdom stands divided into several Provinces, * 1.356 and every Province sub∣divided into inferior Lordships, Commanded by a particular Sovas.

Every Sovas hath a certain number of Makottes or Councellors, * 1.357 who in all addresses fall down on their Knees, clapping their hands; with whom he con∣sults of all weighty Concerns.

These Sovasens live privately in Villages, * 1.358 inclos'd with thick Hedges, and have onely some narrow ways for entrance; and the Habitations cannot pro∣perly be term'd Houses, but sleight Huts, made of Rushes and Straw, after the Countrey manner.

The Governors of all the Territories which the Portuguese hold in Angola by force of Arms, * 1.359 are bound to pay a Tribute of Slaves to them yearly; and to do them other services, under the Title of Vassals.

The Portuguese Governor of Lovando, use to Farm this Tribute of the Sovasens to some of their own Nation, who were not content with what was the setled Revenue of Slaves, but oftentimes take as many more, which made the Natives bear a mortal hatred to them.

The Sovasens moreover are bound to appoint Carriers for the Portuguese, when they travel through the Countrey, to bear them in Seats from one place to an∣other: For if a Portuguese be minded to travel from Lovando Saint Paulo, to Mas∣singan, when he comes at Evening into a Village where he intends to Lodge, he sends to the Sova to let him know, he hath an occasion for so many of those Carriers; who must not fail to provide them: And this they do every Even∣ing, to have fresh Men for the next days Journey.

In the year Sixteen hundred forty one, * 1.360 the Netherlanders, under the Com∣mand of Cornelius Cornelisen Jol, otherwise call'd Houtebeen, took from the Portu∣guese the City of Lovando Saint Paulo, upon this account, and in this manner:

Grave Maurice of Nassaw, * 1.361 or General of the Netherlanders in Brasil, taking in∣to consideration, that the State of Brasil could not consist without many Blacks from the Coast of Africa, not onely to work in the Sugar-Mills, and to Plant the Cane-Fields and cleanse them of Weeds; but also to Manure more Ground for the Planting of Mandihoka, and all manner of Fruits; and that this Work could not be done better by any, than these African-Slaves: And besides that, there were not Slaves enough brought from the Coast of Arder, Kalbarine, Rio del Rey, and other places thereabouts; concluded on, to set out a Fleet un∣der the Conduct of the foremention'd Houtebeen; and some Land-Forces under the Command of one James Hinderson, to take Angola from the Portuguese.

The Fleet consisted of twenty Ships, great and small, Man'd with two thou∣sand Souldiers, nine hundred Seamen, and two hundred Brasilians, which set Sayl from Fernabuck the thirtieth day of May, * 1.362 in the year Sixteen hundred for∣ty one; and after many oppositions, to come about to the South, the nine∣teenth of July, in eight and twenty degrees South-Latitude, the Fleet began to want fresh water.

The fifth of August the Fleet came to Cabo Negro, in sixteen degrees; * 1.363 from thence to Flies-Bay, in fifteen degrees; and on the one and twentieth day, they overcame, and took a Portuguese Carvill sailing along the Coast, laden with Wines from the Maderas, call'd the Jesu-Maria-Joseph, the people of which serv'd them for Pilots, to bring them into the Haven of St. Paulo.

The four and twentieth, the Fleet came within sight of Land, and Hinderson went the same day with his Souldiers, set in order against the City, ordering the Snap-hances to March in the Van. The Portuguese Governor, Caesar de Mene∣ses, stood not far from thence on the Shore, with nine hundred Whites, and Arm'd Inhabitants, and a great many of Blacks; besides two Pieces of Ordnance, in a Fighting Posture.

But so soon as the Netherlanders came near, and began to fall on, * 1.364 the Blacks first betook themselves to flight; afterwards the Portuguese; and at last the Go∣vernor follow'd, leaving behind them the Ordnance; and soon after the City, with all Forts and Batteries, without further resistance; so that none was found therein, but one drunken Souldier, and a very old Man.

The Booty there, consisted of nine and twenty Brass-Pieces, * 1.365 and sixty nine of Iron; besides store of Arms, Ammunition, and provision of Victual, as Meal, Wine, and thirty Sheep, small and great.

But because there was no fresh water, the Netherlanders after their Conquest Fortifi'd a House lying near the River Bengo, for conveniency of fetching Wa∣ter; upon which the Blacks made an assault, but were beaten off with loss of eighty men.

Two days before the appearance of the Dutch Fleet, the Governor had some notice of it, but supposing the Netherlanders had come onely to fetch a Booty of Slaves and other Goods, and so to return; gave order, that his Wives and Children, with the best Goods and readiest Merchandize, * 1.366 should be brought and hidden in convenient places. But when he saw that they aim'd at the con∣quering of the City, and all the Forts by War, and to keep them for their own; he by Letters complain'd to Jol of injury, and put him in mind, That the States of the United Netherlands, and the King of Portugal were agreed, and in League with each other; and therefore expected the Surrender of the City.

Notwithstanding this expostulatory Letter, and friendly Summons, * 1.367 the Dutch within the City return'd answer, That they were not acquainted with the Agreement of the Portuguese, nor had heard of it; but if the Governor had in truth known any such matter, he should have given them timely notice before the City was subdu'd, and they had not been dealt with as Enemies.

At last, when the Portuguese Governor, who was retir'd to Massingan, found that the unwholesomness of the Air kill'd many of his Souldiers, and that he could not expect to regain Lovando by complaint or fair means; and knowing himself too weak to attain it by force, sent a Messenger, desiring a Truce for eight days; intending in that time, either to joyn with the Netherlanders, and declare himself for the States; or to depart: * 1.368 But when he propos'd unequal matters, he was requir'd to depart with his Souldiers sixteen miles from Lovan∣do, and make a mutual agreement; and to declare in nine moneths, whether he would submit, or depart. Hereupon Caesar de Meneses drew to the River Bengo, and sitting down there with his people, began a new Plantation, and manag'd it with such industry, that in short time he Planted Gardens, and could not onely himself eat the Fruit of the Ground, but also afford some to those of Lovando.

The Dutch therefore grew jealous of him, * 1.369 as having heard farther, that he to strengthen himself, had taken away all the Ammunition from Massingan, doubled his Guards in Bengo, and deliver'd out Powder and Ball to his Souldiers, expecting an addition of two hundred men out of Bahia: And therefore to pre∣vent any future inconveniencies, it was concluded to send a Party of Souldi∣ers privately to surprize the Leaguer of the Portuguese; And to that end, in May, Sixteen hundred forty three, there went out about a hundred men, who in the Evening came near the Camp: the Centinel, upon the first discovery of them gave fire, and was seconded by the rest of the Souldiers; whereupon the Dutch fell on: * 1.370 and being come to the Market-place, the Guard lying before the Go∣vernors House, Sally'd out upon them, as also did the Moradores, with their Snap-hanses, but were quickly routed, and twenty kill'd, and as many woun∣ded: The rest, among which the Governor himself was one, were taken pri∣soners, and with the Plunder and Spoil of all brought to Lovando Saint Paulo, and from thence sent to Taernabock in Brasile; onely the Governor Petro Coesar de Meneses, with some of the chiefest they kept prisoners there.

The Portuguese seem'd highly discontent at these Transactions, * 1.371 which they shew'd in their Declarations and Letters sent to Lisbon; firmly maintaining them to be contrary to their ten years Truce, concluded in the year Sixteen hundred forty one; which according to the first, second, and eighth Articles was instantly to begin in Europe, and beyond Europe, as soon as tidings could come of it: Adding further, that they had accordingly sent notice, but on the contrary, the Hollanders sent instructions to Houtebeene their Admiral in Ame∣rica, to subdue all they could.

Till the year Sixteen hundred forty eight, * 1.372 the Netherlanders possess'd this Ci∣ty; at which time the Portuguese regain'd it by Treaty, on the one and twen∣tieth of August; and accordingly on the four and twentieth of the same Moneth, the Dutch march'd from thence.

While the Hollanders held it, * 1.373 they erected a Fort on the Northside of the Ri∣ver Quansa, to hinder the Portuguese going up and down; to which they gave the name of Molls, being two and thirty paces long, and twenty broad, made up with Planks and Pallisadoes, and fill'd with Earth; the top about four foot thick, furnish'd with Port-holes, and grown round about with Bushes, where were Planted four Pieces of Ordnance, with a Guard of Souldiers.

¶ MOst of the Inhabitants are Idolaters, * 1.374 and have their Moquisies and Idols made of Wood, in the midst of their Cities and Towns; giving them particular names, and swearing by them usually, but in their more particular Adjurations, they follow the Customs and Frantick Humors of the Ganga: whereof we spake not long since, with this onely addition, That at last the Conjurer or Ganga takes a red hot Iron, and strokes every one with it over their Arms or Legs; yet the place touch'd therewith, receives no damage by burn∣ing in the body of any, but the guilty: And this Superstition hath so won up∣on their infidelity, that the very Children of the Countrey in trivial matters put it in practice: But the Fathers of the Christian Religion, would severely punish the same, if it should come to their knowledge.

Most of their woodden Idols are made up in the shape of a Goat, with a Tor∣toise head, feet of Beasts, and small bones of Elephants, which they call by a ge∣neral name Ganganjumba, through which (they say) the Devil speaks to them.

For the service of these Idols they have Priests call'd Ganga's, which they

adore like gods, for they think, that their lives, health, * 1.375 nay the preservation of all things lies in their power; as that they have the command of Rain and Wind, cause fertility or barrenness upon the ground; inflict sicknesses, and restore health, for indeed they know how in some manner to administer Phy∣sick.

In short, all the Blacks of Angola (till of late) liv'd in Paganism, using a Dance, by them call'd Quimboara, in which they say the Devil certainly en∣ters one of them, and out of him informs them of future, and answers to past events. But now many of them, by the endeavour of the Portugal Jesuites, * 1.376 have been brought to the Catholick Religion, especially in the year fifteen hundred eighty four; at which time many thousands receiv'd Baptism: inso∣much, that in Fifteen hundred and ninety, there were above twenty thousand Families of Angolians found that were Christians; and in the same year, fifteen hundred more were converted; the Portuguese to this day labour very much in the same good Work.

Every Sova hath a Chaplain in his Banza or Village, to Christen Children, and Celebrate Mass, which on many works effectually to their confirmation; though others in publick appearing Christians, yet in private adhere to their damnable Idolatry.

The Supervising and Command of Lovando Sante Paulo, * 1.377 and the rest of An∣gola, subject to the King of Portugal, in matters of State, lies in the hands of a Governor, two Bradores; or Burgesses, and one Ovidor, or Chief Justice, for matters Criminal, and two Judges call'd Jeuses, with one Secretary.

The King of Portugal hath great Revenues from Angola, * 1.378 partly by the yearly Tributes of the Sovasen, and partly by the Customs and Taxes set upon Expor∣ted and Imported Goods and Slaves. This Revenue, for all Rights and free Transportation to Brazil, Rio dela Plata, and other places, is said to amount to a great summe of Money yearly; which in Lisbon is Farm'd to one, or more, by the name of Contractadore, who keeps his Factor in Lovando, in the nature, and with the authority of Consul; deciding all matters of Trade, and Money∣businesses: He hath to attend him one Secretary, two Notaries, and two Porte∣ras, or Door-keepers.

The Church-Government of the Portuguese in Lovando a Bishop manages, * 1.379 who is Suffragan of him of the Island of Sante Thombe, by reason that Island pre∣scribes antiquity, and as shewing the first claims to be there the Mother-Church of the Christians.

The Island of LOVANDO.

BEfore the City Lovando Sante Paulo, in eight degrees, * 1.380 and eight and forty minutes South-Latitude, lies the Island of Lovando, five miles with its North-Point to the West of the River Bengo, making a good and con∣venient Haven for Shipping. The whole being not above seven miles in length, but in the broadest place, it is not above half a League over; insomuch as those that Sail by in a Ship, may easily see the Sea run between it and the main Land.

Pigafet supposes it to have begun from the setlings of Sand and Mud, thrown up there in heaps, by force of the two greater Waters of Bengo and Quansa.

The whole spot appears an even Champaign, but very dry and Sandy, one∣ly in some places may be seen a few Bushes and Brambles; and on the North∣side, here and there, some Haw-thorn Shrubs. The Land by the Sea-side shoots down so steep and sloaping, that the Sea, not above a Musket-shot from the Shore, hath above seven or eight and twenty Fathom Water; and a mile from thence a Line of a hundred Fathom can reach no ground.

Pigafet places on this Island seven Towns, * 1.381 by the Inhabitants call'd Libar, or Libata; but Linschot will hardly allow them Villages, however the Portuguese at∣tribute to the best, the title of Sante Esprit.

Here are two Churches or Chappels for the exercise of Religion; and the Portuguese have divers Gardens and Orchards, wherein grow Oranges, Lem∣mens, Citrons, Pomegranates, excellent Figs, Bananos, Coco-nuts, Grapes and other Fruits; but Corn is so great a stranger to it, that they are compell'd to fetch Supply from other places.

This little Tract produces the great Tree, by the Natives call'd Ensada; by Clusius, the Indian Fig-Tree; by Linschot in Portuguese, Arbor de Raiz, that is, the Rooting-Tree.

It springs up commonly with one thick body to a great height, at the top shooting forth many branches; from which pendulously descend several small Strings of a Golden colour, which once touching the ground, take fast root, and spring up again like new Plants, and in short time, increase to a large Bulk; from whence, as the former, fall new Pendulums, that rooting again, spread; and so ad infinitum: so that sometimes one single Tree will extend its bounds above a thousand paces, and seems like a little Wood or Thicket.

The great Sprouts with so many close Boughs, deny the Sun-beams a peep∣ing place to view the inside of those vaulted Cavities, whose redoubled Mazes yield three or four times reiterated Ecchos, to such whose retirements draw them thither for divertisement and shadow.

The Leaves of the young Boughs, resemble those of the Quince-Tree, being of a whitish green, and woolly. The Fruit within and without red, springs be∣tween the Leaves of the young Branches, like an ordinary Fig.

Very credible eye-witnesses report, that under one of these Trees, three thou∣sand men may shelter.

Under its outermost or first Bark, * 1.382 they find somewhat like a Thred or Yarn, which being beaten, cleans'd, and drawn out at length, the common People make Cloth of.

This Tree grows also in Gon, and the Indies, where the Inhabitants, by cutting away the thin Boughs, make Arbors under them for cooleness and shade.

It seems contrary to the ordinary rules of experience, * 1.383 and therefore strange, that digging here two or three hands breadth deep, very swift Water rises at the time of the Seas flowing; whereas digging at the time of ebb, it cometh forth salt or brackish.

The Islanders use Canoos, of the bodies of Date Trees joyn'd together, in which they fight at Sea.

Formerly the Jages abode here, but the Portuguese drove them out in the year Fifteen hundred seventy eight, and pursu'd them to Massingan; at the same time raising a Fort there for their security.

Under this Island are the Simbos taken up, * 1.384 which carry'd to Congo and other places, go for current Money; so that this place may justly be term'd, the Mint of Congo.

This Island obeys the King of Congo, although by report, * 1.385 beyond it he doth not possess one foot of ground Southward of Bengo, upon the main Land; how∣ever by that he claims to himself all the Revenue of the Fishery aforesaid, and hath his Governor to oversee the same, and take the King's due, which is in∣deed what he pleases, and by compute amounts to eleven thousand Duckets An∣nually. And although on all the Shores of Congo, these fashion shells are found, yet those of Lovando have the highest esteem, by reason of their thin and shining black or gray colour.

This Island makes the Haven before the City Lovando, * 1.386 where lieth two En∣trances, one on the South, call'd Barra de Korimba, formerly bearing above five Fathom water, but is at present almost fill'd up, and choak'd with Sand: on the other side of this Entrance, heretofore the Portuguese had two Batteries, but the force of the water hath almost wash'd them away.

About two miles from Barra de Korimba, on the main Land, * 1.387 appears a little Promontory in Portuguese, call'd Punto del Palmarinho.

A mile and a half more Southerly, lieth the Sleepers-Haven; * 1.388 and also the Clay-Ovens, or Lime-Kilns, where the Portuguese burn Lime and Oyster∣shells.

Four miles and a half from Sleepers-Haven, you come to the River Quansa, where formerly stood a Fort of the Netherlanders, which we mention'd before, call'd Molls.

The Territory of Quisama, or Quissamba.

THe Territory of Quisama, or according to Pigafet, Quissamba, * 1.389 lieth on the South-side of the River Quansa, and spreads thence twenty miles up∣ward, and more.

This Countrey (as the rest) comprehends divers Dominions, * 1.390 of all which Motchima claims the rule as chief Lord, viz. Zourube, Godgo, Zautatsa, Molunua, Katakahajo, and Zuino.

The Natives here, need not complain of Nature as a Step-mother; the Land without any great labour producing abundance of Mille for Bread, besides other useful Plants and Trees: as particularly

The Alikonda, eight or ten Fathom round, but very porus and weak; * 1.391 fit for no use, but to make Trays to hold water: their innermost Bark some convert in∣to a kind of Thred, whereof they make Aprons or Coats to wear about their bodies.

The Portugueses Quacumburez, which the natives call Quisamo, * 1.392 never grows big∣ger than a mans Waste, with few Leaves, but thick and large; the Wood so ten∣der, that a strong man with a Sword may cut it quite in two: out of the rifts in the body flows a great deal of juyce like Milk, but of so poysonous and de∣stroying a quality, that if any one should get the least drop thereof in their Eyes, they would instantly grow blind. The same juyce pour'd into the water, will immediately cause the Fish to swim at the top, as if they were dead.

The Blacks hold the shadow of this Tree poyson, and will not be perswaded to rest under it; for they say, that the juyce is so great a corrosive, as 'twill gnaw their bowels in pieces, without possibility of help or Antidote; as hath been experienc'd by a Lord, that was poyson'd with it by his Slaves.

The Beasts breeding in these Parts, * 1.393 are Hogs, Goats, Bucks, Sheep, wild Cows, Elephants, Tygers, and Leopards. In short, the same conveniences may be had here as in Ilamba and Enraka.

Fresh Water they have none, * 1.394 save such as is gather'd in the time of Rain, and preserv'd in Troughs made of hollow Trees; and the Places where they keep them are reserved by the Fetisies command with so strict a secrecy, that if by misfortune any fall into the Enemies hand, he will rather be cut in pieces than be brought to discover them.

In the Lordships of Zuina, * 1.395 Gungo, and Katta Kabajo, great Mountains lift up their Heads, whose open'd sides shew many Salt-pits, which those Blacks sub∣ject to the Sovasen under whose power they are, may freely fetch out by their Slaves, paying the appointed Custom.

This they dig out in Pieces of a Dutch Ell long, and a Hand broad, every one weighing eighteen or twenty Pounds, as clear as a piece of Ice or Crystal, and as white as our best Salt, and of so good a savor, that a little Piece put in a Pot or Kettle, give both the Liquor and Meat a pleasant seasoning.

From the bowels they dig Iron, * 1.396 but enough onely to make Arms and Im∣plements for Tillage or Husbandry.

The best Trade of these Quisamites consists in the fore-recited Salt and Mille, * 1.397 which they exchange for Slaves to be employ'd in the digging of it, for they work not themselves, out of an opinion of their noble Extract. And not one∣ly the Blacks, but the Portuguese also buy great quantities of it for their People, no other being to be got, unless from Lovando.

The Blacks of Lovando appropriate to themselves the whole Countrey on the South-side of Quansa for twenty Leagues.

The Island of LIBOLO.

IN the next place follows, * 1.398 towards the South, Libolo, bordering with one Point to the East, on the Empire of Monopotapa; but in the South, at Rio Longo, near Benguelle. 'Tis parted into many Sub-divisions; thirty of which the Portuguese brought under some years ago, and keep them still in strict Command and obedience, reaping great advantage from Cattel, which are the same here, as we mention'd before in other parts of Angola, and exceeding them in nothing but plenty of Bees and Honey. More we cannot inform you of from hence, for that they lie as yet undiscover'd to our European Mer∣chants.

The Countrey of BENGUELA. or, BEGALA.

THis Countrey Modern Geographers place at the Sea-Coast, and make it spread from the River Quansa, to Cabo Negro, in the heighth of six∣teen Degrees; though others will have it go farther than Rio Longo, in eleven Degrees and four Minutes South Latitude. The Places, Rivers, Bays,

and Villages, lying at the Sea-Coast within that compass, may be these:

About three miles from the South Point of Quansa, lieth Maysotte-Bay; before which a small Rock hides it self. Three miles and a half forward you arrive at Cabo Ledo; And five from thence appears Cabo de tres Puntas. * 1.399 And two miles yet Southerly Cabo Falso; And five beyond that, another.

Six miles and a half from Cabo St. Bras, lieth Hens-Bay, * 1.400 so call'd from the abundance of Hens thereabouts; and between both, Benguella Viella, that is Old Benguela, a Champaign and very fruitful Countrey.

The Hen-Bay contains about a mile and a half in breadth, holding ten or twelve Fathom Water, with muddy Ground. On the South-side stands a great Village on a Hill, where large Cows, Sheep, Hens, and Elephants-Teeth may be had; yet they have no fresh Water.

Three miles and a half from this Bay lieth Rio Longo, * 1.401 otherwise call'd Rio Moreno, in eleven Degrees and four Minutes South Latitude, so shallow at the Mouth, that a small Boat cannot go in or out without difficulty.

In former times the Portuguese attempted to enlarge the Entrance into this River; but by reason of its shoalness, the strong Water-falls, and great num∣bers of Rocks, they found it not feasible.

Five miles from Rio Longo appears a great Village, nam'd Manikikongo; upon the Ascent a high Mountain, where the Portuguese once had a Store-house, and bought Cows, Hogs, and Elephants-Teeth, for Linnen and East-India pressed Clothes. The Inhabitants here are very earnest for Musquets and Powder.

Eleven miles from Manikikongo runs the Salt River Katon-belle, dividing it self in two or three Branches, being free from all Winds, and hath fifteen and six∣teen Foot Water, so that the great Ships may come before it.

About the North Point of Katon-belle lieth the Good Bay, * 1.402 so call'd by reason of its ground of Anchoring.

The Countreys upon the Sea-Coast are fruitful and low, but the In-lands high, and overgrown with Woods.

A mile and a half from Katon-belle you discover a fresh River, that falls in∣to the Sea but in the times of Rain.

The Bay of Benguella, having good Ground for Ships to ride at an Anchor, reaches from one Point to the other, a mile and a half in breadth. On the North-side stands the Foot of Benguelle, built four-square, with Pallizado's and Trenches, and surrounded with Houses, which stand in the shadow of Bananos, Orange, Lemon, Granate-Trees, and Bakovens. Behind this Fort is a Pit with fresh Water.

Here lie seven Villages, that pay to those of Bengala the tenth part of all they have for Tribute.

The first, Melonde; the second, Peringe; both about a League from the Fort, * 1.403 and a mile one from another; the other five are, Maniken, Somba, Maninomma, Ma∣nikimsomba, Pikem, and Manikilonde; of all which Manikisomba is the biggest, and can bring three thousand Men into the Field.

Here formerly lived some Portuguese, which afterwards out of fear of the Blacks fled to Massingan, but were most of them kill'd in the way.

On the West Point of the Bay of Benguelle, is a flat Mountain call'd in Por∣tuguese Sombriero, from its shape, representing afar off a three-corner'd Cap; and by it an excellent Bay, having at the South-east-side a sandy Shore, with a pleasant Valley and a few Trees, but no Water fit to drink.

Four miles from thence they have a Salt-Pan, which produces of gray Salt, (like French Salt) as much as the adjacent Countreys can spend.

In Bengala is a great Beast, * 1.404 call'd Abada, as big as a lusty Horse, having two Horns, one sticking out in his Forehead, and another behind in his Neck: that in the Forehead is crooked, but smooth, rises sloaping before, and very sharp, but at the Root as thick as an ordinary Man's Leg, being many times one, two, three, or four Foot long; but that in the Neck shorter and flatter, of colour black, or a sad gray, but being fil'd appears white, the Head not so long as the Head of a well-shaped Horse, but shorter and flatter, with a Skin Hair'd like a Cow, and a Tail like an Ox, but short; a Mayn like a Horse, but not so long, and cloven Feet like a Deers, but bigger.

Before this Beast hath attained the full growth, the Horn stands right forward in the midst of the Forehead, but afterwards grows crooked like the Elephant's-Teeth. When he drinks he puts his Horn first in the Water, for prevention (as they say) against Poyson.

The Horn they report to be an excellent Medicine against Poyson, * 1.405 as hath oftentimes been proved; but they find more efficacy in one than another, oc∣casioned by the timely and untimely killing of the Creature. The trial of their goodness the Portuguese make in this manner: They set up the Horn with the sharp end downwards on a Floor, and hang over it a Sword with the Point downwards, so as the Point of the one may touch the end of the other: If the Horn be good, and in its due season, or age, then the Sword turns round of it self, but moves not over untimely and bad Horns.

The Bones of this Beast ground small, and with Water made into Pap, they prescribe as a Cure against inward Pains and Distempers, being applied outwardly Plaister-wise.

The Kingdom of MATAMAN, or rather CLIMBEBE.

THe Kingdom of Mataman, * 1.406 commonly so call'd, took that Denominati∣on from its King, the proper and right Name, according to Pigafet, being Climbebe, or Zembebas.

Its Borders, * 1.407 as the same Author, Linschot, Peter Davitius, and other Geogra∣phers hold, in the North, upon Angola; Eastwards, on the Westerly Shore of the River Bagamadiri; to the South it touches upon the River Bravagul, by the Foot of the Mountains of the Moon, near the Tropick of Capricorn, which the chiefest Geographers make a Boundary between this Kingdom and those Mountains, and the Countrey of the Kaffers; to the West along the Ethiopick-Sea, that is, from Angola, or Cabo Negro, in sixteen Degrees South Latitude to the River Bra∣vagul, a Tract of five Degrees and fifteen Minutes, every Degree being reckon'd fifteen great Dutch Leagues, or threescore English Miles.

Two Rivers chiefly water this Kingdom, * 1.408 viz. Bravagul and Magnice; the first takes its original out of the Mountains of the Moon, * 1.409 or the River Zair, and unites its Waters with those of Magnice, springing out of a Lake, by the Portu∣guese call'd Dambea Zocche, and falling in the South-east into the Indian-Sea.

The Places of this Kingdom coasting the Sea are these: Next the Black

Cape, right Eastward, you may see the beginning of the Cold Mountains, * 1.410 on some Places for the abundance of Snow with which they lie cover'd, are call'd The Snowy Mountains.

Then you come to the Crystal Mountains, * 1.411 that shoot Northerly to the Silver Mountains, and to Molembo, by which the River Coari hath its course, and makes a Border to the Kingdom of Angola.

At the Southerly Coast of Cymbebas, near the Sea, * 1.412 in sixteen Degrees and sixty Minutes South Latitude, appeareth Cabo Negro, or The Black Point, so deno∣minated because of its blackness, whereas no other black Land can be seen from the one and twentieth Degree South Latitude. On the top of this Point stands an Alabaster Pillar, with an Inscription, but so defaced by the injuries of Time and Weather, that it is hardly legible, and formerly upon the Head of it a Cross raised, but at present fall'n off, and lying upon the Ground.

The Coast from hence spreads a little North-east, and East-North-east. * 1.413 The Countrey round about shews nothing but barren and sandy Hills, with∣out green; and high sandy Mountains, without any Trees.

More Southerly, in the heighth of eighteen Degrees, you come to a Point, by the Portuguese call'd Cabo de Ruy piz das Nivez, or Cabo de Ruy Pirez, having to the Northward a great Inlet with sandy Hills, and the Shore to the Black Point; but Southward a High-land, altogether sandy, and reacheth to nineteen Degrees.

Farther to the South, in nineteen Degrees and thirty Minutes, lies a Bay call'd Golfo Prio, and Prias das Nevas, with double Land, and full of Trees: af∣terwards you come to the open Haven of Ambros, in the one and twentieth De∣gree; then going lower to the Southward, the Sea-Coast resembles what we mention'd in the North, shewing high, white, sandy Hills, barren Land, and a bad Shore.

A good way to the Westward of Cabo Negro lies a great Sand in the Sea, in Portuguese call'd Baixo de Antonia de Viava, or The Cazado, dangerous to Sailers, be∣ing sometimes cover'd with Water.

The Air bears a good temper, and the Earth, though sandy towards the Sea, yet affords all things necessary for the use of Man. The Mountains rich, not onely in Crystal, but other Minerals: Northerly it becomes more full of Trees, to the heighth of two and twenty Degrees South Latitude; from whence there drives into the Sea, a hundred and fifty Miles from the Shore, certain green Weeds call'd Saigossa, and seems as a Mark to Sea-men, whereby they know how near they are to the Main Land of Africa. At a great distance also are seen many Mews, or Sea-Pies, with black Feathers at the end of their Wings, which assure the Mariners by their appearance two or three together, that they are infallibly near the African Continent.

The Government of this Jurisdiction rests in the hands of a King, * 1.414 who as an absolute Monarch, Commands all at his pleasure: yet some Lords, whose Commands lie by the Sea-shore, pride themselves with the empty Title of Kings, while they neither possess Wealth or Countreys, whose Products are sufficient to make them known to Foreigners of the least esteem.

Kaffrarie, or the Countrey of Kaffers, other∣wise call'd Hottentots.

KAffrarie, * 1.415 or according to Marmol, Quefrerie, took Denomination from the Kaffers, the Natives thereof, which others name Hottentots, by reason of their lameness and corruption of Speech, without either Law or Religion.

Maginus spreads this Countrey along the Sea-Coast, from the West-side of Cabo Negro, lying in sixteen Degrees and fourteen Minutes, to Cape of Good Hope, or Cabo de bona Esperansa; and from thence up Northward to the River Magnice, otherwise call'd St. Esprit, but with what ground of reason, we must leave to de determin'd.

Sanutus begins Kaffrarie at the Mountains of the Moon, near the Tropick of Capricorn, in three and twenty Degrees and a half South Latitude, so along the Western Coast to the Cape of Good Hope: This beginning of Kaffrarie, accord∣ing to most Authors, * 1.416 from that remarkable Boundary, the Tropick of Capri∣corn, hath been indisputably setled; but they spread the end of it, as we said, to the Cape of Good Hope and Zanguebar: Between which Northward, along the Sea-Coast, are none, or very few distinct Kingdoms; and therefore this being the outermost Southern Borders, may not inconveniently be extended to Zan∣guebar; so that the whole Tract lying Southward of Zanguebar, and the King∣dom of Monomotapa, are to be understood in the general Name of Kaffrarie. So then, according to this last limiting, it hath on the East and South, the Indian, and in the West, the Ethiopick-Sea, which meet together to the Southward of the Cape of Good Hope, and on the North at Mataman and Monopotapa.

This Countrey so Bounded, lieth encompassed in the North with those high, cold, bushy, and sharp Mountains of the Moon, always cover'd with Snow; nevertheless it hath about the Cape in some places, several large and pleasant Valleys, into which flow divers Rivulets from the Hills.

It is not divided into any particular or known Kingdoms, yet inhabited by several People; some Govern'd by Kings, others by Generals, and some are without any Government at all. We will give you a glimpse of them in their Customs and Natures, as far as any Discovery hath hitherto given us any in∣formation, and that from the hands of such as for some time lived on the Spot.

The chiefest People hitherto discover'd in this Southerly part of Africa, are the Gorachouqua's, Goringhaiqua's, Goringhaikona's, Kochoqua's, Great and Little Kari∣guriqua's, Hosaa's, Chaniouqua's, Kobona's, Sonqu's, Namaqua's, Heusaqua's, Brigou∣dins, and Hankumqua's; the eight first neighbor the Cape, and the farthest not above threescore miles from it.

The three first, viz. Gorachouqua's and Goringhaiqua's have their Dwellings within four or five hours Journey of the Great Cape; but the Gorinhaikona's, or Water-men, are within a quarter of an hours walk from thence.

GORINGHAICONAS.

THe Goringhaicona's, or Water-men, have a Governor call'd Demtaa, who was once taken Prisoner by the Hollanders, but was afterwards by car∣rying himself with Civility, released and setled in his old Do∣minion.

Their best Seat contains scarce five Houses, and not above fifty People, with Women and Children, living in a condition of Poverty, below all the rest of the Hottentots.

GORACHOUQUAS.

THe Gorachouqua's are about three or four hundred fighting Men, besides Women and Children, and maintain themselves by Pasturage, and Profit of good Cattel, as Sheep and Cows.

Their Governor call'd Chora, hath a Brother call'd Jakin, both going in tal∣low'd Skins: but they have great store of Cattel.

GORINHAIQUAS.

THe Goringhaiqua's, or Cape-mans, by reason that they always lived nearest to it, are more than equal in People to those last mention'd, for they can between both raise about a thousand fighting Men; yet all their Towns and Villages make up but ninety five poor Huts cover'd with Mats.

These People obey a Governor, whom they call Gogosoa, who was in the Year Sixteen hundred sixty two, according to the averment of such as had been there, a hundred years of age, and had two Sons, the eldest nam'd Osinghiakanna, and the other Otegnoa, both which alway sought to over-Rule their Father, but chiefly the eldest, by inventing all means to make him away.

In the Year Sixteen hundred fifty nine, * 1.417 there grew between these People and the Hollanders a Dissention, for the possession of the Countrey about the Cape; where the Natives endeavor'd to turn them out, alledging they had pos∣sessed it beyond all remembrance; and with such malice did they manage it, that they slew many of the Dutch when they saw opportunity; at the same time robbing them also of Cattel, which they drove away so swift, that they could not be shot, always chusing to Fight in stormy and rainy Weather, as well knowing that then they could do but little Execution with their Arms.

These, upon information received by advice of one of their own People, by them call'd Nomoa, and by the Netherlanders, Doman, who went from thence to Battavie in one of the Companies Ships, and stay'd there five or six years, observing their actions with such inquisitive diligence, that he remembred no small part thereof. Doman being come again to the Cape in those Ships which were order'd for Holland, kept a great while amongst them in Dutch Habit;

but at last betook himself to his old Companions, informing and instructing them in all the actions and intentions of the Netherlanders; as also the manner and use of their Arms.

He, together with another stout Soldier, by the Hottentots call'd Garabinga, were always their Captains, and with great skill and conduct led on and brought off their followers always with success.

After the War had continued three Moneths, * 1.418 in August Sixteen hundred fifty and nine, on a Morning went out five Hottentots (one of which was the afore∣mention'd Doman) to forage, and as they had robb'd a Countrey-man of two Beasts, five Dutch Horsmen rid after them, whom they resisted like brave Sol∣diers, by reason they saw no means to flye, yet scorn'd to desire Quarter, in∣somuch that they wounded three of the Horsmen, one through the Arm, and the other under the short Ribs, and the other in the Back; but the Hollan∣ders remain'd not in their debts, but shot down three of the five, one of which call'd Epkamma, was shot through the Neck, had one of his Legs broken in pieces, * 1.419 and a great Wound in his Head; being thus wounded, he was taken, and brought on a Horse into the Fort, but Doman with the other escaped, swimming over a River.

The wounded Epkamma being brought into the Fort, * 1.420 and asked for what reason they did make War with the Netherlanders, and sought to do mischief every where by robbing, murdering, and burning, though excessively pained with his Wounds, return'd this answer: What was the reason that the Ne∣therlanders Ploughed their Land, and Sow'd Corn on their Ground, where they should drive their Cattel to Pasture, and by this means took the Bread out of their Mouthes; That to revenge themselves of the injury and wrong that was done them, they fought; for they were not onely forbidden to keep away from those and other Pasturing places, which they had possessed peaceably so long (whereinto they had permitted the Netherlanders onely in the beginning, to come as a refreshing-place) but they saw also their Countreys divided and ta∣ken away without any recompence. At last, asking if the same had been done to the Netherlanders, how they would carry themselves? Moreover they understood, that the Netherlanders did strengthen themselves daily with Forts; which according to their opinion, could be for no other end, but to bring them and all what they had at length under subjection. The Hollanders repli'd in short, That they had now lost the Countrey about the Cape by the War, and therefore they should never think to regain it either by Hostility or Peace.

The last Discourse of this Epkamma (who died on the sixth day) was, That he was but a mean Person, but he advised them to invite his Governor to the Fort, and to discourse the business with him, and to order every one his own again as it could best be found, for the prevention of farther mischief and trou∣ble.

This being held for good counsel, two or three Netherlanders were sent abroad, with Entreaties to the Governor Gogosoa to come to the Fort, and to Treat concerning a Peace; but all in vain: for they went on furiously against such Places as they saw fit; insomuch that the Hollanders scarce saw any means how to decide this matter for the best. The placing and appointing of good Watches to secure the Planters, which lived but two hours Journey from the Fort, signifi'd but little; for those Hottentots drove away all their Cattel, and were so quick and nimble in the action, that it was impossible to overtake or retrieve them.

Ten or eleven Moneths were spent by these Salvages, in murdering, rob∣bing, and stealing; but at last the Quarrel was decided in this manner:

A certain Hottentot of Eminency, by the Netherlanders call'd Herry, * 1.421 and by the Natives, Kamcemoca, being banished to Conney-Isle for a Crime committed, after three Moneths abode there, went in a dark Night with another Compa∣nion, in a leaky Fisher-boat, furnished with two Oars, the Wind serving them fitly, and came to the Main Land, where they found their Friends the Gora∣chouqua's and Goringhaiqua's.

The Escape of these two being told to the Dutch Governors, he sent six Dutchmen abroad, to go and seek so far along the Shore, till they found the Boat or some signs of them. Whereupon they being provided with Victuals for four or five days, went out, and the next day found the Boat above thirty miles from the Fort, in a fine small Sandy Bay, with the Oars by it, and some Grass in the same; so that it seem'd as if they had taken their nights rest therein: but they met no people in all their journey; onely they saw some Rhinocerots, Elephants, and other wild Beasts. So after four days they came again to the Fort.

At length the aforemention'd Herry or Kamcemoca, * 1.422 in the Year Sixteen hun∣dred and sixty, in February came to the Fort with the Governor of the Negery, call'd Chori, accompani'd with a hundred other people, but all without Arms, and bringing with them thirteen fat Cattel, desiring they would receive the Cattel as acknowledgment of Friendship, and to permit them free egress and regress amongst them, as formerly: Which accepted, it was further agreed, * 1.423 That the Hollanders might Sowe as much Ground, with Corn and other Seed, as was within the compass of three Hours Journey; but with this Proviso, That they should not Plow any more Ground than was already Plowed. Upon the Ratifying this Agreement, these Hottentots were treated in the Fort with Bread, Tobacco, and Brandy; whereof the rest having notice, both Men, Women, and Children came thither.

After a little time, the General of the Goronghaiqua's, or Caepmans, Gogosoa, made an Agreement and came with Chori to the Court, * 1.424 for whose Entertain∣ment there was, upon the command of the Dutch Governor, a whole Tub full of Brandy, with a wooden Dish in it, set amongst them all, whereat every one began to make merry.

When the Men began to be intoxicated, and their Heads fail them, there were about two or three hundred little pieces of Tobacco thrown amongst them, in the scrambling for which, they made a horrible noise. The noise and hurly-burly over, they began to leap and dance, * 1.425 with several strange Gestures; the Women in the mean while clapping their Hands, and continually singing, Ha, ho, ho, ho, with so great noise as might easily have been heard a Bowe-shot from the Fort. By such hideous outcries, when either Lion or Tyger by night approaches, they fright away the fierce and hungry Beast.

After these Exercises, the chief of them were presented with Coral, * 1.426 Plates of Copper, and a little Roll of Tobacco besides; but the Commons content∣ed themselves with the foresaid Entertainment: and so having slept all night in the Fort, they withdrew; onely Herry remained there three or four days.

This Herry spake a little English, which he learn'd by conversing with their Plantation and Fort at Bantam in the Indies, whither he went in an English Ship; but coming afterwards again to the Hope, he went among his own People.

COCHOQUAS, or SALDANHARS.

THe Cochoquas, * 1.427 or Saldanhars, so call'd because they reside generally in and about the Valley of Saldanha-Bay, about eighteen Miles North-west∣ward of the Cape, are divided into fifteen or sixteen Clans, each about a quarter of an hours Journey asunder; yet all comprehended within the Walls of four hundred and fifty Houses: Every Division or Clan consisting either of thirty, six and thirty, forty, or fifty Houses, more or less, all set round together, and a little distance one from another.

They possess Flocks of goodly Cattel, well near an hundred thousand, and above two hundred thousand Sheep, which have no Wooll, but long curl'd Hair.

They are all under one Prince or King, * 1.428 entituled Coehque, who dwells about fifty Miles from the Cape, and for his better ease, appoints under him a Deputy or Viceroy. The Coehque who Reign'd in the Year Sixteen hundred sixty one, was nam'd Oldasoa; his Viceroy, Gonnomoa; and the Third Person in the Kingdom, Coucosoa. Gonnomoa was exceedingly black, beyond all others of his own People, a gross and heavy-bodied Man, having three Wives, and by them many Children; whereas the King himself, who deceas'd in the Year Sixteen hundred sixty one, of a languishing and painful Disease, never had more than one. This Prince was a Person handsom-bodied, well-set, very courteous, and much bewail'd by his Subjects: He left behind him his onely Daughter, nam'd Mamis, handsom and very comely of feature, but Camoisie-nos'd, as all the Blacks in general are.

Great and Little CARIGURIQUAS, or HOSAAS.

THese lie most in the Valleys, * 1.429 boasting of nothing but very fair Cattel, whereof exceeding choice and careful, because they have nothing else in the dry time of Summer to live upon.

If you go farther up into the Countrey, you come to the Chainouquas, Cabo∣nas, Sanquas, Namaquas, Heusaquaes, and Hancumquas.

CHAINOUQUA'S.

THe Chainouquas at present live three Moneths Journey into the Coun∣trey, * 1.430 with their Families, Retinue, Wife, Children, and Cattel, ac∣cording to the report of the other wild Natives, very near the Cobo∣nas, being not above four hundred Men, but rich in Cattel.

Their Prince, * 1.431 call'd Sousoa, an old Man, had two Wives, but both dead; and hath a Son nam'd Goeboe, whose right Leg, broken in pieces by an Ele∣phant,

is wholly useless to him. Upon every Remove, he rides upon an Ox, and must be lift up and down.

His Clothing is a fine Leopards Skin, with the spotted side turn'd inwards, and the ill-favour'd fleshy side, well liquor'd with Grease, according to the manner of the Countrey, outwards.

CABONA'S.

THe Cabona's are a very black People, * 1.432 with Hair that hangs down their Backs to the Ground.

These are such inhumane Cannibals, that if they can get any Men, * 1.433 they broyl them alive, and eat them up. They have some Cattel, and plant Calbasses, with which they sustain themselves.

They have, by report of the Hottentots, rare Portraitures, which they find in the Mountains, and other Rarities: But by reason of their distance, and bar∣barous qualities, the Whites have never had any converse with them.

In the Year Sixteen hundred fifty nine, one of the Chainouquas, call'd Chaihan∣timo, went into the Cabonas Countrey, and with the help of the People took and brought thence one of their Women, whom he made his Wife.

The Netherlanders stirred up with a desire to see this strange sort of People, desired Chaihantimo that he would order this Woman to come to the Fort of Good Hope; whereto, upon promise of a Requital, he consented, and sent some of his People to fetch, and tell her, That her new-married Husband would desire her to come to a People call'd Dutchmen, who wore a great many Clothes, such as neither she nor any of her Nation had ever seen.

This Woman, partly out of obedience to her Husband, and partly for No∣velty to see Strangers, after two days preparation, drest in her best Appa∣rel, came thither, under the Conduct of thirty or forty Chainouquas, for an Aid and Guard against the Cockoquas, with whom the Chainouquas were at that time in War: But after some days travelling, she was set upon in a great Wood, and kill'd, and her People put to flight, who hasted to the Cape to Chai∣hantimo, to carry him News of this sad misfortune; whereupon he immediately withdrew to his own Countrey, to revenge himself by force of Arms for this Injury.

SONQUA'S.

THe Sonqua's live in a very high Mountain; and though little in Stature, * 1.434 yet defend themselves by their Numbers, wherein they exceed their Neighbors.

They have no Cattel, but live by their Bowes and Arrows, * 1.435 which they han∣dle very expertly in shooting Badgers that shelter under the Rocks, and in the heat of the day come forth and play, rowling in the Sand; and also by hunt∣ing other Beasts, especially wild Horses and Mules.

The Horses have very plump and round Buttocks, all over striped with Yellow, Black, Red, and Sky-colour; but the Mules are only strip'd with White and Chesnut-colour.

The Sonqua's in the Year Sixteen hundred sixty two, brought one of the Skins to the Cape of Good Hope, which the Netherlanders bought for Tobacco, and ha∣ving stuffed it with Hay, hung it up in the first Court of the Fort, to be seen by all that came thither in the Ships, as a Rarity.

The Badgers Flesh affords them an acceptable Food; * 1.436 for upon that and Roots they chiefly live.

They are great Robbers and Thieves, stealing from their Neighbors all the Cattel they can lay hands on, and driving the same into the Mountains, hide themselves and Prey about, without possibility of discovery.

Their Houses are onely interwoven Boughs, * 1.437 cover'd with Broom; and those numerous, by reason they never pull them down, but still build up new.

They wear onely Lappets made of the Skins of Wild Beasts sew'd together. * 1.438 The Women have, against the heat and burning of the Sun-beams, a Quitazel, or Fan of Ostrich-Feathers, made fast round about their Heads.

NAMAQUAS.

THe Namaqua's live about eighty or ninety Dutch Miles East-North-East from the Cape of Good Hope; * 1.439 to whom, in the year Sixteen hundred sixty one, the Governor of the Fort sent thirteen Netherlanders, to in∣quire if no Gold, * 1.440 or any other Rarities, were to be had amongst them; who, upon their arrival, were entertain'd with signs of great Friendship, and pre∣sented with Sheep; and as a further manifestation of kindness, they were welcomed with rare Musick, of about an hundred Musitians in Consort, which stood all in a Ring, every one with a Reed in his hand, but of an unequal length (in the middle of whom stood a Man that kept Time) which yielded a plea∣sant Sound, like our Trumpets.

After the ending of this Musick, which continu'd two or three hours, upon the intreaty of the King, they went into his House, and were treated with Milk and Mutton. On the other side, the Netherlanders presented the King with some Copper, Beads, Brandy, and Tobacco, which they accepted kindly, and in a short time learned the use of it. At last the King shewed them a place just without their Hutches, to take their Repose in at conveniency.

The same Year, * 1.441 on the thirteenth of November, were fourteen more sent out; and the next Year, on the thirteenth of February, twelve of them re∣turn'd, the other having been kill'd by an Elephant. These having been above an hundred Miles in the Countrey, could find none of those People; but at last, by some other Negroes were inform'd, That the Namaqua's were withdrawn so far, that there was no likelihood to come near them that Year. By which means both the said Attempts became fruitless.

These Namaqua's are of a great and gigantick Stature, and numerous in Peo∣ple.

The Women are handsome-bodied, and well-shaped; but rather by Na∣ture than Art: * 1.442 for they are nothing curious in their Habits, all going dress'd in Skins of Beasts wrapp'd about their Bodies.

Their Ornaments are Glass Cambayan Beads, which they buy from the Portu∣guese about Monomotapa, Kortada, Bellugarins, &c. for Cattel.

The Men wear an Ivory Plate, made very artificially, before their Privacies,

and a round Hoop of the same on one Arm, besides many Copper Rings.

Every Namaqua hath always a small handsom Stool, made of Wood and Ropes, hanging upon his Arm, which he carries every where along with him, to sit upon.

The Government consists in a Single Person, the present nam'd Akambia, * 1.443 whose three Sons are of an extraordinary Stature.

BRYGOUDA'S.

SOmewhat farther into the Countrey dwell another People call'd Brygouda's, * 1.444 of whom little can be said, in regard few (if any) Europeans ever convers'd with them: Onely the Namaqua's report them very populous, rich, * 1.445 and full of Cattel, beyond all that live about the Cape of Good Hope.

HEUSAQUA'S.

THe Heusaqua's lie North-West-ward from the Great Cape; * 1.446 but so far distant, that little knowledge hath been gained of them, and that from bare report, none having ever seen their Countrey, or been among them; the best Intelligence hath been drawn from the Mouths of three of themselves, that came to the Fort of Good Hope, with the Governor Chainou∣qua's, to sell some Cattel, and returned with all convenient speed.

These Heusaqua's onely maintain themselves with Planting (for the rest of the Hottentots neither Sowe nor Plant) of a powerful Root, * 1.447 which they call Dacha; sometimes eating it, otherwhiles mingling it with Water to drink; ei∣ther of which ways taken, causeth Ebriety. When they become intoxicated therwith, they play many strange and antick Tricks, as if they were mad; in the middle of which the Women come and strew the dried and pulverized Herb Boggoa on their Heads, being of a yellow colour, and strong scent, and for that onely use fetch'd from the Mountains.

These People have great skill in the catching both old and young Lions in Snares, which they make tame, and lead with a Rope about their Necks like a Dog. Some of their Lions, which they have had along time, they frequent∣ly carry to the Wars, and by that means put their Enemies to flight without any resistance: A thing that seems very strange, yet most certainly used amongst them.

All the Places of Kafrarie, known by the People of Europe, generally lie at the Sea-coast, being principally Capes, Bays, and Havens; for Towns or Vil∣lages there are none, the Savage Inhabitants contenting themselves with the homely Covert of moveable Huts, after the manner of the wild Arabs.

This Countrey shoots very far into the South, * 1.448 shewing several Capes and Promontories; amongst which, the cheifest the Cape of Good Hope, or Cabo de Bona Esperanza, lieth in four and thirty Degrees and one and twenty Minutes South Latitude. When this Point was discover'd, and why so call'd, we have before related.

The next and most Southerly Point of Africa, the Portuguese call Cabo das An∣guilhas, * 1.449

the Needle-Cape, or the Head of the Needle, situate about twenty Dutch Miles Eastward from the Cape of Good Hope, in full thirty five Degrees South Latitude. It was so call'd by them from the Compass-Needle, which they observ'd to stand due South and North at this Point; but several late experienc'd Sea-men affirm it to vary five or six Degrees from the North, West-ward.

Here lieth a great Shelf of Sand, full of Fishes, which extends eighteen Miles into the Sea, beginning in the West by the Sweet River, and ending in the East at the Fish-Bay.

Between these Points, * 1.450 in the Height of four and thirty Degrees and a half, five or six Miles Eastward of the Hope, appears Cabo Falso, or False Cape; for Sailing out of India, and making this Cape in clear Weather, they mistook it for that of Good Hope, by reason of its near resemblance to the same; but coming nearer, they found their Error. This Cape may be known by three high Hills, near adjoyning to each other, whereof the two outermost are highest.

The Cape of Good Hope appears in the form of a hanging Island, with a small Isthmus between two Bays, joyn'd to the Main Land, and contains several high and craggy Mountains; of which, two more remarkable, the Table, and the Lion-Mountain.

The Table-Mountain, * 1.451 in Portuguese call'd Tavoa de Cabo, lieth about an hours Journey from the Shore, Southward of the Fresh and Salt River, and hath re∣ceived that name from its shape, because it is flat on the top like a Table.

At the Salt River they climb up this Mountain by a Cliff, in all other places not being ascendible, by reason of its great steepness; and that way, asks four or five hours Labor to gain the top: And this height makes it visible above ten Leagues to the Offin. Against ill Weather, two or three Hours before, 'tis so co∣ver'd with thick Mists and Clouds, that they cannot discover the top.

Close by Table-Mount, * 1.452 lie those towring Hills in a row, which the Portuguese call Os Picos Fragosos.

The Lion-Mountain, * 1.453 so call'd either from the abundance of Lions upon it, or because it appears out at Sea like a Lion, lieth somewhat more Westerly, and closer to the Sea than the Table: so that its Tail makes the Point at the end of the Bay. Between these two appears a pleasant Valley.

Near the Table riseth another, * 1.454 call'd Wind-Hill, because always troubled with rough Winds.

Beyond these, to the South, you come to a Valley over-grown with Bram∣bles, other Bushes, and Wood.

Further up into the Countrey are some standing-Waters, over-grown with Bulrushes, Canes, and Sedg-weeds, wherein breed many Wild-fowl, Geese, Duck, Teal, Snipes, and such like.

Along the Sea-coast several good Bays or Creeks open themselves, affording convenient Havens for Ships.

Eighteen Miles North-West from the Cape of Good Hope lieth Soldanha-Bay, * 1.455 where the Soldanhars have their chief Residence. Some would make the Coun∣trey lying at this Bay, an Island, contrary to the receiv'd Opinion of all Geo∣graphers; and to support their Fancy, aver, That it is divided from the Main Land of Africa by a deep Bay at the South-East side, and on the East side by a small River below Table-Mountain, and inhabited by five or fix hundred People.

The most eminent and fairest place is Table-Bay, * 1.456 having on the South-side the Conneys or Badgers-Island. It contains four Dutch Miles in compass; so that

[illustration]

CABO DE BONE ESPERANSE.

a whole Fleet of Ships may easily ride there, having under the Shore four Fa∣thom water and Sandy ground, and Land-lockt against all Storms and Tem∣pests, except onely the North-West Wind.

At Table-Bay, and the foot of the Table-Mountain, * 1.457 the Netherlanders have a Fort, for the defence and shelter of their Shipping in their Voyages; Built in a Quadrangular form; Fortifi'd with a great many Pieces of Ordnance, and a convenient Garrison of Souldiers, strong enough to repulse any Army of native Assailants: By which they have a Garden of fifteen Acres of ground, Planted with several Trees and Fruits, besides the Plantation on the other side of Table-Mountain, full as big again.

A Governor Commands this Fort, assisted by two Merchants, a Book-keep∣er, or Clerk, Accomptant, some Assistants, and a Serjeant over the Souldiers; all which are chief Men and Councellors.

Without this Fort, divers free people of several Nations have their residence, transported out of Holland; and maintain themselves chiefly by Tillage and Planting, but they pay for their Priviledge a part of their Harvest to the Go∣vernor for the Benefit and Advantage of the Company.

In the Latitude of four and thirty degrees, and forty minutes, Eastward of the Needle-Cape, lieth another Bay; first call'd Flesh-Bay, * 1.458 by reason of the abun∣dance of Cattel to be had there.

This Bay, wherein lyeth a small Island, standing open to all Winds, except on the North; and at the West-side runs a Brook of fresh Water from the Moun∣tain, yielding no small refreshment to Sea-men.

Eight or ten miles Eastward, you arrive at Fish-Bay, * 1.459 so nam'd from its abun∣dance of Fishing.

Fifteen or twenty miles Eastward hereof, in the elevation of four and thir∣ty degrees, and thirty minutes, you discover Muscle-Bay; so call'd by the Dutch, * 1.460 but by the Portuguese, Seno Formoso, that is, Faire-Bay.

Next Seno Formoso follow Seno del Lago, that is, The Bay of the Lake, * 1.461 because the Sea hath wash'd into the Shore in such a manner, that it seems to be a great Lake rather than a Bay, containing many Islands and Havens; and amongst others, Ilehos Ctaos.

Between these are three Capes plac'd in the Maps, viz. Cabo de Sante Fransisko, Cabo das Sorras, and Cabo do Aregito, and an Isle call'd, The Island of Content.

Somewhat higher Northerly, the River St. Christopher glides along; * 1.462 the Por∣tugnese call it, Rio de Sante Christian, and the Inhabitants Nagoa; in whose Mouth three Islands are seen.

Next this River appears a Tract of Land, by the Portuguese call'd Terra de Natal, that is, The Land of the Nativity of Christ; so call'd, from the day of its first discovery.

The Southermost Countrey of these parts, is water'd by three known, * 1.463 be∣sides many other unknown Rivers, viz. The Sweet, and Salt River, and Rio de Jak∣quelina.

Just about the foot of Lion-Mountain, flows the Sweet River, * 1.464 which takes its beginning out of the descent of Table-Mount, and runs down very swiftly through, not above knee-deep. Pigafet will have this River take its Original out of the Lake Gale, between the Mountains of the Moon on the West-side, and to fall into the Sea by False-Cape: whereas the common African Maps place there the River Kamissa.

To the East, beyond Terra de Natal, opposite to this little River, in the year Sixteen hundred forty and four, some few Dutchmen erected a Fort or Bulwark, with four Angles, for the defence of this fresh water, but they never finish∣ed it.

Half a mile Eastward runs the Salt-River; so call'd from its plenty of Salt, for on a great place of Sand, three or four miles upwards, by heat and drought so much fine and white Salt continually grows, that a Ship might soon be La∣den therewith.

Rio de Jackquelina hath its Original within the Countrey, and its Out-let about half a mile Eastward into Table-Bay.

As to the Air, quality of the Soyl, Plants, Beasts, Customs, Food, Cloath∣ing, Arms, Language, Religion and Worship, of this people in general; we cannot say much, that little we shall speak, will have onely relation to the Hot∣tentots, lying close to the Cape, as the Garouchouquas, Goringhuiquas, Goringhaiconas, Cochoquas, or Saldanhans, great and little Cariguriquas, and Hosaas; for of the rest, viz. the Vanouquas, Cabonas, Sonquas, Mamaquas, Heusaquas, Brigoudys, Hancumquas, hitherto little or no information hath been had, other than that in general they agree with those that lie nearest to the Cape.

The Air about the Cape of Good-Hope is always Serene, * 1.465 Clear, and Tempe∣rate, and by consequence very Healthy, because neither the Heat parches, nor the Cold pierces too much. In June and July, blow the stiffest and sharpest storms of Wind from the Southerly Points, which continue till December, mix'd with Mists, Snow and Frost; so that the waters in June and July are often Fro∣zen the thickness of the back of a Knife.

The Vale-Winds, * 1.466 or Hurricans, blow sometimes so terribly from the Moun∣tains, which are commonly cover'd with thick Clouds, which hover there, and break with that violence, as if all above ground would be rent to pieces. At this time, when the Winds bluster and tear so horribly, they make a hollow Sea at the Point, which too often proves dangerous for Ships.

It Rains there in the Winter, that is, in May or June, so extreamly, as if it did almost pour down, whereby the low grounds are laid under Water, yet with∣out any prejudice; for after the falling away of the Water, the ground appears more fresh and flourishing.

The Soyl about the Cape, is in some places very rich and ferile, fit to be Husbanded, and to produce all manner of Fruits; although other parts be full of Clay, Stony, Gravelly, or Sandy: some Trees grow here and there, but so hard and knotty, as makes them fit onely for Fuel: yet the natives report, that in the Countrey there grow such Trees, that a hundred men may shelter them∣selves under one of them; perhaps the Indian Fig-Tree, by Linschot call'd Ar∣bar de Rais.

There grow in the Winter, * 1.467 especially among the Saldanhars, certain little roots which they eat; some of them have a taste like Anniseeds, others like Je∣rusalem-Artichokes, others as Acorns.

The Valleys and Plains under, lie verdur'd with Grass and sweet Herbs, which being boyl'd with fresh Meat, make a pleasant Sallet.

Close by the Fort of Good-Hope, on a Mountain call'd, The Vineyard, the Ne∣therlanders have Planted forty thousand Vine-stocks, which all at this day send forth lusty Sprouts and Leaves, and bear Grapes in such abundance, that some∣times they press Wine of them: They have there also Peaches, Apricocks, Ches∣nuts, Olive-Trees, and such like Fruits.

[illustration]

There grow wild upon the Mountains, and in the Valleys, and on the banks of the Rivers, many other sorts of Plants; as among the rest a peculiar sort of Tulips, Sempervive, Fritillaria, or Speckled Lillies, Penny-Wort, or Dragon-Wort with sharp pointed Leaves, Sorrel with knotted Roots, and white Blossoms.

The Tulip bears a bole bigger than ones fist, having thick Shells, * 1.468 but of a faint smell. The Blossom that shoots out before the Leaves in April, of a very high red colour, appearing very gloriously, and hath five broad, long, and thick Leaves; within having whitish red Stripes, and at the end a round Stalk of a span long, streak'd and speckled with purple upon a white ground. It grows upon the Mountains.

The Sempervive or House-Leek, hath Leaves almost a finger thick, whitish green, and as big almost as the Palm of ones Hand.

The Fritillaria, or the speckled Narcissus, which some reckon as a sort of Denti∣laria, or Eminie; hath in stead of Leaves, Sprouts of a fingers length, thick and juicy, with sharp and round broken edges like Teeth, of a pale purple above, and underneath green: At the Leaves comes a flower that hath five limber Leaves, sharp at the ends, with a high Crown or Tuft in the middle, hollow within, inclosing another flower, which hath also five Leaves, all yellow, but of a dark-brown at the ends, with some very red standards in the middle: this Plant hath no smell, and grows upon barren and Sandy Mountains.

The Sorrel with knotted Roots, shoots up a span in height, hath hard, pale green Leaves, long and slender, which stand aloft on the Stalk five or six toge∣ther, for below the Stalk is void of Leaves.

In the very Sea it self, about the Cape may be seen several Plants, viz. * 1.469 a Fort of Canes; by the Portuguese call'd Tromba's, which grow with Moss, being large and thick, in the fashion of a Cornet; some such (but longer) are found on the Cape, and the Island of Tristan de Cunba; from whence Linschot saith it flotes along, driven by the Wind thence to the West side of the Cape, near the Shore,

upon sight whereof, the Sea-men infallibly know they are near this Coast.

Also Sargossa, a kind of a Lentil, drives along, being an Herb like Sedge, or Wild-Cresses; which are to be seen an hundred miles far and wide in the Ethio∣pian Sea, driven upon heaps.

They have also Coral, Tortoise-shells, Pearls, and in the Salt-River pure white Salt.

About Cabo das Aiguilhas, or Needle-Cape, are Sharks-bones found, which the Goldsmiths use; although some are of opinion they came from the Sea-Cat or Bleach, with which that Sea abounds.

In the particular relations of this Countrey, * 1.470 we told you they had great store of Cattel; We will now onely add, That the Oxen are very fair, fleshy, and thick, and some near half a foot higher than those among us; with very fine, slender, and long crook'd Horns: Others have their Horns flat and hang∣ing down loose by their bodies.

They have infinite flocks of Sheep, very large, with long Legs, and Hair in stead of Wool; their tails are nothing but fat, and some of them so heavy, that they have weigh'd eighteen or twenty pounds and more.

The Woods, Valleys, and plain low Gronds, feed many wild Beasts; as Stags or Harts, Roe-Hindes, and wild Cows, who run together by sixty, seven∣ty, yea a hundred in a Head. Badgers, of a red colour, but so slow in running, that a man may easily outstrip them, yet their flesh is accounted a pleasant food. Wild-Bears, Wild-Goats, Hares, Conies, Ringstreak'd Tygers, a fierce and dan∣gerous Beast, Leopards, Wolves, Rhinocerots, and Elephants.

On the tops of the Mountains, keep multitudes of fierce Lions, which in dark Moons come out of their hideous Dens of shelter, and seek their prey close un∣der the Fort; and therefore they always about the Inclosure (where the Cattel are kept in by night) kindle great fires to scare them away.

There are found great Beasts like Elephants, with two Horns at their No∣ses, such as the Rhinocerots hath one. It ordinarily goes swifter than a man, in its speediest course, hath a skin with short Mouse-dun hair, a tail and feet like an Elephant, streight and round ears, and a short bunch of black hair, in stead of a Mane on the Neck.

Here have been seen many Jack-alls, being a creature that by his quick scent discovers prey for the Lion, and is both his Guard and Spie.

The Ocean also produces many Creatures, as Sea-Rabbits, Sea-Dogs, Sea-Wolves, or Sea-Bears, who in the Summer swim in the Sea, but in the Winter remain under ground, and keep on Shore, and in the Cliffs.

The Sea-Wolves, or rather Sea-Bears, because with their paws and gestures more resemble Bears than Wolves, onely they have sharper Snouts, and are a fiercer Creature, biting cruelly; they exceed men for the most part in swift∣ness of running, so without two or three they are not to be taken.

On the Shore of the Rivers, are many Sea-Horses, Porcupisses, or Sea-Hogs, and Sea-Cats.

Many sorts of small and great Fowls are found here; * 1.471 as Partridges, Ducks, Sparrows, Geese, Wild-Ducks, Parrets will yellow Bills, More-hens, Wagtails, Gulls, Teal, Wood-Snipes and Water-Snipes, and Cormorants, being a black sort of Fowl, as big and as large as Ducks or Geese.

Here also breed the Pinguyns, * 1.472 with small thick Feathers, more like Bristles or Beasts Hair than Plumes; in stead of Wings they have a Leather Finn on each Foot, wherewith they swim; they have very tough Skins, are cruel in

biting, ready in diving, and keep as well in the Sea as at Land. They harbor in the Sedges, lie in a Burrow scraped out hollow, and lay their Eggs in the Sand, to the number of four or five, bigger than Goose-Eggs, and with a white Shell. They have so slow a pace that we easily catch them, or follow them to their Nests, which they defend with biting, and are not to be forced thence without Staves. Their Flesh is Oylie, and not good to eat, except they be two or three times boyl'd in fresh Water, and then fry'd in a Pan with Butter or Suet.

There are also Moor-Cocks, Marsh-Fowl, with red Bills and Legs, wild Peacocks, white Shovelers, as big as a Hen, with a Neck in two or three Joynts, Herons of three sorts, viz. blue ones, white ones, of a middle size, and black, as big as Sea-pies, which keep most in Moorish places; Cranes, several kinds of Hawks, Peacocks, Pheasants, Partridges, Ravens, Crows and Ostriches.

The Bird Flemengos increases here numerously; in bigness like a Goose, * 1.473 with long and red Legs, Bills, and Wings; the other parts have all white Feathers.

Also white Lapwings, which flie so boldly, that they will come to the Muzzle of a Gun.

The Fowls which come from Land and frequent the Sea, are of divers sorts, as the Antenagas, great speckled Fowls, which many times sit upon the dry places within the Water about the Needle-Cape.

Alcatraces, a gray Fowl, almost like a Lapwing.

Pheasants, little bigger than Swallows, white-feather'd, with gray or black Specks, ringstreaked, and speckled in their Bodies, and therefore easie to be known from the other.

The Gavoitoyns, or Dyvers, which sit in the Water about the Cape.

Garagias, almost the same with the Alcatraces.

Jan-van-Genten, or white Plovers, tipt with black at the end of their Wings.

Another sort of great Fowls, call'd in Portuguese, Mangas de Velludo, or Velvet-Parrots, have black Tufts like Velvet on their Wings, and in flying hold them not steady, but flutter as Pigeons.

As the Air is thus replenished with good Fowl, no less doth the Sea, * 1.474 and other Waters abound with the variety of Fish, particularly one sort call'd Huygen, in shape like Carps, being of a very pleasant taste.

Rough Mullets, Lobsters, Breams, and Crabs, of a large size.

Mussles also among the Rocks, and great and small Oysters with Pearls in them.

In Table-Bay, and thereabouts, play many Whales, and other great Fishes.

Bottle-heads, out of which may be boyl'd Train-Oyl as well as out of Whales.

The People which dwell about, and near the Cape of Good Hope, * 1.475 are of a mid∣dle Stature, Slouch-body'd, and uncomely of Person; of a Tawny colour, like Mulletto's: But those about Flesh-Bay are somewhat smaller. The Hair of their Heads in general resembles Lambs Wool, short and Curl'd, but the Womens thicker than the Mens, especially among the Cobona's. They have broad Fore∣heads, but wrinkled, clear and black Eyes, but all, both Men, Women, and Children, have Camosie-Noses, and blab-Lips. Their Mouthes well fashion'd, and bearing a proportionable bigness every way, with very clean and white Teeth. Their Necks are of an ordinary length, with narrow Shoulders, and long Arms, but about the Wrists very thin, their Hands well shaped, their

Fingers long, letting their Nails grow like Eagles Talons, which they count an Ornament. Most of them have their Bellies long and wrinkled, with But∣tocks sticking out. Their Legs handsom, but small Calves, little Feet, especi∣ally the Women. They are swift of Foot, and so strong, that some can stop an Ox in his full course.

The Women are little of Stature, especially among the Cochoqua's, or Saldan∣hars: and some cut their Faces, as if they were drawn with a Pencil. The Married Women are so great Breasted, that they can give them into the Mouthes of their Children to Suck behind over their Shouldets, where they commonly carry them.

All the Kaffers are void of Literature, * 1.476 stupidly dull and clownish, and in understanding are more like Beasts than Men: but some by continual con∣verse with European Merchants, shew a few sparks or glimmerings of an incli∣nation to more humanity.

Notwithstanding this their bruitish ignorance, they observe the Laws and Customs of the Countrey with as much seriousness and observance, as the most orderly People in Europe; as a proof whereof you may take this Instance: In the Year Sixteen hundred fifty nine, when the Cape-men happen'd to be at ods and controversie with the Netherlanders, being asked what cause they had for that Quarrel; gave for answer, that it was onely in return of the wrong done them by the Netherlanders, in taking away their Seed and Lands, as before we have more fully related.

In kindness and fidelity towards their Neighbors, * 1.477 they shame the Dutch, and all other Europeans, because whatsoever one hath, they willingly and readi∣ly impart it to others, be it little or much.

Sometimes by eating the Root Dacha, mixed with Water, they become Drunk, and then go about, not knowing what they do; others constrain'd by poverty, seek here and there to take what they can find from any body; but if it happen to come to light, their Skin must pay dear for it.

There appears also among them some sparks of Pride: for when they come to the Fort of Good Hope, they cast on their filthiest, greaziest, and most stinking Skins, and adorn their Ears and Necks with red and yellow Copper Beads, supposing themselves exceeding pompously dressed.

Notwithstanding the meanness and poverty of their Condition, yet they bear a high mind, and are ambitious; they will rather fall to open enmity, than * 1.478 bow or give any reverence to each other; and he that gets the Victory, doth not onely play the Lord for that one time, but always vaunts and braves it over his vanquished Enemy.

Their Clothing is very sordid, * 1.479 and vile, most of the Men wearing onely a Sheeps Pelt, or Badgers Skin, in manner of a Mantle about their Shoulders, with the hairy side commonly within, and ty'd under their Chin.

Such a Mantle consists of three Pieces, neatly sew'd together with Sinews of Beasts in stead of Threed. When they go abroad, or upon a Journey, they throw another Sheeps-skin, with the Wool on the out-side, over the under∣most. Upon their Heads they wear a Cap of Lamb-skin, with the Woolly side inward, and a Button on the top.

Their Shoes are made of a Rhinocerot's Skin, and consists of a whole flat Piece, before and behind of a like heighth, with a Cross of two Leather∣bands fasten'd to their Feet. Before their Privacies hangs a little piece of a wild Wood-Cat, or ring-streaked Tyger, or Jack-alls Skin, ty'd behind with two Thongs.

[illustration]

DRACHT en WAPENING der HOTTENTOTS.

The Habit of the Women differs little from the former, * 1.480 being a Sheep-skin Mantle on the upper part of their Bodies, with the Wool inwards; but some∣what longer than the Men; also another Skin hanging behind to cover their back-parts, and a square Piece before their Privacies.

On their Heads they wear a high Cap of a Sheeps, or Badgers Skin, bound to their Heads with a broad Fillet: In all the rest following the Mens Garb.

No less uncomely are their choycest Ornaments, for the Men have their Hair dressed up, or adorn'd with Copper-plates, white little Horns, and great Beads. They pull all the Hair out of their Chins, and daub their Faces with Black, and then anoint them with Grease and Tallow, and thereby seem as if they never were washed.

Those which dwell close by the Cape on the Shore, and come to the Nether∣landers Ships, presently run to the Cook's Kettle, or Pottage-pot, and anoint themselves with the Soot thereof, which they esteem a Princely Ornament.

Such as are rich, and have good stocks of Cattel, liquor the out-side of their Mantles and Caps with Grease; whereas the Poor wear them starved and un∣liquor'd. Also most of the Princes and Kings, and Kings Daughters, parti∣cularly the King of Cocoquas, his Vice-Roy, and Daughter Mamis, wear fat be∣smear'd Skins. In their Ears they hang great bunches of Beads, of which some contain ten or eleven Strings, each weighing near a quarter of a Pound. A∣bout their Necks they put red and yellow Copper Chains, or Bracelets of Beads, and upon their Arms Ivory Armlets, and forwards near the Wrists, Bracelets of Copper, which stick so close, that it makes their Arms sore, and sometimes come to ulcerate before they will lay them off.

Many of them wear as an Ornament, the Guts of Beasts, fresh and stink∣ing, drawn two or three times one through another, about their Necks, and the like about their Legs.

Some wear a sort of Roots gather'd from the bottoms of Rivers, which in their Journeys through Woods, where Lyons, Leopards, and Wolves fre∣quent, by the Fire side (which they kindle at the Place where they stay all night, for the driving away wild Beasts) they chew into little bits, and spit out of their Mouthes round about, with firm perswasion, that there is such vertue in them, as no Beast can endure the smell of it.

When they go abroad they have usually an Ostrich Feather, or a Staff, with a wild Cats Tail ty'd to it, in one Hand, in stead of a Handkerchief to wipe their Eyes and Noses, and beat away the Dust, Sand, and Flies, and in the other Hand a sleight Javelin.

The Women never go abroad without a Leather Sack at their backs, ha∣ving at each end a Tuft or Tassel, and fill'd with one trifle or another.

Their Weapons, or Arms, are Bowes and Arrows, and small Darts, three, four, or five Foot long, having at one end a broad sharp Iron fixed, which they handle and throw very dexterously.

Their Food consists generally of onely a sort of round Roots, * 1.481 of the bigness of Turnips, digg'd out of the Rivers and other places, and then boyl'd or roast∣ed to eat. They kill no great Cattel, but such as either by sickness, lameness, or age, are unfit to follow the Herd; nor any Sheep, except at a Wedding. They are utterly ignorant in all sorts of Cookery, and therefore fall upon dead Cattel like Dogs, eating it with Guts and Intrails, the Dung onely thrust out; and when they can find no defunct Beast, they look out dead Fish on the Shore;

[illustration]

as also Snails, Catterpillars, and Mussles. They find great relish in the Flesh of Sea-Dogs, or Badgers, which they kill in the Night, coming by thousands on Shore, with Sticks, and either raw, or half cold, and unwashed, they broyl in the Fire, and eat; not forbearing the most noysom Grease of Whales and other Draff cast on Shore. Train-Oyl, and Grease of a Stranded Whale at the Salt-River, broyl'd out by the Sun, they sup up by whole handfuls, and cut Collops out of the Flesh, which they bury under the Sand to eat after∣wards. Some time they tear pieces of their dry'd hard Sheeps-skin Mantles or Cloaks, with their Teeth, and eat it.

They take great delight in our Bread, for which they are willing to barter Cattel. The Honey found in the Woods they eat up Wax an all; and in stead of Physick administer to the Sick, Cabbages, Coleworts, and Mustard-Leaves, with a little beaten Lard boyl'd with it.

Their common Drink is Water, * 1.482 or Mille; but they are very greedy of Bran∣dy or Spanish Wine, as also of Tobacco, but quickly become Drunk with it.

They use no Trades, Handicrafts, or Arts; with Bulrushes make Mats, wherewith they cover their Houses; they Forge the sharp Heads of their Lan∣ces being Iron; in the doing whereof they use onely a Stone and Hammer, making it malleable with Wood-Coals.

The Goringhaica's dwelling by the Cape, * 1.483 employ themselves in Fishing, which they sell to the Netherlanders for Bread and Tobacco. Most of the other have no skill therein, nor any Vessels to go out to Sea, so that in all Journeys they go by Land, and on Foot. In stead of Horses they have great Oxen, who carry their Goods and Commodities from one place to another, which they lead and guide with a Stick thrust through their Noses, as with a Bridle.

The Cochoqua's, or Saldanhars, are a kind of Herdsmen, and live by keeping of Cattel, whereof they have above an hundred thousand Head, all very fair, be∣sides as many Sheep. The like do the Cariguriqua's and Hosaa's: None amongst them all Sowe, or Plant, but onely the Heusaqua's. When they perceive any

wild Beasts in the Night, whether Elephants, Elans, Rhinocerots, Lyons, Ty∣gers, Bucks, or Horses, then all the stoutest Men run forth, and make a great noise to fright them away. But if by day any devouring wild Beast appear, then all that can carry Arms go forth, every one provided with two or three Assagays, or Lances, and encompassing the same with extraordinary outcries and shoutings, they let fly their Darts, and Shoot, as at a Mark to wound and kill him.

When a person falls in Love with a Maid, he desires of his Father, * 1.484 that he may Marry her, who consenting, he goes to the Father and Mother of the Maid, entreating the same: and when the Parents grant his Suit, the Daughter receives, and as a sign of her acceptance, and in confirmation of the Marriage, she puts about his Neck, not a Gold Chain, but a fat Cows Chitterling, which he must wear till it drop off. Then two of the fattest Sheep are sought out of the whole Flock, and kill'd, part of whose Flesh being boyl'd, and part of it roasted, none may eat but the Marry'd couple and their Parents; and with∣out this Ceremony the Marriage would not be accounted lawful. The Skins cut in small pieces, and the Hair taken off, then beaten upon a Stone, and so laid on hot Coals, they eat with a very great appetite. This pitiful Feast end∣ed, the solemnity of the Wedding is over.

As to their constancy in Love, they are as in other places, some quickly nauseating the ties of Marriage, while others observe it with a most affectio∣nate strictness. For the manifesting of the constancy and true Love amongst some of these Salvages, we will give you two remarkable Stories, the one of a Widow, which through excess of grief and sorrow for the death of her Hus∣band, leapt into a Pit full of Wood, set it on fire, and burnt her self to death: the other of a young Maid, which for grief threw her self down from a Rock, because her Parents had caus'd her Lover to be severely whipt with Thorns, for Lying with her against their consents.

Whether by the goodness of the Air, or the natural strength of their Consti∣tutions, these People attain so great an age, as generally they do, remains a doubt; but this is certain, that most of them live to eighty, ninety, or a hun∣dred, and some to a hundred and ten, twenty, or more years.

They bury their Dead sitting in a deep Pit stark naked, * 1.485 throwing the Earth upon their Heads with a great heap of Stones over all, to preserve the Corps from being raked out of the Grave by wild Beasts.

When a Man or Woman dies, * 1.486 all the Friends to the third degree of Consan∣guinity, must by an antient custom cut off the little Finger of their left Hand, to be bury'd with the Dead in the Grave; but if the Deceased had in his Life any Cattel, and leaves some Relations to whom they might come by Inheri∣tance, they must cut off a Joynt from each little Finger before they can take the Cattel: for the Sick cannot giveaway the least thing on his Death-bed, from those to whom it falls by Inheritance.

As soon as any one falls sick, those about him fetch one skill'd in Herbs, who with a sharp two-edged Knife lets them blood on their Back, then burns them on their Arms, with a red hot Iron, and drops thereon some Juyce of Herbs, with new boyl'd sweet Milk: And if this work not a Cure, they give them over for Dead.

Those which rob in the Day, if they be catcht in it, are beaten by the King, or Choeque himself with a Stick, without other punishment; but those which Rob in the Night, receive upon discovery a more severe punishment

in this manner inflicted. The Offender is first for a whole day tied Hand and Foot, being neither allowed Meat or Drink: On the second day some of the Eldest go to the Coehque, to ask if they shall proceed in the Execution, which is done without any Condemnation or Tryal, but not without sufficient Te∣stimony; whereupon the King, with a great Train of People following him, comes to a Tree, where he commands the Offender to be brought before him, whom they bind to the Tree, and very severely whip all over his Body, that the Blood runs down to his Feet. After this, being turned with his Face to∣wards the King, a sort of Gum, or Rozin, melted in a Pot, is poured over his naked Body, from his Neck running down upon his Breast, so that the Skin immediately peels off; then they let him loose, and give him some Meat, wherewith a little refresh'd, they tie him again Neck and Heels, and so leave him three days: And lastly, after the enduring all this pain, he is sometimes banish'd, and thrust from their Society.

When any are found in Fornication, * 1.487 the Parents force them to Marry imme∣diately, if they have a competency of Estate: But if that cannot be effected, then they wait to know if the Woman be with Child; and then they enforce a Conjunction, though the Person be so mean that he cannot maintain a Wife.

When any Person, Rich or Poor, is discover'd to have committed Incest, they believe such People cannot be punished enough, because they say it is an unpardonable offence; and this from the meer Light of Nature: And there∣fore they punish the Transgressors with death; the manner this.

First of all the Man hath his Hands and his Feet drawn together with a Cord, * 1.488 and so put into a Tub till the next day, and the Woman set by it. The second day they take him out, and so Manacled set him under a Tree, fastning his Head to a strong Bough, which one pulls and holds down; then they cut off one Member after another: Afterwards they let the Bough spring up again, with the mangled Body upon it, for a Spectacle to other Evil-doers.

The Man thus dead, they bring forth the Woman, whom bound round about with many dry Shrub-Bavins, her Hands and Feet tied fast together, they set Fire to the Bushes, and so burn her to Ashes.

A little above five years ago it hapned that a certain Person, a great Friend and Acquaintance of the Coehques, or King of the Saldanhars, committed Incest; yet for all that, without respect to his Person, he did Justice upon him.

If any Man of Wealth and Quality, * 1.489 or reputed Wise, through fury or rage stab or wound another to death, they take him and beat his Brains out against a Tree, and put him into the Grave with the murdered Person; for they say, Such a Person being endued with more Understanding, ought to know better, and to give a good Example to others: Whereas on the other side, poor sim∣ple People are permitted to ransom their Lives by a Payment of Cattel. Some, for Offences which deserve Death, have their Knees nail'd through, and an Iron Pin fast driven into each Shoulder, so dying a lingring death.

They live like the Arabians, * 1.490 in the Fields, in Huts made of slender crooked Poles, set round and cover'd with Bulrush-Mats: Some of these are so large, that conveniently ten or twenty Men, with Women and Children, may dwell in one of them; though others are much less, and some so small, that they can take them up, and run away with them. The Fire-place lieth in the midst of the House; but they make no Funnels to carry up the Smoke.

They kindle Fire with an excellent dexterity, by rubbing one little hollow∣ed Stick upon another very hard for a great space.

All these Hottentots speak one and the same Language, * 1.491 which for the diffi∣culty of the pronunciation cannot be learn'd, to the great retarding and hin∣derance of further Discoveries. In all Discourse they cluck like a Broody Hen, seeming to cackle at every other Word: So that their Mouths are almost like a Rattle or Clapper, smacking, and making a great noise with their Tongues.

Some words they know not how to utter, but with very much ado, and they seem as if they fetch'd it out behind, at the bottom of their Throats, and as the People in Savoy that live near the Alps, who by drinking Snow-water have great Crops or Swellings under their Chins. Brokwa in their Language sig∣nifies Bread, Kahou denotes to sit down, Bou is an Ox, Ba, a Sheep, and Kori, Iron: But now many of them which dwell close to the Fort of Good Hope, by daily Converse with the Netherlanders, speak Dutch; as some who have been with the English in Bantam, stammer some broken English.

They have no inclination to Trading, * 1.492 neither hold they any Correspon∣dence with Foreign People. iron and Copper were the onely Commodi∣ties desired by them; the former for Arms, the other for Ornament; both which they so esteemed, that in a Voyage to the Indies, in the year Fifteen hun∣dred ninety five, the Dutch had in Barter with these People, for a Cutting-knife, a fair Ox; for a Bar of Iron of seventy pounds, broken into five pieces, two Oxen and three Sheep; for one Hook-knife, one Bill, one Ax, one short Iron Bolt, and some pieces of Iron, three Oxen and five Sheep; and for a Knife, one Sheep. But at this day, grown wiser by Converse, and the abundance of Commodities carried thither, they prize their Cattel at a much higher rate, and their former fair dealing is not now found amongst them.

Tobacco, Brandy, and Copper, they chiefly desire at present; but the yel∣lower the better: So that for four pieces of Copper, as big as the Palm of ones Hand, and a piece of Tobacco, they usually buy two Cows.

Some of these People have Elective, others Successive Kings or Governors; * 1.493 but all their Powers not able to make above four or five thousand Men, and those living dispersedly in several Plantations, far distant from each other.

Religion is an absolute stranger among all these Salvages, * 1.494 insomuch that they never worshipped either God or Devil; yet they say and believe there is a Divine Power, which they call Humma, which causeth Rain, Winds, Heat, and Cold; but will not worship him, because he sends sometimes too much Heat and Drowth, and another time an overflux of Rain, contrary to their desires.

Secondly, They imagine, that they can stop the Rain, and allay the Wind at their pleasure. First, To cause Rain to cease, they lay a small Cole of Fire on a Chip, in a little Hole digged in the Ground; and upon that Hole they lay a Lock of Hair pull'd from their Heads, and cover up the Hole with Sand; when the Hair begins to stink, then they make Water upon it, and so run away shrieking. To lay the Winds, they hold one of the greasiest Skins upon a long Stick aloft in the Air, till the Wind has blown down the Skin; and then vainly think the power of the Wind smothered thereby.

When the New Moon begins first to be discerned, they commonly in great Companies turn themselves towards it, and spend the whole night in great joy, with Dancing, Singing, and Clapping of Hands.

They have a Musical Instrument, made with a String like a Bowe, and a split Quill at the end, which being blowed yields a low sound.

Conney and Badger-Islands.

NOrthward of the Great Cape lie three Islands in the Sea, viz. Conneys, Bad∣gers, and Fransh Island. The Conneys Island, so called from the many Rabbits breeding in the Cliffs, and on the Shore, lieth before the Mouth of Table-Bay, a League or thereabouts from the Land, five Miles South∣ward from Badger-Isle: It contains a Mile and a half in compass, but more over-grown with Bushes than the Badger, which receiv'd its name from the abundance of Rock-Badgers there found.

Neither of these have any fresh Water; * 1.495 and although the Ground be sandy and full of Bushes, yet they bear many good Herbs and Flowers, and abound with Cattel.

The Conneys were first brought thither by the Dutch, in the year One thou∣sand six hundred and one. The Sheep, carried thither first by the English, grow extraordinary fat, and increase exceedingly; so that some have been found whose Tails were five and twenty Inches thick, and nineteen pound in weight, with four and thirty pound of Swet about the Kidneys, besides the Fat that came from their Flesh; but the Meat gives no satisfaction in the eating, by reason of the exceeding fatness.

There are many Pinguins, and thousands of Meuwen; and yet for all this plenty, they both lie desolate, and not inhabited.

A little Northerly lies the Fransh-Island, equal in all things to the afore∣mention'd, and as them, without Inhabitants.

THE EMPIRE OF MONOMOTAPA.

THis Empire, * 1.496 by Joseph Barras call'd Benomotapa, and by Sanutus, Benomo∣taxa, lies up within the Countrey, before the Kingdom of Sofale, near the Sea, inclosed between Rio de Spirito Sancto, or Magnice, and the great River Quama; both which by some are taken for two Branches of Zambere.

It spreads Southerly towards the Cape de Bona Esperanza, * 1.497 having in the North for Borders the Kingdom of Monimuge, or Nimeamae, and the River Quama; in the East, the Sea-coast of Sofala; in the West and South, the River Magnice, and the neighboring Mountains. * 1.498 Cluverius conterminates it in the East, South, and West, with the great Ocean; in the North, with Congo, the Abyssines, and Zan∣guibar.

Its Length, * 1.499 between the Lake Ro and the Ethiopick Sea, together with the Mountains of the Moon, Cluverius reckons to be four hundred Dutch Miles; and

the Breadth, between the Head-Fountains of Nilus, and the Cape of Good Hope, three hundred Dutch Miles: For all the little Kingdoms, from the River Mag∣nice to the Cape of Good Hope, are said to acknowledge the Prince of Monomotapa for their Supreme Lord. But the whole Compass of this Countrey is account∣ed by many but seven hundred and thirty five French Miles.

The Imperial and Royal Court, being the Chief City, is call'd Banamatapa; * 1.500 although by Vincent le Blank, Madrogam, lying six days Journey from a great House call'd Simbaoe, or Zimbaoch, and five Miles from Safale, towards the West.

The Houses have almost sharp Roofs, very large, built of Wood or Earth, * 1.501 very finely, and whited without and within.

The Palace of the Emperor carries a vast extent, * 1.502 having four Eminent Gates, and very many large Chambers, and other convenient Apartments, guarded round about with Watch-Towers, and within hung with Cotton Hangings of divers Colours, wrought with Gold, and richly Embossed; as also overlaid with Tin gilt, or, as others say, cover'd over with Plates of Gold, and adorn'd with Ivory Candlesticks, fastned with Silver Chains: The Chairs gilt and painted with several Colours: The four chiefest Gates of the Court richly Embossed, and well defended by the Life-Guards of the Emperor, whom they call Sequender.

The Emperor keeps a great Train of Servants, who all attend in good or∣der, bowing of the Knee when they speak to him. His Meat is serv'd up to his Table in Pourcelane, round beset with Gold Branches.

Other Principal Cities are Zimbas, a Mile and half from Sofale; Tete, where the Portuguese Jesuits have their Residence; Sena, &c.

Certain War-like Women, like the ancient Amazons, * 1.503 do possess a peculiar Territory, appointed for them by the King; although Sanutus appropriates to them a particular Kingdom upon the Borders of Damout and Gorage, more to∣wards the South.

Not far from Monomotapa is the Province of Chitambo, * 1.504 wherein stands the City Tamburo.

This Kingdom hath the benefit of a temperate Air, * 1.505 and enrich'd with luxu∣rious Valleys, which, though not Inhabited in all Places, affords Provision of Cattel, and Fruits sufficient to store both themselves and Neighbours; nor is it destitute of pleasant Woods, stor'd with variety of Fruit-Trees, * 1.506 and in some places abundance of Sugar-Canes, that grow without Planting, to the increase whereof, the Rivers and Brooks that besprinkle the Countrey do not a little help.

The greatest Wealth of the Countrey consists in Oxen and Cowes, * 1.507 with them more highly esteem'd than Gold or Silver. They have no Horses, nor other Beasts for Carriage besides Elephants, which flock together by whole Herds in the Woods. They shew a Beast call'd Alsinge, resembling a Stag or Hart; and Ostriches as big as Oxen. There grows upon Trees call'd Koskoma a Fruit of a Violet Colour, and sweet in taste; of which whoever eats plen∣tifully, it purges them so violently, that a Bloody-Flux, and at length Death follows upon it.

Here are found several Gold Mines in the Bowels of the Earth, * 1.508 and also in some of their Rivers, for which the Inhabitants dive in the Stream, and take it up with the bottom from the Mud, and so pick it out; which Gold-diving they also practice in divers great Lakes, spread far and near in this Kingdom;

for which cause the King of Monomotapa is not without reason call'd by the Por∣tuguese, The Golden King.

All the Inhabitants have short and black curl'd Hair, * 1.509 and, as Linschot saith, are of a middle Stature; though Pigafet makes them a kind of Giants. They are well set, of a sound Body, of Complexion black, very apprehensive and quick of Understanding, much addicted to War, and apt to make Insur∣rections upon any trivial cause.

Their usual Food is salt Beef, Milk, and a little Verjuyce, and Oyl of Sesa∣mos; Their Bread made of Rice, Mille, or of the Root Ignamees, which they boyl in Basons; The Drink of the Common People, Milk; but of the King, and the Grandees, Wine of Honey, or Meath, which they preserve in Ox∣horns; or Wine of Palm, made delicious with Manna, Amber, and Musk.

The King bestows every day in Perfumes two pound of Gold, which cer∣tain Merchants furnish him with: For the Torches and Lights which he uses are mix'd with sweet Odours, which he causes to be born before him in the night, being set in a richly Embroider'd Pavilion, carry'd by four Noble-men, follow'd by a great Train, and cover'd over with a Canopy, in manner of an Umbrella, set with Precious Stones.

The King never gives Audience to any Man when he Travels, or is ready to take a Journey; neither goes he out of his Palace, but upon some well-order'd Beast, an Elephant, or the before-mention'd Alsinge.

The King may not Clothe himself but according to the manner of his Ancestors, * 1.510 in a long Cloak, made in that Countrey; for he weareth no Foreign Garment, for fear of Poyson; and upon that, a long and great Cloth, in form of a Coat or Womans Gown, which comes to his Knees, and from thence to his Middle button'd up, with a costly Knot upon his Shoulder. He wears usu∣ally at his Girdle a Spade with an Ivory Handle, and in his Hand two Arrows; intending by the Spade to give his Subjects to understand, That in time of Peace they ought to be diligent in Tilling the Land; by one of the Arrows, That he hath power to punish Evil-doers; and by the other, that he must of∣fend his Enemies.

The Inhabitants go naked from their Necks to their Girdle; * 1.511 but from thence down to their Feet they have Garments of Cloth of divers Colours, and of Wild Beasts Skins, and their Privacies hidden in small Purses. The Emi∣nentest Persons wear a Skin with a Tail behind them hanging down to the Ground: But Sanutus saith, Their Apparel is made of Cotton Cloth, or great Indian Stuffs wrought through with Gold Wyre.

The Women go naked as long as they are unmarried, only wearing a small Cotton Cloth before; but as soon as they are married, and have Children, they cover their Breasts and Bodies with Cotton Clothes.

Every one may have as many Women as he can maintain; but the first is accounted the Head of the Family, and all the rest are at her service; and her Children, after the Fathers death, inherit all the Estate.

The Women are here in so much esteem, that the Kings Sons, if they meet a Woman on the way, must step aside.

The Houses are built of Wood like Tents, and cover'd with Straw for a Defence from the Rain; but the Richer, and Persons of Quality, have them somewhat more handsom and convenient.

The Inhabitants so honor their Dead, * 1.512 that if one of their Friends, or a Wo∣man that leaves Children, * 1.513 dies, after the rotting of the Flesh, they preserve the

Bones, and mark them for distinction from others, in an open Court, whither they come every seventh day cloth'd in white Apparel, and set boyl'd Flesh and Bread on a Table cover'd with a Cloth; then having pray'd to them for the Wellfare of their King, they eat up the Meat.

The People are charged neither with Taxes or other Payments to the King; * 1.514 but when they desire to have Audience from him, they carry a Present with them, by reason it is contrary to the Custom of the Place, that an Inferior should speak to a Superior without bringing a Present, for a sign of Obedience and Honor: And all the Persons of Quality are bound to serve the King se∣ven days in thirty.

The Merchants that Trade there must also give some Presents to the King, for the neglect whereof they incur his Displeasure.

The Wealth of this Countrey consists in Gold found in Mines and Rivers; * 1.515 which though little valu'd, yet they narrowly search for, because they find it necessary for the Purchase of Outlandish Merchandizes. This thirst of Gold hath made the Portuguese so industrious in their Quests, that they possess some Mines thereof in a Tract of Land above sixty Miles from Monomotapa.

Their Arms are Bowes, Arrows, Ponyards, and Hangers, or Scymitars. * 1.516

The Emperor keeps continually a strong Army, consisting all of Foot, for they have no Horse; besides a stout Party of Valiant Amazonian Women, which March and Fight as well as the Men, burning off their left Breasts, that they may shoot with the more readiness and ease. They carry the same Arms with the Men, and shoot backwards or behind them when they fly; but when they observe the following Enemy to Retreat and draw off, they suddenly face about, and fall upon them, committing great Slaughter.

None washes their Hands or Face during the Wars: Every one carries his own ordinary Provisions; but the King provides Sheep and Oxen. They cut off the Members of those they take in Battel, and drying the same, present it to their Wives, to wear for an Ornament about their Necks; and she that wears most of them, hath most respect, because it testifies her Husbands Valour.

Before the Portuguese became Masters of this Coast, * 1.517 all the Kings acknow∣ledg'd this of Monomotapa for their Emperor; and still several of them own him, and pay Tribute yearly.

The Emperor hath several Great Lords his Vassals; and for the better hold∣ing of them in Obedience, according to an ancient Custom, keeps their next Successors, upon pretence to be honorably brought up, in his Court; though in truth to be as Hostages for their Fidelity. He sends also Agents every year to his Substitute Kings and Lords, to give them new Fire, with command to put out all the other. When the Agent comes to the Court of one of these Lords, every one must put out his Fire, and not kindle it again before the Agent has made a new one, from whence all the Subjects of this Lord must fetch and carry it into their Houses. He that seems unwilling in this Work, is taken and punish'd for a Mutineer.

The King keeps commonly a thousand Women, or more, being all Daugh∣ters of his inferior Lords; but the first married commands the rest, let her be never so mean.

The Chief Sovereign is call'd Benomotapa, that is, Emperor, or Munnemotapa, * 1.518 according to the Relation of Texeira a great Traveller.

The King receives and expects extraordinary Honors from his Subjects, by whom serv'd on the Knee, as we have said; onely the Portuguese, Moors, and

his chiefest Favourites may speak to him standing: when he drinks, all the Spectators sing aloud in his praise: all his Attendance and Retinue, remain sitting in his presence, in alto silentio, without daring to utter one word.

The King and all his Justices, are very strict in the prosecution of their Of∣fice and Duty, to punish Offenders with great severity.

The Sentences of these Judges are establish'd by the Emperor, and the Of∣fender immediately punish'd: As soon as any one hath committed an offence, he is punish'd in the Field, while the Fact is fresh in memory; but if it require to keep the Offender some days, they tie him under a Tree, and set upon him a Watch, by reason they have no Prisons, so that the Offender seeing no way to escape, poysons himself; so by a sudden death, to be freed from the cruelty of a lingering punishment. When any injures another without a cause, they lay him naked upon the earth, and cruelly beat him with a Rope full of knots; which punishment the Judges themselves are subject to, and the greatest Lords and Magistrates, besides the Confiscation of their Estates and Offices.

If the Judges have any difficult business, whereof they can find no proof, they give the suspected person the Bark of a Tree cut small, in Water, and if he can keep that potion without Vomiting, they clear him, otherwise they con∣demn him to death.

These People are for the most part Pagans, they call their chiefest God, Ma∣ziry, that is, The Creator of all things. They shew great reverence to a certain Maid call'd Peru, in whose honor they shut up their Daughters in Cloysters as Recluses.

Moreover, * 1.519 they set apart as Sacred, some days of the Moon, and the Birth of their King; but the innumerable number of Erroneous Opinions, darkens all the Splendor of their Belief, which they should have to God the Crea∣tor of Heaven and Earth. But the earnest endeavour of the Portuguese Je∣suites, hath converted many to Christianity, and brought them to receive Baptism.

In the Year Fifteen hundred and sixty, the King himself, with his Mother, and above three hundred Nobles, and chiefest Lords of the Realm, were Bap∣tiz'd by the hands of the Jesuit, call'd Gonzales Sylveyra; but afterwards, at the instigation of some Mahumetans, he was slain by the King's command, with the imputation of a Sorcerer; but a little time discovering their ma∣lice, they made satisfaction for his undeserv'd death, with the loss of their own Heads.

The Kingdom of AGAG, and DORO, with the Territory of TOROKA, or BUTUA.

AMongst the substitute Dominions of Monomotapa, are Agag, and Doro, bordering in the East, on the New-Land; and in the West, at the King∣dom of Takua.

Toroka, or Torea, by some call'd Butua, or Buttua, takes beginning according to Linschot and Pigafet, at the Fish-Cape, and so to the River Magnice, or Sante

Esprit; having in the South, the foot of the Mountains of the Moon, and the aforemention'd Cape; in the North, the River Magnice; and in the West, the Stream of Bravagull.

The chiefest Cities, are Zenebra, and Fatuka.

In this Countrey, far to the In-land on a Plain, * 1.520 in the middle of many Iron-Mills, stands a famous Structure, call'd Simbaoe, built square like a Castle, with hew'n Stone, of a wonderful bigness; the Walls are more than five and twenty Foot broad, but the heighth not answerable; above the Gate, appears an Inscription which cannot be read or understood, nor could any that have seen it, know what people us'd such Letters.

Near this place are more such Buildings, call'd by the same name, signify∣ing, a Court, or Palace; and for that, all the places where the Emperor at any time makes his abode, are call'd Simbaoe; this Building is guest to be one of the King's Houses.

The Inhabitants report it a work of the Devil, themselves onely Building with Wood, and aver, that for strength it exceeds the Fort of the Portuguese at the Sea-shore, about a hundred and fifty miles from thence.

The Emperor keeps a Garrison in it, as well for the safeguard of the place, as of several women he maintains there.

A little way from the Sea-shore, are many beautiful places richly Verdur'd with Grass, and stockt with Cattel, but destitute of Wood; so that the Inhabi∣tants use the dry'd Dung of Beasts for Fuel.

They have many rich Gold-Mines, whereof Boro, * 1.521 and Quitici are the names of two, lying about a mile and a half from Sofala.

The Habit of the People is but mean, * 1.522 being onely the rough Skins of Beasts.

The Wealth of the Countrey, besides the beforemention'd Mines, * 1.523 consists in Elephants-Teeth, whereof they sell infinite numbers; and Salt, which they send abroad into most parts of Africa, to their no small advantage.

The City Fatuka boasts great abundance of Gold, Silver, and Pretious-Stones, beyond all her neighbors.

They have a Prince of their own, but a Vassal to the Emperor; * 1.524 his name Buro.

The Countrey of INHAMBANE, and INHAMIOR.

THis Kingdom lies a little within the Countrey, under the Torrid Zone; * 1.525 having for its Metropolis a City call'd Tonge.

The heat is so great, that the people of Europe residing there for Trade, are not able to endure it, but are discommoded by several strange and troublesome diseases.

The Inhabitants generally keep to their ancient Idolatry, though many by the diligence of the Portugal Jesuites, have embrac'd the Christian Religion; and in particular, as we told you, Gonzalves Silveyra, in the year Fifteen hun∣dred and sixty, Baptiz'd the King and his whole Court.

The place where the King keeps his Court, lieth about half a mile from the Town Sema; the residence of many Portuguese.

The Kingdom of MONOE-MUGI, or NIMEAMAYE.

THe great Kingdom of Monoe-Mugi, * 1.526 or Mohememugi, by others call'd Nimea∣maye, scituate over against Mombaza, Quiloa, and Melinde, hath for Northern borders Abyssinies, or Prester-John's Countrey, and the King∣dom of the great Makoko; in the South, Monomotapa, and Mosambique; in the East Mombaza, and Quiloa; in the West, on the River Nyle; on the North-side between that and Prester-John's Countrey, lie some small Kingdoms, which being weak of Forces, sometimes pay Tribute to the King of Monoe-Mugi, and sometimes to the Abyssines.

These Countreys abound with Gold, Silver, Copper, and Elephants; The Inhabitants said to be white Skin'd, and of bigger stature than the Europeans, go naked on the upper part of their bodies, * 1.527 but over their nether parts wear Silk or Cotton.

They use also for Ornament, Chains, or Bracelets of Chymical Stones, which glister like Glass, and are brought from Cambaye: These Beads serve them also in stead of Money, Gold being of no value with them.

This King holds an amicable correspondence with Quiloa, Melinde, and Mom∣baza, by which means Silks, Cotton-Stuffs, the aforesaid Beads of Cambaye, and many other Commodities are brought into the Countrey, and barter'd for Gold, Silver, Copper and Ivory.

He liveth also in a League of Peace with the great Makoko; whereby from hence some Black Merchants have Converse and Trading with the Portuguese, that keep their Markets in the Kingdom of Fungeno, as also in Pombo d' Okango.

At the end of this Kingdom, on the East, by information of some Black Merchants of the Kingdom of Nimeamaye, given to several Portuguese, lieth a great Lake, out of which many Rivers (by them unknown) take their Original: adding moreover, that in this Lake are abundance of Islands, inhabited by Blacks; and that on the East-side of these Lakes, Land may be seen, where some∣times they hear the sound of Bells, perhaps brought thither by the Abyssines; and discern some Buildings, which they suppose Churches; from this East-side, sometime in Boats there came Tauney-Men, and by chance Blacks; yet the sides of the Lake are possess'd by persons yellowish, with lank or uncurl'd Hair hanging down at length, who daily come to Trade with the foremention'd Islands. They of Pombo d'Okango, being ask'd, how many days journey they had from Okango to this Lake? answer'd, that at the speediest they could scarce arrive there in sixty days.

The Valleys between Okango and this Lake, are related to be exceeding fruit∣ful, being inrich'd by many pleasant Springs, frequented by divers sorts of Beasts and Fowls, shadow'd with very fair Palm-Trees, whereof the Inhabi∣tants make Wine and Oyl; and so much Honey in many places, that it lieth like Dew upon the ground. No Christian hath ever penetrated thus far, nor indeed are willing, partly because of the desolate and untrodden ways there∣of, and partly for the intemperance of the Air; but principally for fear of the

[illustration]

Jages, the cruellest and most inhumane people, which keep here in great mul∣titudes.

These Jages are like in Manners, Wars, and Savageness to the Jages of Ansico, for they eat up all those that they take Prisoners in the Wars, or serve them as Slaves; and for Ornament have also Feathers stuck through their Noses, and both the upper Teeth before are struck out; without which marks none can be receiv'd in their Bands or Companies, as we have at large before related.

The Kingdom of SOFALA.

THe Kingdom of Sofala lieth between the Rivers Magnice and Quama, up∣on the last of which it borders in the North, * 1.528 and the Kingdom of An∣goche; in the South, on that of Magnice, and the Territory of Buttua, or Toroa; in the West, on Monomotapa; and in the East, on the Indian Sea.

The chief City seated in an Island, they call Cefola, or Sofala, * 1.529 near which the Portuguese have a strong Fort, built in the year Fifteen hundred.

This City when the Portuguese first came to it, had but a small extent, and the Structures were very mean; but since that much improv'd with neat built Houses.

Linschot places here few other Cities, and Towns, * 1.530 contrary to the fancy of divers African Geographers, who reckon Hantema, and Dandenia, besides some stragling Huts, term'd Villages on the shore, as Sajona, Boccha, and Gasta.

The River Magnice seven and twenty degrees, * 1.531 and forty minutes South-Lati∣tude, was at the beginning call'd by the Portuguese, Rio dos Lagos, that is, The River of the Lake, but afterwards in the year Fifteen hundred forty five, Rio do

Spirito Sancto. * 1.532 It hath its rise (as some conjecture) out of the Lake Goijame, and after it has flow'd along way to Sofala, divides its self; one of which keeps the old name, and disembogues his stream into the Sea, between the Fish-Cape, and the Cape das Torrentas, having first receiv'd three other Streams, of which the chiefest is call'd by the Portuguese, St. Christophers River, because found on that day, but by the Inhabitants Magoa; the other call'd Marches, from Lawrence Marches, the first discoverer: both which pour down from the Mountains of the Moon, in the Territory of Toroa; the third stil'd Arroe, comes about the North from the midst of the Gold Mines of Monomatapa.

The other Arm of Magnice, * 1.533 entitul'd Cenama, or Quama, or Covanga, takes de∣nomination from a Castle or Fort, which Pigafet says, the Mahumetans possess on its shore, but higher up, the Inhabitants name it Sambere. This arm hath more plenty of water than the other, being Navigable above twenty miles, and receiving the Stream of Six other great Rivers, as Panhames, Luangoa, Arruga, Ma∣najova, * 1.534 Inandire, and Ruenie, all which make their way through Monomotapa, in many places casting up Grain-Gold: it empties it full-gorg'd Channel into the Sea by seven Mouths, which make seven Islands, all well peopled. At the mouth of this River the Portuguese have a Fort to keep the Inhabitants under obedience, built in the year Fifteen hundred.

The Kingdom of Sofala shoots not far into the Countrey, but lies wholly on the Sea-Coast: in the midst of it appears the Cape das Correntas, in three and twenty degrees and a half South-Latitude; between which Cape and the Island of Madagacar over against this Cape, lieth the Banks or Cliffs of India, call'd in Portuguese, Baixos da India, very dangerous, and causing many Shipwracks. They begin about the one and twentieth degree South-Latitude, in the Channel of the Coast of Sofala.

Matuka reacheth from Cape das Correntas to the River Cuama, * 1.535 or Quama, wherein are several Gold Mines, belonging to Monomotapa.

On the Coast of Sofala in the Countrey of Matuka, lieth the Capes of St. Saba∣stian, and St. Catherine.

The Air is healthy and temperate; * 1.536 the Land some places plain, and in some uneven, barren and desolate, from the mouth of the River Magnice, to the Cape das Corrintas, but from thence to Quama very fruitful and populous.

Matuka bears not an equal evenness, * 1.537 though being by Quama River, for the most part Mountainous, * 1.538 Woody, and interlac'd with many Rivulets; the Sea Coast low and plain, full of shrubby Trees, whose sweet smelling scent here∣tofore gave a quicker discovery than the eye could make of the place.

Great wild Elephants numerously overspread the Countrey, * 1.539 which the Na∣tives neither know how to tame or manage: nor are Lions, Bears, Stags or Harts and Bores fewer; besides Sea-Horses that sport themselves in the River Quama.

The Mines and Rivers afford abundance of Gold, * 1.540 which the Blacks gather in a kind of little Purses, of no small quantity.

The People are well-set, * 1.541 and for the most part black, though some brown∣ish: Those which dwell at Cape Carnidos are less wild than them about Aiguilhas, or the Cape of Good-Hope; also taller of stature, and free of converse: they feed on Rice, Flesh, and Fish.

They go with the upper part of their bodies naked, * 1.542 but wear upon the nether part (from the Waste to the Knees) Clothes of Silk or Cotton, girt to them with a Girdle, whereto hangs a Dagger with an Ivory handle; and

winde about their heads Silk Stuff, in form of a Turbant; though some wear Scarlet Colour'd Caps.

Some of them speak Arabick, * 1.543 but most use the common Language of the Countrey; for you are to observe, that these present people are not the pro∣per Natives of the place, but came before the Portuguese on this Coast, over Sea from Arabia Faelix, to Trade with those of Monomotapa: And as they found greater advantage by the increase thereof, they began to Plant fresh Colonies in the void and desolate Islands, and at length remov'd thence into the main Coun∣trey.

The Inhabitants relate, * 1.544 that the Gold-Mines of Sofala afford yearly two Millions of Metigals, every Metigal accounted for a Ducket, and one third part; and that the Ships of Zidem, Meque, and many other places, in times of Peace, have yearly fetch from thence two Millions of Gold: And lastly, that this is the very true Ophir, from whence King Solomon had his Gold. * 1.545 And indeed according to the Writing of Moquett, no place in Africa affords better, and greater plenty of this Metal; for the General of Mosambique, during his three years Service in the Wars, receiv'd more than three hundred thousand Esckusos, or Crowns in Gold, besides the Pay of the Souldiers, and the third part an∣swer'd to the King of Portugal.

The Inhabitants Trade with other Mahumetans, coming over-Sea in small Ships call'd Zambuks, and bringing thither Silk Stuffs and Ash-colour'd, Yel∣low and Red Kambaian Beads, which they exchange for Gold; as those of So∣fala barter these Wares again with them of Monomotapa for Gold, which they re∣ceive without weight.

They have also abundance of Ivory, which they sell into Kambaya, * 1.546 and Am∣bergreece, which they get from the adjacent Islands of Usiques.

When the Inhabitants lying near the Sea, see any Out-Landish Ships, they declare by kindling of Fires their coming acceptable. They weave many white Cotton Clothes: For the Art of Dying they have no skill in; sometime they unravel the Kambaian colour'd Clothes, and Weave that among their white Yarn, and make Cloth of several Colours.

Their Weapons were onely Daggers, Bowes, and Arrows, * 1.547 but now they have the use of Guns, Powder, and Bullets, by instructions from the Por∣tuguese.

Pigafet holds an opinion, that the King of this Countrey was a Mahumetan, * 1.548 and Vassal to the Emperor of Monomotapa, with whom being at War, he entred into a League with the King of Portugal; But in the Voyage of Spilbergen, we find, that the King was a Portuguese by Birth; contrary to what Jarich menti∣ons, viz. that he is meerly Tributary to the Portuguese; but Marmol says, that in his time he obey'd the Emperor of Monomotapa.

The people (saith Pigafet) have imbrac'd Mahumetanism; * 1.549 which Osorus also confirms: although Jarick saith, they know no Religion at all, * 1.550 but are like a piece of Wax, fit to receive any. Certain it is, that for above two hundred years the Mahumetans flourish'd there, and have built a City call'd Sofala, upon an Island of the River Quama; who though but intruders, keep under the native Caffers.

And now it coming just in our way, * 1.551 and seeing both Expositors of holy Scripture, and Geographers understand this Countrey of Sofala to be the Gol∣den Ophir, to which King Solomon sent a Fleet of Ships, Man'd with the Servants of Hiram King of Tyrus, from Ezion-geber, a Haven lying at the Red-Sea; return∣ing

again after three years Voyage, loaden with Gold, and Elephants-Teeth. We conceive it not unfit in brief to relate the difference of the ancient Con∣test about this place, hitherto clearly decided, with the Arguments on both sides.

Arias Montanus, Baftellus, Goropius, and others, are of opinion, that Ophir was that part of America, commonly call'd Peru; and divided North, and South Peru: therefore they conclude from the word Parvaim, in the Hebrew Text, being the Plural Number, and that this Gold was brought from the two Peru's; but ma∣ny opposite Arguments refel this Opinion.

First, It is probable, that Peru in the time of Solomon was not known; nor which is more, the Voyage to Peru, over so wide a space of Seas, not possible to be perform'd, especially for want of the use of the Load-stone and Compass.

Secondly, There are in Peru no Elephants; so that by consequence, from thence no Ivory, or Elephants Teeth could be brought.

Thirdly, If Solomon were to go with a Fleet to Peru in America, it might have been sent more conveniently out of some Haven of the Mediterranean-Sea, as be∣ing nearer than out of Ezien-geber, at the Red-Sea, to fetch so long a compass, by the Cape of Good Hope, and the whole Guinee-Coast.

St. Jerome, an ingenious Expounder of the Hebrew, who in the year Four hundred twenty two, in the Nineteenth year of his Age, departed this world under Theodosius the Emperor, by the word Ophir, understands good or pure Gold; and in his Translation sets down very good Gold, and not Gold of Pa∣ruaen, or of any Countrey: but this opinion also is long ago rejected.

Athanasius Kircher, in his Book of the Coptick or Egyptian Language, asserts, that Ophir is a Coptick, or Egyptian word; whereby the ancient Egyptians under∣stood the Indies, containing the Kingdoms of Malabar, Scilon, and the Golden-Cher∣sonesus, or the descending Countrey of Ptolomy, about the River Ganges, East∣ward of a Bay, by him call'd, The Great; as also Sumattra, the Molucca Islands, Great, and Little Java; and other adjacent Islands full of Gold, whither King Solomon's Fleet went with King Hiram: The Gold of Parvaim, Kircherus judg∣eth was the Gold of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Javim, that is, of the Islands of Java; having read in the Rabbins, these two Islands by the same name.

In setting Ophir in East-Indie, (as Kircher doth) and not in America, the chief∣est Geographers agree; as Ortelius, Volaterranus, Gramas, and others; yet divers make Ophir the same with Sofala, because it has much Gold, and Ivory. And if all the main Land (included between the Rivers Magnice, and Quama, and sub∣mitting unto Monomotapa) be all as Barros, Calles, or Sofala, as well as the rest on the Sea-Coast, it may with great reason be judg'd, that this Countrey can be no other than the Golden Ophir of Solomon; partly because of the Houses there to be found, near the Gold-Mines; not built after the manner of the Coun∣trey, but seem the work of Foreigners; and partly, because of the Inscriptions in strange and unknown Letters. Moreover, Thomas Lopez in his Voyage to the Indies affirms, that among the Inhabitants of this Countrey, there remain Books which shew, that Solomon every three year had his Gold thence. Besides the Septuagint Interpreters have Translated the word Ophir, into the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which agrees very near with Sofala. And Josephus the Jewish Historio∣grapher, calleth it Indian-Ophir; adding moreover, that in his time it was call'd The Gold-Countrey. A certain Writer, call'd Eupolemeus, mention'd by Eusebius, calleth it Ophir Ureten, and saith, 'tis an Island of the Red-Sea, from whence they used to Fraight Ships to Melanis, a City in Arabia.

The Countrey of ZANGUEBAR.

THis Countrey some will have to be the same which Ptolomy calleth Agy∣synima, and Paulus Venetus calleth Zengibar; * 1.552 but the Persians and Arabi∣ans, Zanguebar; Zangue, in their Language signifying Black; and the Inhabitants Zanguy, or Neorroes.

Jan de Barros, extends this Countrey along the Sea-Coast, * 1.553 from the Cape das Correntas, to the River Quilmanzi; but Sanutus sets the Southerly borders thereof at Sofala, and Monomotapa, and the River Quama, and the Northerly borders at the River Quilmanzi: But Marmol extendeth it from the South to the North, to the Cape of Guardaseu, in about twelve degrees North-Latitude.

It contains the Kingdoms of Angos, or Angoche, Mongalo, Mozambika, Melinde, Mombaze, Quiloa; and some Islands.

The River Quilmanzi, by Ptolomy, with the near adjoyning Cape, call'd Rapte, * 1.554 and the great River of Africa, takes its original out of a certain Mountain in Abyssina, which the Inhabitants call Graro; as also the River Obi: But the Moores, lying at the Mouth thereof, call it Quilmanzi, from the name of a place they possess, by one of its chiefest Mouths, near the Kingdom of Melinde. The Portuguese Writers will have this River Quilmanzi, to be the same with Ze∣bee, which rises out of Maria, a Territory in the Abyssynes, from a place call'd Boxa; and from thence running South with a swift course into the Kingdom of Gingiro. Other Portuguese affirm, That it lieth no more than a thousand Paces from Melinde, being a very great River, flowing out of the Abyssine Countrey; but that they could never attain the full knowledge thereof, because those that were sent to discover it, were driven back, and assaulted by the Inhabitants.

The Air is very Unhealthy, Feaverish, and Corrupt; * 1.555 and no less unwhol∣some are the products of the Earth, caus'd partly from the Moorassness of the Grounds; and partly from the multitude of Rivers and Lakes which makes this Countrey a great pack of Islands.

The Inhabitants are black, having short curl'd Hair: * 1.556 they go from the shoulders down to the middle naked, but have their nether parts cover'd with party colour'd Clothes, or wild Beasts Skins; the Tails whereof, especially among people of Quality, hang down behind.

The Blacks on the Sea-Coast, and of the near adjacent Islands, * 1.557 live upon Fruits, the flesh of wild Beasts, and milk of the Cattel which they breed; espe∣cially the Moors, call'd Beduines, who dwell a little deeper into the Countrey, and Trade with the Kaffers.

Gold is none of the least advantages drawn from this Countrey, * 1.558 wherewith it so abounds, for which onely they get a supply of all other necessaries.

The Natives of the Main-Land are Idolaters; * 1.559 but the Islanders almost all Mahumetans, extracted from certain Arabians exil'd from their Countrey, for in∣troducing of some Heresie in their Religion; as following the Doctrine of one Zaid, Nephew of Hocem, Son of Haly, whereupon they were call'd Emossayders.

The Islands of QUIRIMBA.

OVer against Zanguebar, * 1.560 lie the Islands of Quirimba, extending above fifteen miles along the Coast, to the out-lying Point, call'd in Portuguese, Cabo del Gabo.

They are not all of one equal bigness, nor alike distant from the Main-land, and sever'd one from another by Channels, so small and shallow, that at low-Water they may be Waded over. And although each Island hath its particular name, yet the Portuguse call them all Quirinba.

The Islands were formerly inhabited by the Arabians; as may plainly appear by the Ruines of the Houses, and Mosques, being built by people less barbarous, than those that have their Residence there at this day, of Lime, Stone, and Tiles, like the Cities of Quiloa, Monbaza, and Melinde. But since the Portuguese began to set forth their Ships to the East-Indies, the Souldiers and Mariners, out of a natural hatred and antipathy to all Mahumetans, thought it not enough to rob them, burn their Houses, and Mosques, and to carry them away for Slaves, but with a sweeping Rage, sparing neither Age nor Sex, destroy'd all of the remainder.

These Islands many years since, lay waste and void of people, till some Por∣tuguese from the Main-Land wafted themselves over thither, and planted them, and so became subject to the Governor of Mayambique, about three and thirty miles from thence; from whence every year cometh a Judge to decide Con∣troversies.

The Lord of every Island hath his House built of Stone, and Lime, wherein resides his Wife, Children, and Slaves of both Sexes, as also Friends, and Ser∣vants, whom they hire, to have their assistance against the Negro's of the Main-Land, which by their living so near, are ready enough to do them a mischief; And therefore, both themselves and Slaves are Arm'd with Muskets, Pistols, and other Weapons.

Most of these Islands are not above half a mile, or a mile in compass, but very fruitful, full of Palmito-Trees, Oranges, Figs, Grapes, Herbs, and Pome-Citrons; and excellently accommodated with fresh Water.

They have besides many Oxen, Cows, Goats, and an infinite number of Fowl, among which, Wild-Pigeons, and Turtle-Doves: but Corn, Rice, Drugs, dry'd and confected Fruits, are brought to them from Ormus.

The Island of Quirinba is the biggest, and was the first Peopled, yet hath one∣ly twenty five Houses, inhabited by Portuguese and Mesties; they stand not close together, but lie scatter'd, here and there two or three together.

Every one of these little Islands hath their own Governor, which every three year are chang'd. From Gou they receive a Dominican Priest, who celebrates Mass, and performs all other Sacred Duties; to which end, there stands a Cloy∣ster in the midst of the Houses, whither all those of these Islands come to do their Devotion.

The second of these Islands call'd Oybo, * 1.561 is not so big as Quirinba, but the Air more temperate and fresher; so that a man may well say, that the whole makes one pleasant Garden, moisten'd and besprinkled in many places, with the best and most wholsomest Waters in the world.

The other Islands have no Road nor Haven, where Ships can come to an An∣chor, because in the deepest Channel at a low Ebb, there is not three Foot water.

Over this Island Oybo, a Portuguese Commands, who dwells in a great and handsome House, with Chambers below and above; and behind it a Garden, incompass'd with a Stone-Wall of two Fathom high, with Spiers at the top, so that it may seem in stead of a Bulwark: This, with assistance of his Houshold Family, who are all Arm'd, may be defended against any Incursion of the Blacks, from the Main-Land, if they should offer to attempt it; but they live in good Peace one with another, because of their mutual Trade.

The Kingdom of MONGALO, and ANCHE, or ANGOS.

UPon one side of the River Quama, lieth Mongalo, a Tract of Land inhabi∣ted by Mahumetans, or Moors.

They have abundance of Gold brought thither from Monomotapa; not far from thence you see the River Ango, by Pigafet, call'd in Italian, Agnoscia; by Moquet, in French, Angoche; but by Barbosa, Angos.

The Countrey produces great store of Mille, Rice, and Cattel.

The Inhabitants are of a middle Stature, but very black; they go with the upper part of the body naked, but cover'd from the Girdle downward with Cotton and Silk Clothes: Some wear Turbants upon their heads, and others Caps made of Silk Stuff.

They use a peculiar form of Speech, though many of them speak Arabick. * 1.562

These Moors of Angos are all Merchants, Trading in Gold, Ivory, Cotton, Silk, * 1.563 Clothes, and Kambain Beads, or Bracelets. The Cotton, Silk, Cloth, and Beads, they receive from the hands of the Merchants of Quiloa, Mombaze, and Melinde, which bring them thither in small Baskets, or Almides, cut out of the whole Wood.

They own no Governor, unless one who speak their proper Language, and by profession a Mahumetan; yet all their care doth not keep them from a mix∣ture of Heathenism.

The Kingdom of MOZAMBIKE.

A Little beyond Angos, appeareth the Kingdom of Mozambike, so call'd from the Island of that name, exceeding those her two neighbors of St. James, and St. George, living all three near at the Mouth of the Ri∣ver Meginkate.

Over against St. Georges Island, but at the distance of an English mile, you may see a Point call'd Cabo Ceira, being a hanging Islet, joyn'd to the Main-Land of Africa, by a small Istbmus overflow'd at High-Water; but at other times passa∣ble on Foot.

The Countrey of Mozambike is very fertile, in producing many sorts of Fruits; * 1.564 as Rice, Citrons, Oranges, and Mille, which the Blacks are compell'd to guard

and defend against Elephants by the kindling of Fires, whereof these Beasts are very much afraid.

There groweth also a certain Plant call'd Pao, or Wood of Antak, which creeps along the ground, and is very like the Herb Aristolachia, or Heart-Wort. The Fruit is long, small, with green Seeds or Grains. The Roots have a strange ver∣tue, in curing a Disease call'd Antak, which seizes on the Foreigners, by con∣versing with the Blacks, and can be expell'd by no other Medicine.

The Inhabitants make Wine of Mille, which they call Huyembe, or Pembe.

Here is no want either of tame or wild Fowl, * 1.565 nor of Stags or Harts, wild Hogs, Cows, Oxen, and Elephants; which last are so numerous, that the Inha∣bitants dare not travel without fire, to defend them from their assaults. Wild Hens breed in the Woods, being speckled with many small white and gray spots: their Heads are much less than our common Hens, with a short Comb, but thick, and of a high colour: and not onely the upper part of the Head, but also part of the Neck, cover'd with a blue Skin like a Turky.

Many Silver, Gold, and other Mynes are found in the Countrey.

The People have short Curl'd Hair, * 1.566 great Lips, long Visages, and very large Teeth.

They go stark naked, onely a blue little Clout before their Privacies: They Paint ther Bodies with divers Colours, but account it the greatest Ornament, to have streaks of a certain red Earth. They make in each Lip three holes, in which they hang Bones, Jewels, and other things. But this Fashion and Trimming eminent People onely use.

They feed in general upon all sorts of Fruit, * 1.567 and Flesh of Beasts: yet they eat also the Flesh of Men, taken Prisoners in the Wars, but they esteem the Flesh of Elephants as the choycest Dainty.

They are revengeful and treacherous, dull of understanding, and inured to labour like Beasts, not grutching to be Slaves.

Every Lordship or Province produces a several Language; * 1.568 yet it proves no hindrance to their converse one with another.

Their Riches consist in Gold, * 1.569 found in the Rivers, Ivory, Ebony, and Slaves; yet are so fearless of any attempts to be made upon them, that they debar no Foreigners to come into their Havens, the Portuguese onely excepted.

Their Weapons of War are Arrows, Battel-Axes; but can neither boast any number of People, nor extent of Land.

The Inhabitants are, according to Linschot, some Heathens, and some Mahu∣metans; but Pyrard averrs, they have neither Religion nor Laws, but that they are onely Kaffers.

The Island MOSAMBIKE.

THe Island Mosambike, half a Mile from the Main Land, contains about three quarters of a League in length, a quarter in breadth, the whole compass not exceeding a League and a half, with a white Shore. It extendeth South and North, along the Main Land; between which and this Isle and Fort, appears the Bay, serving for a convenient Haven, Land-lockt from all Winds, being very large, and carrying eight or ten Fathom Water: Within a Stones-throw of which the Ships ride at Anchor.

This Island hath the Main Land on the North, and two other uninhabited small Islets on the South, the one nam'd St. James, or Jago, and the other St George; but neither affording any conveniency, not being inhabited, being wholly overgrown with Shrubs and Bushes.

Some place two Cities upon Mosambike-Isle, affirming the one to be plenti∣fully peopled by Portuguese, and the other with Blacks; but Pyrard makes the whole so fully inhabited, that it seems but one Town, comprehending within its Circuit a very large and strong Fort, together with five or six Churches, Chappels, and Cloysters.

From the Description of the Navigation to the East-Indies, made by Verhoeven, in the Year Sixteen hundred and seven, it appears that the City of Mosambike is very large, having good Walls, fine Houses, and some Churches and Cloy∣sters: wherewith agrees Paul van Caerden, in the Journal of his Voyage to the East-Indies.

Moquet allots to the City not above two hundred Houses; but Linschot leaves all the places open and unwall'd, except the Castle, where the Portuguese Go∣vernor with his Soldiers have their Residence.

Garias de Silva Figueora, in his Persian Embassy, comprises in the City an hun∣dred and fifty Houses, but most of them built of Wood, Straw, and Palm-Tree Leaves.

For the deciding these different Relations we may suppose, that the first Writer, who placeth two Cities here, mistook two Villages for Cities; and Linschot himself mentions the Dwellings severally, making one part of the old Fort, commonly call'd Fortarez a Velha, and another of some Houses close by it. Others may have taken a great number of Houses standing close together to be a City; however it is, we may modestly guess, that at the time of these Wri∣ters things were found thus.

There is a Cloyster of St. Domingo, with a rich Hospital, said to have been a Castle in former time, built by the Kings of Portugal, into which those of that Nation are put, coming sick from Sea.

Besides St. Anthony, St. Dominick, and St. Gabriel's Church, all lying without the Fort; they have another, Nossa Seniora do Balvarte, built close under the Fort.

The Air being generally more than warm, proves very unwholsom, * 1.570 inso∣much that few live there any while free from dangerous Distempers, which no doubt are much augmented by the want of fresh Water, there being onely one small Spring, of little consequence, in a Thicket of Palm-Trees; so that most of them drink salt Water, mingled with a little of that fresh.

This great Drought sufficiently declares, that the Land proves barren, * 1.571 and unfit to produce any thing: Yet provident Nature hath recompenced the want of all other Provision with Coco-Nuts, Oranges, Citrons, Ananassed-Figs, and other Indian-Fruits, but these onely in manured and well cultivated Gar∣dens.

They have neither Wheat nor Rice growing, but all brought from the Main Land, or from Goa and the East-Indies; so also Raisins or Grapes, and Spa∣nish-Wines, with several other Necessaries both for benefit and sustenance; so that it is much dearer living here than in any other Place possessed by the Por∣tuguese in this Coast.

Here breed great Herds of Oxen, Cows, Sheep, * 1.572 with Tails as big as a fifth part of their Bodies; Bucks, Goats, and Swine: whose Flesh hath gain'd such

an esteem, that the Doctors oftentimes order the Sick to eat it, and forbid them all other sort of Meat; it being a delicate Food, pleasant and delightful of taste.

There are also many excellent Birds, with black Feathers, and black Flesh, either boyl'd or raw, yet accounted no unwholsom Food.

The Haven swarms with Fishes, which the Inhabitants call Marraxos, and the Portuguese, Tintoreas; they are very ravenous after Man's-flesh, for so soon as they see a Man fall into the Water by chance, or go to swim, they will im∣mediately catch and devour him.

The Inhabitants are a mixture of Mestiffs, Mahumetans, and absolute Hea∣thens, yet all subject to the Portuguese.

The Natives of this Island are black of Complexion, * 1.573 and low of Sta∣ture, with short Curl'd Hair like Wool; they smell very ranck, when grown warm; they are by nature barbarous, cruel, and revengeful, but withall, ti∣morous.

Both Sexes go naked, * 1.574 onely the Men have a small Clout before their Priva∣cies, and the Women cover their Bodies from their Breasts half way to their Knees, with course Cotton-Clothes.

Their Ornaments consist in three or four Strings of white, * 1.575 green, blue and red Beads about their Necks, and ten or twelve Copper or Tin Armlets about their Arms. They make holes in their Ears, wherein in stead of Pen∣dants they hang pieces of Copper or Lattin; cutting and carving the rest of their Skin for an Ornament.

Their common Food is Fish, * 1.576 and Rice boyl'd in Water with Honey.

Their Drink is Palm-Wine and Water, and a sort of Liquor call'd Arak, made of Rice.

Their Skiffs, Boats, or Canoos, consists all in one Piece, as we often men∣tion'd.

They speak generaly a kind of broken Arabick. * 1.577

There are a certain sort of handsom Mats, * 1.578 made by the Inhabitants, which are sent to Goa.

The Portuguese drive a smart Trade here with Spanish-Wine, Oyl, Cotton, Skiffs, red Beads, and such like, notwithstanding they have a quick Market at Sena, Makuno, Sofala, Quamma, and other places.

Their Arms are Bowes, * 1.579 Arrows, or Lances; but of late they have begun to learn the use of Fire-Arms.

The Portuguese have many years ago built a Fort, supposed the strongest they possess in those Parts, consisting of four Bulwarks, from whence with their mounted Artillery they can defend and make good the Haven against any ordi∣nary attempts. It hath strong and well designed Flankers, fortifi'd and sur∣rounded with three double Walls, and a broad Trench made about it in the Year Sixteen hundred and thirteen.

Several vain Onsets have the Dutch made upon this Fort, but chiefly in the Year Sixteen hundred and six, when after a formal Siege of thirty two days, they were compell'd to withdraw first, as an effect of their malice, having burn'd many Ships, Canoos, Houses, and Churches, those two especially of St. Ga∣briel and St. Domingo beforemention'd.

Some of the Inhabitants, by reason of the Converse and Trade of the Arabi∣ans on this Coast, are drawn to Mahumetanism, others are Christians; but the most part of them are Idolaters.

The Kingdom of QUILOA.

THe Kingdom of Quiloa derives the Name from an Island, * 1.580 lying in eight Degrees and fifty Minutes South-Latitude, at the Mouth of the River Kuavo, said to spring out of the Lake Zambre, and according to Peter Alvarez, posited so near the Main Land, as if joyn'd to it, and hath a stately City, by some taken for the Rapta of Ptolomy, with lofty Houses after the Spanish fa∣shion, all adorn'd with stately Halls, Chambers, and other Apartments, fur∣nished with costly Housholdstuff, and accommodated both for Pleasure and Profit with sweet and fertile Gardens.

There lies on the Main Land of Quiloa another City, call'd Old Quiloa, * 1.581 built about six hundred years since by one Haly, Son of Hacem King of Cyrus in Persia, but yields nothing so delightful a Prospect as that mention'd before.

This Kingdom, before the coming of the Portuguese thither, spread it self along the Sea-Coast above a hundred and fifty Dutch miles: for he Reigned formerly over Sofalo, Quamma, Angos, and Mozambike; but when Francois Dul∣manda, in the Year One thousand five hundred and five, put in for this Coast with the Portuguese Fleet, the King; though invited to Friendship, prepared for a Warlike Defence; whereupon seven hundred Portuguese went on Shore, who quickly took the City, and put him to flight.

Sanutus saith this Countrey hath such an antipathy to the nature of the Euro∣peans, that the Portuguese found themselves necessitated to forsake the same, not∣withstanding they had built a Fort there, and made no doubt but to have been the Masters thereof. But later Opinions hold the Air since that to have grown more temperate, for that some good and wholsom Fruits have been found growing there.

Osorius praises it, as being water'd with many Fountains, so enriching the Soyl, that it produces all sorts of Grain and Fruits with little labor, especially Maiz, Rice, Oranges, Citrons, and Lemons.

They have great store of Oxen and sheep, many Hens, Pigeons, * 1.582 Turtle-Doves, and several other sorts of unknown Birds, divers sorts of wild Beasts in the Woods, and on the Sea-shore variety of Fish.

Some of the Inhabitants draw their Original from Arabia, such are brown, some black, others white. Pigafet affirms them to be all white; whereas on the contrary, Pedro Alvarez maintains them all black.

Their usual Food is Maiz, Rice, and other Grains, Carrots, * 1.583 and variety of wild Fruits, a fit Diet for such poor People.

The Merchants, and better sort of Men, go Habited in Cloth of Gold, * 1.584 Silk, or Cotton, with Turbants on their Heads. The Women wear also stately Apparel, with Gold and Silver Chains on the Arms and Legs, and costly Pen∣dants in their Ears. In brief, they go Clothed after the Arabian, or rather Turkish Mode.

They commonly speak Arabick, but understand other Languages, * 1.585 by reason of their Trading with Outlandish Merchants.

The Riches of the Quiloan Merchants consists in Gold and Silver, * 1.586 Amber∣greece, Pearls and Musk.

The Inhabitants are under a peculiar King, whom Linschot makes a Vassal, or Tributary to the King of Mommugi.

They are partly Mahumetans, * 1.587 and the rest Pagans.

The Kingdom of Mombaza.

TO the Northward of Quiloa, * 1.588 on the Sea-Coast, you come to the Kingdom of Mombaza, so call'd from an Island, in four Degrees and five Minutes South-Latitude; which Sanutus makes in its Circumference to be twelve Italian miles; but Jarrik onely a League, or thereabouts.

The City being of the same Name, * 1.589 built after the Italian manner, bears a considerable bulk, being situate on a high Rock. The extent of the whole Do∣minion not very big, bordering on one side at the City of Orgaba, seated on the Banks of the River Onchit, which poures her Waters into the Nyle by the Mountain Amara, where the Kingdom of Melinde begins.

The Turks had formerly thrown up a Fortification at the Shore of this Ri∣ver, so that none could come into the City but through it, being environ'd with a Wall, planted with Guns to defend it against the Portuguese, who in the Year Fifteen hundred, under the Command of Vasques de Gamma took this Fort, with all the Turkish Gallies.

At the same time the City was also conquer'd by a People call'd Imbires, li∣ving not far from the Cape of Good Hope, by the aid of the Portuguese, after a long Siege, into which five hundred of them entring by Storm, pull'd down the Walls, Churches, and a greatvaulted Castle, to the ground, and burn'd all the Ships in the Haven. The King of Mombaza himself, with all his Courtiers and great Officers, fell into the hands of these Imbires, which not onely put them to death, but eat them up.

The City was once before, in the Year Fifteen hundred and five, ruin'd by one Francois Almede; and some years afterwards again re-built by the King of Mombaza: but it long held not up its head, being again assaulted, taken, and plunder'd by another Portuguese, call'd Nunno de Acunha, who endeavouring to settle, were forced to leave their Conquest and retire to the fore-mention'd Fort, but were also at last dispossessed thereof by the same King, in the Year Sixteen hundred thirty one.

The temperature of the Air gives no cause of complaint to such as dwell there, * 1.590 nor the barrenness of the Countrey any discouragement to Planters, there being store of Mille, * 1.591 Rice, many sweet and sowre Oranges, and also some very large, with sweet Rhinds like China-Oranges, Citrons, Pomegranates, and Peaches without Stones.

They have many excellent Sheep, * 1.592 Cows, very large Goats, and Hens.

The People are of a whitish-brown Colour, * 1.593 somewhat inclining to black, more loving and courteous than those of the other Places lying near the Sea.

The Women are very richly Habited, * 1.594 in Cloth of Gold and Silver after the Arabian manner.

Their common Food is Mille and Rice; * 1.595 and their Drink either Areka, made of boyl'd Rice, or Wine of Honey, which they keep in great Horns in stead of Casks, cut in several fashions.

They have a King, * 1.596 whom they honor like a God, and say he Reigns only upon

the Earth as the Portuguese do upon the Sea. He is said to be so arrogant and self-conceited, that at the falling of Rain against his pleasure, or excessive Heat, he breaks out into several exclamations against Heaven, and out of madness draws his Bowe against the Sun. In brief, he calls himself the Emperor of all the World, and imagines that he shall overcome the whole Earth. He keeps commonly an Army of fourscore thousand Men in the Field, and in their March observes this Order: First he commands to go before him many Droves of Cattel; next several persons carry Fire, whereby he intends to declare, that all those whom he Conquers, must expect nothing else but to be Roasted and Eaten: All the Towns and Villages he travels through of the Enemies, he ruines, and without distinguishing of Men from Beasts, kills all he finds, so that all stand in great fear of him, and betake themselves to flight when they hear of his approach.

The King of Mombaza and all his Subjects were formerly Idolaters, * 1.597 but at present embrace Mahomet's Superstition, introduced by their last King, about the Year Sixteen hundred thirty one. He was from his Infancy inclin'd to Christi∣anity, and Marry'd to a Christian Woman, but being too highly affronted by the Governor of the Portuguese Fort, fell off from it, and then raged against them with horrible fury, putting all to death that fell into his Hands, and never ceased till he had expell'd them the Countrey.

This Seat was formerly, for the conveniency of its Haven, a Place of great Trade, being much frequented by neighboring Merchants, from Zanzibar, Penda, Araer, and other parts of Africa.

The Kingdom of Melinde.

THe Kingdom of Melinde lying more to the North than that of Mom∣baza, hath received its Name from the chief City, * 1.598 seated on the Shore of the Sea. It lyeth in two Degrees and a half South-Latitude, and reaches along the Sea-Coast of Mombaza, to the River Quilmanzi, and runs into the Countrey, to the Place call'd Calice.

The chief City Melinde, situate in a pleasant Plain, * 1.599 and surrounded with se∣veral Gardens, contains many Houses, very neatly built of hew'n Stone, with handsom Rooms, and Painted Cielings. Some will have it, from the famous Arabian Physitian Avicen, call'd Avicenne Mondelle; from whence the black Aloe comes to be the same with Melinde.

The Haven lieth a little distant from the City, by reason of sundry Rocks, which makes the Landing-place very dangerous.

The Countrey is fat and fruitful, and yields all necessary Provisions, * 1.600 except Bread, in stead of which the Inhabitants use the Root Potatesen. Some Rice and Barley grows there, but inconsiderable; nor have they any Wheat and Rye, but what is brought from Kambaye. There are several sorts of Fruits-Trees; and above all, very excellent and well tasted Melons, in the Countrey Lan∣guage call'd Dormous, which the Inhabitants eat in the Summer time as a plea∣sant cooler.

There is all sorts of Venison, and Fowl, great and small Cattel, * 1.601 chiefly Sheep, much bigger than those in Europe, with Tails of five and twenty, and

thirty Pound weight: Hens, Geese, and all sorts of Flesh may be had here in great abundance.

The Inhabitants are some black, * 1.602 and some brown, with Curl'd Hair: but those which live by the River Quilmanzi are white; as also most of the Women of Melinde.

The Women go very nobly apparell'd in Silks, * 1.603 and wear Gold and Silver Chains, with a Cloth before their Faces when they go abroad. The Men go naked down to their Wastes, but from thence wear Cotton or Silk Coats, with a Linnen or Cotton Turbant on their Heads.

The principal Commodities for Trade, are Gold, Ivory, Copper, Quicksil∣ver, and Wax, which the Mahumetan and Cambayan Merchants barter for Clothes and Stuffs.

For Arms they use Scimiters, * 1.604 Shields, Bowes and Arrows: Some have repu∣ted them the valiantest of all Africa; yet those of Mombaza have often put them into fear, and would have treated them very badly, had they not obtain'd the Portuguese assistance.

The Subjects honour their King very highly, * 1.605 carrying him on their Shoul∣ders, and at his going out in the Streets burning sweet Perfumes before him; which also they use to do before all other Princes and Lords that come to visit them.

The King takes cognisance in Person of all Matters in debate, * 1.606 although he hath appointed Officers and Judges to officiate in the administration of Justice: And if any complain of another person to the King, he must be sure to give a good account of the Matter, or else he runs in danger of losing his Head: how∣ever, upon the Complaint he immediately sends for the person: if the Com∣plainant be a great Lord, then being come, at the Palace he winds his Horn, to acquaint the Servants of his coming before the King: If upon examination he finds both have offended, then the least Offender is sent to the Lords of the Ju∣stice, who punish him corporally by beating with Cudgels; but the greatest he condemns in a pecuniary mulct. But if onely one great Lord hath committed any offence, being brought before the King in his Chamber, he is stripped stark naked, and laid upon the Ground, where, upon his humble submission and begging of pardon, he receives some blows with a Wand from the King's own Hand, more or less, according to the bigness of the Crime: After which he takes up his Clothes, kisseth the King's Feet, and in all humility thanks him for the favor receiv'd: then he attends the King into his Hall, who forgives him in the presence of all the Court, with a Command to do Justice, and af∣terwards goes out of the City in publick with honorable attendance, and re∣turns into his Countrey with as great satisfaction, as if he had received some great Present.

When the King travels abroad to view his Concerns, he rides upon a Horse richly furnished, and going out of the Palace, treads over a new-kill'd Deer; whereupon all the People give a loud shout: and at the same time the Priests inspect the Intrails, to know whether his Progress will be prosperous or not.

When he makes his entrance into any City, then all the handsomest Ladies and Maids meet him, some singing his praise, others carrying and burning Perfumes before him, others playing with small Sticks on a Bason, and every one striving to recreate and please him.

When any Native Prince sends an Agent to Treat about some weighty Matters, they also kill a Deer, which the King steps over thrice, the Soothsayer

in the interim viewing the Inwards, to enquire of the effect that may be pro∣duced thereby.

Some report the Inhabitants of the City Melinde for Heathens, * 1.607 others for Ma∣humetans; but Linschot says they are of both sorts, among which are many Christians.

The Mahumetans incline to the Sect of the Emoraydes, which disesteeming the Alcaron, follow the Doctrine of Zayd, the Son of Hoiem.

The Christians have a strong Congregation; as a proof whereof, they have erected a great Gilded Marble Cross, and have seventeen Churches or Chap∣pels there.

The Kingdom of Lamo.

MOre Northerly lieth the Kingdoms of Lamo, or Lamen, and Pate; but that of Lamo spreads more to the West, as bordering upon the River Quilmanzi, having in the North, Melinde; and in the East, Pate.

The chief City Lamo, lying a little Northward of the Line, hath a good de∣fensive Wall, against the Invasion of the In-land People, with whom, though in War, yet as occasion offers, Trade together.

Both King and People are all Mahumetans, but pay Tribute to the Portuguese, * 1.608 to whose Power they submit in all things.

The Kingdoms of Pate, Sian, Chelicie, and Ampaza.

THe Kingdom of Pate extends all along the Sea-Coast, on both sides the Bay, in Portuguese call'd Baya Formosa; and the City is handsom and large, and hath a good Haven.

The Jurisdictions of Sian, Chelicie, and Ampaza, neighbor it on all sides, ha∣ving indeed peculiar Lords of their own, but so inconsiderable, that their whole Strength cannot defend them from being miserable Slaves to the Portu∣guese, they Lording over them; nor can the greatness of the Turks, to whose Protection they sometimes flye, give them either a Relief or Relaxation.

The Portuguese have a Castle at Pate; and another between that and Sian, call'd Mondra: But because the Mahumetans shewed themselves unwilling to pay Tribute, and began to raise some Mutinies and Disturbances, the Portu∣guese Admiral, Thomas Sousa, in the Year Fifteen hundred eighty nine, pull'd it down to the Ground: And Alphonso de Mello laid waste the City of Ampaza in Fifteen hundred eighty seven, for the like Rebellion; yet the King, after he had made Peace with the Portuguese, remain'd in the ruin'd City.

The Countrey of Ajan.

THe Countrey of Ajan, or Axam, as the Arabians call it, according to the testimony of Marmol, or rather Habaxa, or Habex, some take for the antient Trogloditica, extending along the Shore of the Arabian and Avali∣tian Gulf, to the Mountain Elefas Fellos.

This Countrey hath for Borders in the South the great Arm of the River Quilmanzi, and the last described Kingdoms; in the North, Abyssynie, or Prester-Johns Countrey, and the Straights of Mecha; in the West, the Mountains, out of which the River Quilmanzi shoots, and also the same River, with part of Abyssinie; and in the East, the Ocean. It concludes within its compass from the South to the North, the Republick of Brava, the Kingdoms of Madagaxo, Adea, or Adel, and some other more unknown Places.

This Countrey affords plenty of all Necessaries for the preservation of Man's life; but most famous for a Breed of good Horses.

From the River Quilmanzi they extract Gold.

The People living at the Sea-shore are most of them Whites, but those in the Countrey Cole-black, with whom the Beduines, a white People, commixing, produce Mulatto-Children, neither perfectly white, nor absolutely black.

These Beduines live a toylsom and beastial life, ranging along the Shore of the River, lodging under the open Canopy of Heaven, and maintaining themselves by Robbing and Stealing.

The Inhabitants of this Countrey maintain a continual War against the People of Abyssinie, and sell all those they take Prisoners to the Arabians, living beyond the Red-Sea in Asia.

The Merchants of Kambaye, Aden, and all the Arabians, come into the Haven of Ajan to Traffick, carrying thither all sorts of colour'd Stuffs and Cloth, with Glass-Beads, and other Commodities.

From Ormus they bring Raisins and Dates, which they exchange in the Havens of Zoila and Barbore, for Gold, Ivory, and Slaves.

The People inhabiting this Coast are all Mussulines, but those farther into the Countrey are Emoraides, otherwise call'd Beduinen, a sort of Mahumetan Sectaries.

The City and Republick of Brava.

BEyond Quilmanzi, at the Coast of Ajan, not far from the Sea-shore, in ten Degrees and thirty Minutes North-Latitude, lieth the City Brava, sur∣rounded with strong Walls, and full of stately Houses, built after the Moorish fashion.

It is a Place of great Trade, and hath abundance of Gold and Silver. The Inhabitants pay yearly a Tribute of five hundred Metigals of Gold to the Portu∣guese, every Metigal reckon'd worth a Ducket and a third part of one.

We may read in Texcira, that on the Coast of Zanguebar near Brava, was a piece of Ambergreece found, so big, that one standing at one side of it, could not see a Camel on the other side.

This is the onely Republick of Africa, being Govern'd by twelve Xeques, * 1.609 chosen by the antientest People out of the Family of the Brothers aforemen∣tion'd, who to escape the Persecution and Tyranny of the Kings of Lakah, * 1.610 fled out of Arabia Felix hither, where they still retain the Mahumetanism which their Ancestors brought with them.

Madagaxo, or Magodoxo.

AS you Travel more Northerly towards the Red-Sea, you come to the Kingdom of Magadaxo, which hath been formerly so powerful, that all the Mahumetans on this Coast were subject to it.

The Countrey spreads it self, according to Urette, betwixt ninety and a hundred Leagues in breadth, but he seems to include therein the Kingdom of Adea.

This Territory produces great abundance of Barley, with variety of Fruits, and feeds huge Droves of Horses and other Cattel.

Some of the Inhabitants are brown, some black, and some white, yet not∣withstanding this difference of complexion, they agree in Language, all speak∣ing Arabick.

The Head City Madagaxo hath gain'd the repute of great Wealth, by the Trade of the Kambayan and Aden Merchants, bringing thither all sorts of Clothes, Drugs, and Spices, and receiving from thence in Barter, Gold, Ivory, and Wax.

They use in their Wars no other Arms, but poyson'd Arrows.

The Kingdom of Adea.

THe Kingdom of Adea begins in the middle of Adel, on the Main Land, * 1.611 bordering in the South, at Madagaxo; in the West, at Oyja, belonging to Abyssinie, in the North, at Adel; and Eastward border'd with the Indian-Sea.

The most famous Place of this Realm hath the Name Barraboa, that is, The good Shore; though it be somewhat distant from the Sea, and in passing to it you go up against the Stream in a Skiff by an Arm of the River Oby, or Quilmanzi.

The Dominion of Granze comes next, having for Limits the Kingdom of Oyja, Xoa, and Gorage, then Barra Maa, which is, Bad Shore, because no Ships can come near it. At last, upon the Skirts of this Realm, you find a Place call'd Ogabra. * 1.612

This Countrey hath many great Woods, insomuch that the Inhabitants are forced to cut down the Trees to make the Ways.

Nature hath served them with a plentiful hand, so that they want no Pro∣vision, having extraordinary Herds of Cattel.

They have a peculiar Mahumetan Prince, * 1.613 but dependent upon the Abyssine Emperor, to whom he pays Tribute.

The Inhabitants in general are zealous of Mahomet's Superstition, * 1.614 but those of Granze are partly Idolaters, and partly Christians.

Adel, or Zeila.

THe Kingdom of Adel, * 1.615 so call'd by the Portuguese, but by the Natives Zeila, lying at the Sea-shore, borders in the North at the Beglierbeyat, or Provinces of the Bassa of Suaquen, near the Straits of Meche; in the South at Adea; in the West, upon Fatigar in Abyssinie; and in the East, at the Indian Sea.

Pigafet makes the Southermost Places of this Kingdom to be Meth and Bar∣bosa, together with a part of the Arabian Gulf, and the Cape of Guardafu.

It extends in length from Zeila to the Cape of Guardafu, * 1.616 along the Sea-coast, seventy two Miles; and from Guardafu, along the Eastern Coast, about eight and forty; but in breadth fifty six.

The Chief City of this Kingdom is Ara, situate in nine Degrees North La∣titude, by some call'd Arika Gurrele; but by Marmol, Arat, who places the same eighteen Miles from Zeila; he settles also here the Royal City Adel, and the Towns Orgabra, Migiate, Sequeta, Bali, Mautra, Doara, Komizara, Novecara, and Soceli.

On the Sea-coast Pigafet tells of a small Place nam'd Asuin, or Affion, well stored with Provision, but wanting a Haven, and so consequently little fre∣quented by Merchants. Then follows the Cape of Guardafu, or Guardafuy, by many taken for the Aromata of Ptolomy, lying in twelve Degrees and a half North La∣titude, and very famous, because the Easterly Coast of Africa ends there. It lies almost at the entrance of the Arabian Gulf; so that the Ships which come out of India, and will go to Aden, and Ziden, or to Zeila, and Barbara, Sail close by it. On the Coast of Adel appears a Place call'd Salie, which Sanutus takes for that which Ptolomy denominates Mosilon.

Next to Salir, follows Barbara, and Meth; the first lieth to the North, on the Shore of the Red Sea, eleven Miles from the City Zeila; the latter, according to Sanutus, a small City. Afterwards cometh Zeila, one of the best Places on this Coast, being in eleven Degrees and twenty Minutes North Latitude; six and twenty Miles, saith Marmol, from the Straits of Meche.

This City, though built on a low and Sandy Ground, boasts not onely a large Extent, but a very convenient Haven for Ships. It stands within the Kingdom of Adel, in the Province Baragian, which includes the two other small Jurisdictions of Dalacha, and Malacha, all under the Obedience of the Turks.

The Houses in Zeila are built of Stone, and the Streets curiously Pav'd, and daily frequented with Swarms of People.

The In-land Countreys of Adel lie even and plain, * 1.617 onely here and there some easie and pleasant Ascents.

The Plains yield plentiful Returns to the Labouring and Industrious Hus∣bandman, answering his Expectation in the abundant Product both of Plants and Beasts, having withal the River Haoax, which takes its original out of that vast Range of Mountains on the Borders of Xaoa, and Ogge, and feeds the les∣ser Stream of Mach with Water. Some have not stuck to aver it to be little inferior to the Nile; but nothing near so long, because it overflows not above six thousand Paces: Neither doth it reach, how full of Water so ever

it be, to the Sea; but is quite drank up by the dry and thirsty Earth before it cometh so far.

The City Zeila hath no fresh Water within two days Journey, nor other Ground than Sand; but the Fields at further distance afford such Plenty of all things, that out of this Haven, and that of Barbara on the same Coast, Ships Transport Provisions to feed Adom and Ziden, especially Corn, Beans, Barley, and Oyl, not press'd out of Olives, but extracted from the Seed of a Plant call'd Zerzelin, or Gerzeluin, or Grugioline; but indeed no other than Sesamos.

Beasts breeding here, are Sheep of two sorts; * 1.618 one with Tails of twenty five pound weight, black Necks and Heads, and the remainder of their Bodies white; the other quite white, with Tails as long as a Mans Arm, and crook∣ed as a Vine-Branch. Some of their Cows have Horns like a Stag, black Hair, and wilde; others are red, but with one Horn on their Foreheads, of a Span and a half long, but turning backwards.

The Inhabitants as far as Barbara are Olivaster-colour'd; * 1.619 but from thence more to the North, about Zeila and Barrazan, they grow much blacker; natu∣rally quarrelsom, and apt to make Wars upon any trivial occasion.

They go cover'd from their Navel to their Knees with Cotton; but the upper part of their Bodies remain naked: onely Persons of Quality wear Coats, which in Arabick they call Bernuz.

This Dominion possesses much Gold and Ivory, besides such a liberal Provi∣sion of Victuals, that they feed their Neighbors of several other Countreys. They vend also Clothes, Myrrhe, Pepper, and Slaves.

The Merchants of Cambaya and Arabia carry to Barbara all sorts of Cloth, and Beads which they call Maramugos, Raisins, Dates, and many other things, which they exchange for Gold, Elephants-Teeth, and Slaves: And those of Quiloa, Melinde, Brava, Magadoxo, and Mombaza, barter these Commodities for Arabian-Horse.

The Natives are generally very stout, but badly Arm'd, * 1.620 though continu∣ally furnish'd therewith both from the Turks and Kings of Arabia, and such like Necessaries; for which their Prince returns many great Presents of Slaves taken in the Wars: for, to ingratiate himself with those Mahumetans, he makes continually fierce Wars upon the Christians about him, especially those of Abis∣sinie, for which the Moors esteem him a petty Saint; yet all their soothings can∣not so save him, but that sometimes the Christians send him home soundly beaten, teaching him to keep a more mannerly Distance.

The City of Barbara owns the Dominion of the Great Turk, * 1.621 as do most of all the famous Places upon the Coast of the Red Sea in Africa, to this Kingdom of Adel, where they say his Jurisdiction ends at the Haven of Meth; although some will have the whole Coast of Barnagas and Barrazan, nay all the Places near the Red Sea, stand under his Jurisdiction, without affording the Abyssines one Haven there: So that none can pass out of the Red Sea into Abyssine, but through the Turks Dominions.

The Island of Barbora.

OVer against the City Barbora, in the Red Sea, close by the Shore, lieth an Island of the same Name, exceedingly fruitful, and well stored with Cattel.

The Inhabitants are not White, as on the Coast of Magadoxo; but Black, and exactly Habited as those on the Main Land, whereof we lately made mention.

The Island of Socotora.

THe Island of Socotora, or Sacotora, otherwise call'd Sicuthora, discover'd by Fernando Bereyra, * 1.622 is by some taken for the Dioscorides of Ptolomy and Pliny, and by others for Curia Muria; though somewhat improperly, because that Isle lies over against the Main Coast of Arabia. * 1.623 This hath its Situ∣ation in twelve Degrees and fifty Minutes North Latitude, fifteen Miles Southward from the Cape of Guardafuy, formerly call'd Cape Aromata, and almost as far from the Mouth of the Red Sea.

Now the most Geographers include this Island of Socotora under Africa, for its nearness to that Coast; yet some, and those of Nubia, have reckon'd it among the Islands of Arabia Felix.

And as they cannot agree to which it belongs, * 1.624 so they differ no less in its Magnitude; some making it swell to sixty Spanish, while others straiten it to scarce fifteen Dutch Miles: But it seems the first comes nearer to the truth, because the latter Discoverers make it fifteen Miles long, and ten Miles broad at the narrowest; and Pirard reckons it fifteen French Miles in circumference.

The whole Island stands encompassed with exceeding high Rocks, which inclose therein divers fertile Valleys. On all sides Ships may find good An∣chorage, besides the many convenient Bays and Creeks, affording safe Roads: But it boasts two chief Havens, the one call'd Cora, and the other Benin.

Here is but onely one City, nam'd Sicuthora, seated at the foot of the Cape Treta, looking to the South, where the Xeque, or Turkish Governor makes his aboad. Others make Tamary the Chief Place, and the usual Dwelling of the Bassa. A third sort place here three Towns or Villages, inhabited by Arabians: But a fourth affirm, That the Natives have neither Towns, Villages, nor Hou∣ses; but abide in Holes or Caves in the Rocks.

They have many Temples or Churches, * 1.625 which they call Moquamos; but ve∣ry small, and so low, that without stooping none can come into the same. Every Church hath three Doors, and one Altar, on which stands a Cross, with two Sticks, made in form of Flower-de-luces.

The Situation of the Island so near the Line causes the Air not onely to be exceeding hot, * 1.626 but also unhealthy. And by reason of this excessive Heat, they have great want of Water: Yet notwithstanding there falls a great Mist in the Nights from the high stony Cliffs, to the great cooling and refreshing of the parched Earth: And although a few Rivers may be found, yet they lie at such

distances from the common Passages, and remain so difficult to be found, that many Travellers die for thirst; onely at the Sea side are Trenches, out of which the Arabians drink. And the Mountains, by reason of their excessive height, have their tops continually cover'd with Snow, and cloudy with Mists and Fogs.

The Soil, for want of Moisture, proves very barren, * 1.627 producing nothing (as some write) but Dates; for indeed none take care to Sowe any Corn, or Plant Fruits. On the contrary, * 1.628 in the Woods and Mountains breed many Bucks, Goats, Cows, Hogs, Catamountains, Wild Asses, Horses, Camelions, Wild Hens, or Pheasants, and Turtle-Doves.

But that which above all things makes this Island famous, * 1.629 is the Plant from which the Aloes Sicotrina cometh, and also for the great abundance of Dragons Blood brought thence, being no other than a Gum distilling from a Tree; the Indians call it Ber, and bruise it with an Iron in the growing Bark at a set time of the Year. The Sea-shore also produces much Ambergreece.

The Inhabitants of this Island are Arabians, or Native Sicotrians, * 1.630 which last the Arabians call Beduins, and are divided into two Generations: The one, * 1.631 ha∣ving Beduinsche Mothers, and Arabian Negro Fathers, keep at the Sea side, are black of Colour, curl'd Hair, tall of Stature, but very ill-favour'd: The others are unmix'd Beduins, and live within the Countrey, being whiter than Native Iudians. Some of them seem to have been born in Europe, by the tallness of their Statures, handsom Bodies, soundness of Constitution, and the Air of the Face; onely differing herein, that they let their Hair grow without cutting, which they suffer either to hang over their Necks and Shoulders, or else tie up or braid the same together behind. They are inconstant, mistrustful, * 1.632 and cow∣ardly; insomuch that a handful of Arabians will awe vast Multitudes of them. They have a great fear of all other people, which makes them shun converse with Foreigners, and are above measure lazy and idle, concerning themselves in nothing but Fishing, and feeding their Cattel.

Their common Food is Milk, Butter, Dates, and Flesh; * 1.633 but chiefly Milk boyl'd with Herbs, and serves them both for Diet and Physick. In stead of Rie, or Wheaten Bread, they use Rice, brought to them from other Places, and for want of that, eat Cakes made of Dates.

They wear certain Clothes by them call'd Cambolins, made of Bucks Hair, * 1.634 six Spans long and two broad, from their Girdle to their Knees, and over that another greater black and white Cloth, in form like a Cloke, which they wrap about from their Shoulders to their Knees, and never pull it off: Barbosa, on the contrary, writeth, That they go stark naked, onely with a Clout or Skin of a Beast before their Privacies, which Corsalis also affirms. Their Heads are bare, though Thevet saith they wear Shashes, as the Abyssine Christians. The Women wear the same Cambolins, and with it, from their Middle to their Feet, another great Mantle, without any thing on their Heads. These, as we men∣tion'd before, live in Holes and Caves, as the ancient Troglodites on the opposite Coast of Ethiopia, and sleep on the Ground, upon Buck-skins; and their manner of Salutation consists in the kissing one anothers Shoulders.

There are no Artists nor Handicrafts found amongst them; onely every one knows how to Weave the foremention'd Cambolins, or Hair-Clothes. They are ignorant and brutish beyond comparison; and as they know no better, so they hate to learn, and use no other Arithmetick than what they notch on Sticks.

The Men keep as many Women as they can maintain (though Osarius, * 1.635 upon a wrong information, scarcely allows one Woman to a Man) and part from

them when they think meet. When they have any Children, they may charge others with them, whom they please; and this nominated Father must receive and feed them as his own, and give them part of his Goods, as to his other Children. The Children thus given away, they call Children of Smoke; because when the Men and the Women conclude to dispose of a Child, they make a Fire at the Door of the House with green Wood, and whilst it begins to smoke, the Man runs out, crying with a loud voice, That the Child shall be given to such a Man, whose Name they declare; and so the Father and Mother carry it to him, and he takes care for it, as we mention'd before.

The Names of the Beduin-Men are, * 1.636 Lakaa, Sumaa, Xembe, Terremo, Xamaxana, Surrakaa, and other such like; so that John de Barras seems to have been mis∣inform'd, who says, They take the Names of St. Thomas, and other Apostles: But all the Women are call'd Maria; not out of Honor or Respect to the Virgin Mary, but because in their common Language Mary signifies A Woman.

They never stay to wait for the dying of their sick Friends; * 1.637 but when they guess them past recovery, they kill them: For they say, That between being quite dead, and beginning to die, is no difference. When the sick Persons see their Ends approach, they call their Children and nearest Relations, giving them many Counsels and Advices, among which the three following are most usual. First, That they should receive or embrace no other Doctrine or Religion, than those of their Forefathers. The second, That they would not make themselves familiar, or have to do with any one of another Countrey. The third, That they would take revenge of some Ene∣mies, which they name: Which last proves many times the occasion of divers Murders. When any Person is pursu'd by another that intends to kill him, and he cannot escape, he takes and drinks the white Juyce of a Tree growing in this Island, being the strongest Poyson that can be found, and which they always carry about them.

The Arabians of this Island, * 1.638 according to the Relation of Pyrard, Trade to Goa, Arabia, and other Places, where they sell their Dates and Rice, brought to them out of Ethiopia, very curious Mats made of Date-tree Leaves, and great abundance of Myrrhe; and from thence the European Merchants bring Aloes Sicotrina, and Dragons Blood, vulgarly known among Apothecaries by the name of Sanguis Draconis.

Here are few Fortifications; * 1.639 onely the King of Kaxem or Fartas erected a Fort or Bulwark, by the Village Tamara, with another of Stone on the Sea∣shore, which the Portuguese Conquer'd under the Command of one Trestan de Cunha, in the year Fifteen hundred six, or seven; who left it to the Charge of Alphonso Norogue, with a strong Garrison of Portuguese Soldiers: But the Island∣ers, instigated by the Mahumetans, to whom they were before bound in Marria∣ges, broke their Promise made to the King of Portugal; so that King Emanuel discerning the Nature of the People, and how the defending of this Fort cost more than it was worth, commanded the same to be demolished.

Their Arms are broad Hangers, * 1.640 with great Hilts: At their Girdle they wear also a Knife, of about three fingers broad, and sharp. The Hilts of the Hang∣ers are cover'd with Silver or Copper, or wound about with Wyre very neatly. Some carry Shields, and ordinary Guns, in the use whereof they are very ex∣pert.

The proper Language of these Beduins is so barbarous, * 1.641 as not to be under∣stood by others than themselves; but most of them speak Arabick, by daily Conversation with the Arabians.

The Government of this Island, according to Pyrard, * 1.642 belongs to a peculiar Xeque, sent thither by the Xerif of Arabia, and hath his aboad in Tamary. For∣merly the Turk possess'd this whole Isle, by Conquest thereof in the year Fif∣teen hundred thirty eight, at which time he made himself also Master of Aden. But the King of Kaxem, or Kajem, which some take to be the same with the King of Fartas, regain'd and held it, till the Xerif of Arabia won it from him, who sends thither a Xeque to Rule as his Substitute.

For the deciding of Differences, determining of Criminal Causes, and ma∣naging Affairs of State, Judges, which they call Caciz, or Hodomas, are appoint∣ed, from whom there is no Appeal. If any one has stoll'n a Buck or a Goat, out of necessity, or for meer hunger, he may, if he perceives the Owner of the Beast pursues him, fly to a Temple, by which he is clear'd; If coming to the Temple, and making a noise, another cometh to receive him, there may nothing further of prejudice be offer'd; but if none cometh to him, then they may pull him out, and cut off his Hand, alledging, That the Temple would not serve him for his defence, because none would come to receive him.

There are some that to this time hold an opinion, * 1.643 That the Islanders of So∣cotora call themselves Christians, and particularly shew great Honor to St. Tho∣mas, from whom they boast to have received the Christian Faith; and have been induced to believe the same, by seeing the Cross upon their Altars, and the Ob∣servations and Fastings of their Caciz, and other Marks of Christianity: But the contrary was afterwards found; for certain it is, That they have no know∣ledge of Christ, or of Matters concerning the Christian Religion, except their shewing great Honour to the Cross, and because they have it upon Altars in the Church; but being ask'd a Reason thereof, they answer, That it was taught them by Tradition from their Fathers.

They worship the Moon, because they hold her to be the Mother and Cause of all things; and therefore in great Droughts they set one among them in a certain place, and make a Circle round about him, out of which he must not stir, upon pain of death, but there must continue ten days worshipping the Moon; within which time if it doth not Rain, they cut off his Hand. Be∣fore the beginning of Lent, all the most Eminent assemble, and offer Sacrifice to the Moon, of an hundred Goats and Kids Heads. They observe Lent like the Christians; but they begin it with the New Moon in April, and keep the So∣lemnity sixty days; during which time they eat no Milk, Butter, Flesh, nor Fish, but onely Herbs and Dates, or Rice and Honey, which they buy in the Cities of the Arabians. They are so zealous Observers of this Fast, that if they find any to have broken it, for the first time they cut off two Fingers of his Right-hand; the second time, the whole Hand; and the third time, the Arm.

Every Temple, of which there are many, hath a Caciz, call'd by them Hoda∣mo, that is, a Governor or Judge in Church-matters; but holds the Office but one Year, which he enters upon by receiving a Staff, the Badge of his Authori∣ty, and wearing always a Cross of a Span and half long about him, which he may not part with upon pain of the loss of his Hand. In the Temples, whereinto at the Rising and Setting of the Moon they enter, they use a Stick of two or three Spans long, upon which with another Stick they give certain Strokes, thrice in the Day, and thrice in the Night; held by them for a Work of great Holiness: Afterwards they go in Procession three times round about the Church-yard, turning thrice after every Circuit; then they take an Iron Pan, made in form of a plain deep Scale, hanging upon three Chains,

into which they put Splinters of sweet Wood, and hold the Bason over the Fire: then they first perfume the Altar thrice, afterwards the Temple Doors, and say with a loud voice some Prayers in the Temple, and in the Church-yard, re∣questing of the Moon to do good to them onely, and no other People: At the performance of this Solemnity, the Hodamo holdeth upon the Altar a lighted Candle made of Butter (for they have none of Wax or Tallow;) and there∣fore they have in their Temples Dishes of Butter, wherewith they also every day anoint the Cross and other Sticks lying upon the Altar. They go upon a certain day of the year, with the greatest Cross, in Procession round about the Temple, and cause it to be carry'd by one chosen out of the whole Assembly, whose Fingers after the ending of the Procession they chop off, and present him with a little Stick, with certain marks upon it, for a token, that he should be prejudic'd by no body; whereupon thenceforth he is held in much greater ho∣nor than others.

They follow in many Churches the Ceremonies and Customs of Nestorius, because they were for a long time Govern'd by Ecclesiastical Rulers which came from Babylon.

They have no set-Day of the Week to go into their Temples, but assemble on the Procession-days, or when any new occasion calls them.

They are Circumcis'd like the Moors; and if they know any one that is not Cir∣cumcis'd, they cut off his Fingers; for no Uncircumcis'd may enter into their Temples: yea, the very Women themselves clap their hands at their Husbands, if they be not Circumcis'd. They bear a great hatred against all Christians; ne∣vertheless some are of opinion, that they have suck'd in much of the Heresie of the Jacobites, and that formerly many were Converted by Francis Xavier.

According to the Observations of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from the King of England to Persia, there were in the Year Sixteen hundred and fifteen, upon this Island four sorts of People, that is, Arabians, not Natives, but Shipt over thither, together with many others, by order of the King of Kaxem, when they subdu'd it. These never appear before the Sultan without kissing his Hand. The second sort are a kind of Slaves, who labor continually in his service, and prepare and dress the Aloes. The third are Beduins, the most antient Inhabi∣tants, against whom a long time the King of Socotora made War. They live in great numbers upon the Mountains, and are at this day left in Peace, upon pro∣mise to shew their Obedience, and let their Children be instructed in the Do∣ctrine of Mahomet.

The fourth being indeed the right Proprietors of the Countrey, are a gross Body'd and miserable People, which have no constant abode; in the night lying in the Woods, and going always stark naked: they live by Roots, hold no con∣verse with others, and lead a life almost like Beasts.

Trogloditica, or New Arabia.

THe Modern Geographers, as Maginus and others, name the Countrey or Space of Land, lying between the Nile and the Red-Sea, properly New Arabia; but the Inhabitants, according to Castaldus, call it Sirfi. The Antients nam'd it Trogloditica, and Ptolomy, The Countrey of the Arabians and Egy∣ptians. The Inhabitants were by the Grecians call'd Ichthiophagi, that is, Fish-eaters;

by Eustathius, Erembers; by Diodorus, Molgers and Bolgers; and in the holy Scripture, according to the testimony of Arias Montanus, they are call'd Ghanamim; and by Pliny, Therotho's, that is to say, Hunters, for their swiftness and dexterity in Hunting.

In the bounding of this Countrey great diversity arises amongst Geographers: Ptolomy extends Trogloditick Arabia, from the City Suez, by the Red-Sea, three; or according to Peter de la Valla, scarce a days Journey and a half from Cairo to Mount Elephas, at this day call'd Felte: so that he compriseth under it the Sea-Coast of the Kingdoms of Barnagas and Adel. Some extend the Limits in the South, to the Territory of Brava, the Kingdom of Magadoxo, and the River Quilanzi, yet make it begin at the forenam'd Suez; but a third sort narrow it to the Cape of Guardafuy, and some to the Island Mazua in the Red-Sea.

The chiefest Places, as you go from North to South, near Suez, according to Maginus, are these (though Belloon gives them to the Nether-Egypt:) The Haven and Point of Pharos, where they say the Children of Israel went over the Red-Sea on dry ground; the Seven Wells, call'd Sette Pozzi in Italian; the Haven of Alkosser, or Chessir. Sanutus on the other side compriseth a part of this New Arabia, viz. all the aforesaid Places from Suez to Chessir, under Egypt, wherein we have follow'd those who have formerly described Egypt.

They call the Tract of Land from Chessir to the Sea, lying over against the Haven of Suaquena, Batrazan. In eighteen Degrees and forty Minutes lieth the Haven of Suaquem, in the Territory of Canphila, in a Hollow of the Sea, close by the People call'd Nubiers and Bello's.

The whole Coast of this Countrey lieth clogged with high, rough, and un∣passable Mountains, so set back to back, that no access can be had to the In∣land Countreys of Ethiopia and the Abyssines, but through the Haven of Ercocco and Suachem, and that so troublesom, that Travellers can scarce go above three or four English miles in a day.

The Inhabitants at this day are made up of a mixture of Turks, Mahumetans, and Arabians.

The Haven of Arquico, or Ercocco.

THe Haven of Ercocco, otherwise call'd Arquico, and by Jarrick held to be the Adule of the Antients, lieth against the Island of Mazuan, five or six miles from Mount Bisan, in fifteen Degrees and a half: It was for∣merly a Port belonging to the Abyssines, but since that taken from them by the Turks, to whom at present they are subject.

The heat of the Air causeth an infertility in the Soyl as to Corn and Grain, but as well those as the Maritime Parts afford several sorts of Trees, as Wil∣lows, Jujubes, and Tamarinds; which two last are no despicable Commodity to the Europeans.

The Inhabitants are Blacks, and go all naked, with a Skin onely before their Privacies: As well Men as Women have upon their Heads Coverings resem∣bling a Coronet, and the Hair bound up round. The Haven submits to the Commands of a Turkish Bashaw, * 1.644 and by that means inhabited principally with Mahumetans, taking up the rooms of Christians by them dispossess'd.

In the Red-Sea lie the several Islands of Mazuan, Paimuras, Delacca, Mayot, Suachem, and some other.

The Island of Mazula.

ON the Coast of Habex in the Red-Sea, you discover the Island Mazua, or Mazuan, possessed by the Turks at this day, who in the year Fifteen hun∣dred fifty and seven, did take it away from the Abyssines. Thevet places it half a French mile distant over against Ercocco, in fifteen Degrees and forty Mi∣nutes North-Latitude.

Between Mazuan and Donkale the Turks had formerly a Castle call'd Dafalo; which the Abyssines took and sleighted. When the South-winds blow hard, no Ships without danger can approach the Coast.

The Islanders are good Soldiers; but the Women give themselves over to loose living, accounting it no dishonor to have many Gallants while they re∣main unmarry'd; nor is their profession of Mahumetanism a small encourage∣ment thereto, the greatest promises of their Prophet aiming at no higher satisfactions.

The Island of Dalaca.

THevet calls this Island Dalaca; others, Dalaccia, Delaqua, Delalaca, Dala∣qualacari, and Daleck: It lies below Mazua, a little more Southerly; but by Sanutus set opposite to Mazua; five miles from the Main Land of the Abyssines, in sixteen Degrees North-Latitude, saith Andrew Corsali; but ac∣cording to Huez, in fourteen Degrees and twenty Minutes. Marmol placeth it it eighteen Miles from Mazua, and gives it one City, of the same Name with the Island. Sanutus extends it in compass to eighty Italian miles, four reckon'd to one of the Dutch; but Corsali accounts it twenty French miles.

This Island boasts a healthy Air, and plenty of fresh Water, which hap∣pening very seldom in these Countreys, invites many People thither. 'Tis high and barren, but pleasant, for both the Hills and Dales have lovely Groves of Trees, yielding a delightful shadow, but no Fruit, contrary to Thevet, who makes this Island abound with Oranges and Lemons; adding moreover, that in March the whole Air is perfum'd with a most delicious scent. There grows little Corn or Grain, but what they have (as also Honey, Barley, and Butter) they fetch from the Abyssines; yet they have very fair Pastures, and full of Grass, which feed Cows, Camels, and many Goats.

The Inhabitants, an expert and Warlike People, are either black or tawny of Colour, sowre of Countenance, treacherous and inveterate Enemies of the Turks, against whom they hold Wars continually. They speak distinctly, bear no regard to foreign Merchants; from whom, notwithstanding their most serious engagements, they steal whatever they can meet with.

Their Language is more difficult and obscure than the Turkish, Persian, or Indian; but their Habit, if so we may call it, differs not from the last before∣mention'd.

Their Government seems Monarchical, * 1.645 one Person giving the Rule both to this and the adjacent Islands.

Their Religion is as great a mixture as their People, * 1.646 of whom most take Christianity from the Abyssines; some are Mamalukes, fled thither after the loss of Egypt; besides Arabian Mahumetans, of the Persian Sect, and others pretended Musselmans, professed Enemies to the other.

The Island of Bebel-Mandel.

PAssing from North to South you arrive at an Island now known by the Name of Bebel-Mandel, but antiently call'd The Island of Diodorus, situate in the midst of the Red-Sea, which it divides into two Channels, not above a mile from the Main Land of Arabia, and the like distance from Abyssinia towards the Cape of Zeila; so that the King of Egypt formerly shut up this Passage on his side, with an Iron Chain drawn from one to the other. Pigafet will have one of the Channels towards the West-side to be five and twenty Italian miles, or five Dutch miles wide, with a good Bottom, and the com∣mon Passage for great Ships; but the other scarce a large Dutch mile wide, full of Rocks, Shelves, and Banks of Sand. It lieth in twelve Degrees and fifty Minutes North-Latitude. Thevet calls it Muim, and makes it two French miles in compass, having some few Trees, but otherwise wholly barren. For∣merly the Abyssines and Arabians of Aden made great Wars against the Possessors thereof, by which it became subject sometimes to the Christians, and then to the Moors, till at last the Portuguese utterly laid it waste, and so left it without hope of re-peopling.

The Island Suachem, or Suaquem, by Marmol call'd Suaquum, standing, accord∣ing to Thevet, East and West, contains fifteen or sixteen French miles in com∣pass; but Rosaccio makes it much less, and divides it almost from the City of the same Name, beautifi'd with many fair built Houses. Maginus supposeth the Haven of this Place to be the Sebastian Mouth mention'd by Ptolomy.

Over against Adel in the Red-Sea, lieth the Island Barbora, already men∣tion'd.

About Suez inhabit two sorts of Christians, one Circumcised, nam'd Jacobites; the other Uncircumcised, commonly call'd Melaquiters.

The Inhabitants of these Islands, and the Places on the Coast of the Red-Sea, Trade with the Arabians over against it.

Sanutus saith, that in the Haven of Chessir they have many Huts made with Mats, wherein they stow the Wares carry'd from Cairo to Mecha.

The Moors of Ziden convey to Suez all sorts of Spicery, Drugs, precious Ambergreece, which they bring from the Indies, and transport from thence upon Camels to Cairo.

In like manner the Merchants bring from Cambaya into Asia, and from all Arabia to Barbora, all sorts of Clothes, Beads, or Motamugo's, Elephants-Teeth, and other Commodities.

The Red-Sea, by the Moors call'd Bahar Queizum; by others, The Arabian Bay, * 1.647 and Streights of Mecha, the Burial-place of Mahomet, lieth between the Coast of Ethiopia and Abyssine in Africa, so that it parts Asia and Africa.

At the entrance of this Sea lie two Harbors, the one call'd Guardafuy; and the other, Fartague: The breadth between them is sixty Leagues or Spanish Miles,

and the length five hundred; that is, an hundred to the Straights of Bebel-Mandel, and four hundred from thence to Suez, where it ends.

Geminiano a Jesuit averr'd, that in former times the Red-Sea overflow'd all Egypt, and by its Water took away the colour from the green springing Soyl; but after the Water began to fall away and lessen, it remain'd at length with so little moisture, that the Sun-beams, which shine down in that place with very great power, make a reflexion of the red Sand from the bottom, which seem∣ing to give a tincture to the Water from its ruddiness, gave the occasion of de∣nominating it the Red-Sea; though Pliny will have it from a King, who Reigned here, and in Greek was call'd Erithreos, that is, Red. To this Opinion inclin'd Pomponius Mela, Aristotle, and others: But Quintus Curtius is of a contrary Judg∣ment, maintaining, that this Sea was call'd the Red-Sea from the Egyptians, who were drown'd in it when they pursu'd the Israelites, in the Year after the Crea∣tion, Two thousand three hundred fifty and four, according to the computa∣tion of Michael Zapuler, in his Description of the Holy Land. Johannes de Castro, formerly Vice-Roy to the King of Portugal in the Indies, affirms, that the red colour of this Sea, ariseth from the great quantity of Corral growing at the bottom. Others, that the Rivers which pour into this in the midst of Winter, having flow'd through Countreys of a red colour'd Earth, make the Water seem red, and consequently gave it the Name. Certain it is, that all the Wa∣ter is like that in the great Sea, and saltish.

In this Sea befell the Miracle which the holy Scriptures mention, when Moses with his Rod commanded a Way for the passage of the Israelites, to the number of six hundred thousand Men, (Women and Children not reckon'd:) and wherein Pharaoh, in pursuit of them, as he supposed flying, twelve thou∣sand Foot-Soldiers, and fifty thousand Horsemen, were swallow'd.

In this Sea are many strange and remarkable things, as Trees growing, Branches of Corral, Mushroms, Meremaids, flying Fishes, and other wondrous Creatures. But how great diligence soever they have used, none could ever take any of them, although common, and at all times seen along the Coast; for the Egyptians believe, that they and theirs, by the killing such a Creature, should die within a year, as they say, they have found by experience. And out of that conceit, when in the Year Sixteen hundred thirty one, one was taken alive in the Nyle, by the City Rosetta, the Bey or Governor of the City, com∣manded it presently to be put into the Water again, though a Venetian had bought it for five and twenty Piasters, and rather than incur the hazard, re∣turn'd him his Money.

Gaspar de San Bernardino, in his Journey to the Indies by Land, saith, the En∣trances into the Red-Sea, lie in twelve Degrees and forty Minutes, being no other than two Points of Land, one on Africa side, call'd Rosbel, and the other on the Coast of Arabia, lying right over against it, nam'd Ara. In the midst of the Passage lieth the Island Mium, between which and the Main Land of Asia, runneth a Channel nine or ten Yards deep, and a large League broad; as an∣other on Africa side shoots down to the depth of sixteen Yards, but useless, be∣cause it hath no convenient Haven for Ships, and many dangerous Shelves and Banks.

From this Port inwards, the Sea widens all along till towards the end, where it grows narrower and narrower; the broadest part is not above thirty Leagues, or Spanish Miles.

Petrus della Valla, a Noble-man of Rome, in the second Part of his Travels, describes the Red-Sea as followeth:

In some places of the Red-Sea, unpassable for its shallowness, they gather up a finer sort of Corral than the common; especially useful to be set in deep Caves and Grotts, because it represents perfectly the shapes of little Trees, with great delight to the Eyes of curious beholders. In these Vegetables many times, by varying colours, or transparency, Nature plays and sports it self with great curiosity.

The Inhabitants of these Parts pass this Sea in little Barques, made of Planks joyn'd together, not with Nails, but certain Pitcht Towe.

Many Commodities are brought in these Boats to Cairo, which the Proprie∣tors take in pieces afterwards, and sell the Planks at dear Rates, and then re∣turn home by Land to their Houses.

This way of building Boats without Iron-Nails, seems to be no Novelty, considering Strabo the Geographer many Ages since speaks of Leather-Boats, used by the Arabians for pastime in the Red-Sea: As also of some other made of Osiers and Brush-wood, with which the Egyptians passed over the Nyle.

I somewhat marvel'd (says the foremention'd Petrus della Valla) at the Name this Sea beareth, for that it is not as the Black-Sea, which is so call'd from the blackness or muddiness of the Water: For the Water of this is so clear and pure, that Men may see to the bottom, and shews afar off like other Seas. The Sand is also like that of other Seas, so that it hath borrow'd its Name no otherwise than from the King Erithreos, who (as Strabo saith) lieth buried in an Island of the South-Sea, and hath given the Name of Red to the whole; and not onely to the Arabian Gulf: but whether so or no we will not dispute, but content our selves, that the holy Scriptures calleth it so in se¦veral places.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Nether Ethopia.
• * 1.2

  Borders of the Kingdom of Lovango.
• * 1.3

  Or Spanish miles. Others.
• * 1.4

  Lovangiri.
• * 1.5

  Lovangomongo.
• * 1.6

  Chilongo.
• * 1.7

  Trade.
• * 1.8

  The Countrey of Piri.
• * 1.9

  The antient division of the Countrey of Lovango.
• * 1.10

  The Manners of the old Inhabitants.
• * 1.11

  Mani signifies Prince.
• * 1.12

  Original of the Name of Lovangiri.
• * 1.13

  The chief City of Lo∣vango.
• * 1.14

  Bigness.
• * 1.15

  Form.
• * 1.16

  The Court of the King.
• * 1.17

  Housholdstuff.
• * 1.18

  The Countrey bordering on Lovango.
• * 1.19

  Cape Niger.
• * 1.20

  The Road of Majumba.
• * 1.21

  The Mountain Metute.
• * 1.22

  The Village Majumba.
• * 1.23

  Trade
• * 1.24

  Government.
• * 1.25

  Prospect of Majumba at Sea.
• * 1.26

  The Territory of Sette.
• * 1.27

  Plants.
• * 1.28

  Language.
• * 1.29

  Arms.
• * 1.30

  The Territory of Dingy.
• * 1.31

  Plants.
• * 1.32

  Melando.
• * 1.33

  Cassia Fistula.
• * 1.34

  Oranges, Lemons, and Coco-Nuts.
• * 1.35

  Achy.
• * 1.36

  Grain, or Pulse.
• * 1.37

  Matombe.
• * 1.38

  The Seed ground.
• * 1.39

  How their Land is Plow'd.
• * 1.40

  The living Creatures.
• * 1.41

  The kind of Inhabitants.
• * 1.42

  Their Cloathing.
• * 1.43

  Fit for Handkerchiefs.
• * 1.44

  Their Ornament.
• * 1.45

  Food.
• * 1.46

  Their Oath, or Swearing.
• * 1.47

  Bondes Root, or Adjura∣tion Root.
• * 1.48

  How the Bonde-drink is drank.
• * 1.49

  Marriage.
• * 1.50

  ••••nerals for the Dead.
• * 1.51

  The Funerals for the Great Men.
• * 1.52

  How the cause of any Man's death is searched after.
• * 1.53

  Their Inheritance.
• * 1.54

  Employments.
• * 1.55

  Money.
• * 1.56

  Riches.
• * 1.57

  Trade.
• * 1.58

  Government.
• * 1.59

  The Power of the King.
• * 1.60

  Justice.
• * 1.61

  The King hath many Wives.
• * 1.62

  A Mother is appropria∣ted for the King.
• * 1.63

  Her Authority.
• * 1.64

  The Inheritance of the Crown.
• * 1.65

  The King's Cloathing.
• * 1.66

  Customs of the King's in Eating and Drinking.
• * 1.67

  He that s••••s the King Eat must die.
• * 1.68

  The King's Banquetting-house.
• * 1.69

  The Royal Throne.
• * 1.70

  None may see the King 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 1.71

  〈…〉〈…〉.
• * 1.72

  The King's Seat.
• * 1.73

  Fanne.
• * 1.74

  Playing Instruments.
• * 1.75

  How the Noble-men sa∣lute the King with leaping.
• * 1.76

  Cryers.
• * 1.77

  Before the Kings Cloth sit Dwarfs.
• * 1.78

  Their Complexion.
• * 1.79

  Their Generating.
• * 1.80

  Voscius lib. de Orig Nili. & lior. Fluminum.
• * 1.81

  How Embassadors or No∣ble-men speak to the King.
• * 1.82

  What is done when a Leo∣pard is taken.
• * 1.83

  The Leopards Gaul is Poyson.
• * 1.84

  The Funeral of the Kings
• * 1.85

  The Nobility are very much honor'd.
• * 1.86

  Religion, or Worship.
• * 1.87

  Field-Devils are pray'd unto by those of Lovange.
• * 1.88

  In what shapes they shew themselves.
• * 1.89

  Several of their Idolgods are Field-Devils.
• * 1.90

  How they make their Mo∣kise.
• * 1.91

  An opinion concerning mans soul.
• * 1.92

  They believe a man can∣not die a natural death.
• * 1.93

  How the injunction is made.
• * 1.94

  Injunctions, how manifold they are.
• * 1.95

  Injunctions about mens Clothes.
• * 1.96

  Of the Women.
• * 1.97

  The vertue ascrib'd to these Injunctions.
• * 1.98

  What Mokisie fignifies.
• * 1.99

  The vanity of the Mokisie.
• * 1.100

  Why the King is call'd Mo∣kisie.
• * 1.101

  The higher a man is, the more Mokisies he hath.
• * 1.102

  All Conjurers are call'd Ganga.
• * 1.103

  Mokisie, Boesy-batta.
• * 1.104

  A master of Slaves.
• * 1.105

  How the service of these Mokisies is perform'd.
• * 1.106

  Sorcerers, or Doojes.
• * 1.107

  Makongo.
• * 1.108

  Mymy.
• * 1.109

  Kossy.
• * 1.110

  Kymaye.
• * 1.111

  Injamy.
• * 1.112

  Kitouba.
• * 1.113

  Panza.
• * 1.114

  Pongo.
• * 1.115

  Meanzy.
• * 1.116

  Circumcision.
• * 1.117

  Borders of the Kingdom of Ansiko.
• * 1.118

  Two sorts of Sandal-wood.
• * 1.119

  Beasts.
• * 1.120

  Constitution of the Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.121

  Food.
• * 1.122

  Apparel.
• * 1.123

  Marriage.
• * 1.124

  Language.
• * 1.125

  Money.
• * 1.126

  Arms.
• * 1.127

  Religion.
• * 1.128

  Government.
• * 1.129

  The Jages how they are bred.
• * 1.130

  Boundaries of the King∣dom of Kakongo.
• * 1.131

  Chief City.
• * 1.132

  The River of Kakongo.
• * 1.133

  The Village Molemba.
• * 1.134

  Constitution of the Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.135

  Trade.
• * 1.136

  A Command on the King.
• * 1.137

  The Territory of Sarri.
• * 1.138

  The Territory of Lemba.
• * 1.139

  Borders of the Kingdom of Goy.
• * 1.140

  Punto de Paomerino.
• * 1.141

  The Bay Cabinde.
• * 1.142

  Constitution of the Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.143

  Destruction of the Kirg∣dom of Goy.
• * 1.144

  Borders of the Kingdom of Congo.
• * 1.145

  a So we render it in En∣glish.
• * 1.146

  Bigness.
• * 1.147

  Division.
• * 1.148

  Dominion.
• * 1.149

  Koansa.
• * 1.150

  Kalle.
• * 1.151

  Kanvangongo
• * 1.152

  Motemmo Kanvangong.
• * 1.153

  a So we may call them
• * 1.154

  Kahende.
• * 1.155

  Oanda.
• * 1.156

  Quina.
• * 1.157

  Lovato and Quintingo.
• * 1.158

  The dividing of the Do∣minions.
• * 1.159

  The Head City Panga.
• * 1.160

  Government.
• * 1.161

  The Teritory of Congo.
• * 1.162

  Sundo.
• * 1.163

  The Territory of Pango.
• * 1.164

  The Territory of Batta.
• * 1.165

  a Spanish Miles.
• * 1.166

  The Territory of Conde.
• * 1.167

  The Territory of Pembo.
• * 1.168

  The King's Court.
• * 1.169

  Houses.
• * 1.170

  Churcher.
• * 1.171

  Cloyster.
• * 1.172

  Schools.
• * 1.173

  Fountains.
• * 1.174

  The River Vese.
• * 1.175

  Rivers.
• * 1.176

  The River Zair.
• * 1.177

  In Zair Le several Islands
• * 1.178

  The Island of Bommo.
• * 1.179

  The Manners of the Islan∣ders.
• * 1.180

  Marriage.
• * 1.181

  An Idol of Money in Quuntalla.
• * 1.182

  Government.
• * 1.183

  The Cape of Padron.
• * 1.184

  Pampus Rock.
• * 1.185

  The River Lelunde.
• * 1.186

  Ambris.
• * 1.187

  A Ferry.
• * 1.188

  Enkokoquematari.
• * 1.189

  Loze.
• * 1.190

  Lihongo.
• * 1.191

  The River Danda.
• * 1.192

  The River Bengo.
• * 1.193

  The Climate of Air.
• * 1.194

  The Seasons of Rain.
• * 1.195

  Congo is watry.
• * 1.196

  The King of the Land.
• * 1.197

  Plants.
• * 1.198

  Luko.
• * 1.199

  Mille, or Mazza.
• * 1.200

  Beasts.
• * 1.201

  Elephants.
• * 1.202

  Azebro.
• * 1.203

  Empalanga.
• * 1.204

  Envoeri.
• * 1.205

  Makoko.
• * 1.206

  Engri, or Tygers.
• * 1.207

  Beavers.
• * 1.208

  Emgola, or Wild-Boars.
• * 1.209

  Rocbucks.
• * 1.210

  They are by those of Con∣go and Ambonde, a forbid∣den food.
• * 1.211

  Peacocks.
• * 1.212

  Bees.
• * 1.213

  Pismires.
• * 1.214

  Eusingie.
• * 1.215

  In Congo are no Gold-Mines.
• * 1.216

  But of Copper.
• * 1.217

  Silver-Mines and other.
• * 1.218

  Stones.
• * 1.219

  The kind of the Inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.220

  Their condition.
• * 1.221

  They are inclin'd to steal∣ing.
• * 1.222

  They are given to poyson one another.
• * 1.223

  They are severely pu∣nish'd.
• * 1.224

  Apparel.
• * 1.225

  Their Play.
• * 1.226

  Their maintainance.
• * 1.227

  The Congoians do not ride on horseback, but are carry∣ed by men.
• * 1.228

  The cause of the death of Man or Woman is laid upon the Survivor.
• * 1.229

  Inheritance.
• * 1.230

  The Accompt of their Year.
• * 1.231

  Housholdstuff.
• * 1.232

  Riches.
• * 1.233

  The Revenue of the King.
• * 1.234

  Simboes or Horn Shells are their Money.
• * 1.235

  Medicines for Cure.
• * 1.236

  Sicknesses.
• * 1.237

  Zandel-wood.
• * 1.238

  Government.
• * 1.239

  Council of State.
• * 1.240

  Punishment of Offenders.
• * 1.241

  The punishment of Death is also with Confiscation of all his Goods.
• * 1.242

  Arms.
• * 1.243

  Confused disorder in fight∣ing.
• * 1.244

  Government.
• (a) 1.245

  As was said before, so we call them.
• * 1.246

  The King's Titles.
• * 1.247

  His Dominion.
• * 1.248

  His Feeding of the Nobi∣lity, glorious.
• * 1.249

  With what State he goes abroad.
• * 1.250

  Hollanders sent to the King in Embassy.
• * 1.251

  The State of the King.
• * 1.252

  His Cloathing.
• * 1.253

  He wears a white Cap.
• * 1.254

  When the King is desirous to have Taxes, he lets his Cop blow off.
• * 1.255

  The Queen is call'd Ma∣ni-mombada.
• * 1.256

  Taxes for the Queen, how rais'd.
• * 1.257

  Her place of aboad.
• * 1.258

  Inheritance of the Crown
• * 1.259

  The manner of the King's Coronation.
• * 1.260

  There is Copper in Sougo.
• * 1.261

  Wars between the King of Songo and the Earl of Souho.
• * 1.262

  The Overthrow of the King of Congo.
• * 1.263

  A second Overthrow.
• * 1.264

  A new War.
• * 1.265

  A third Overthrow.
• * 1.266

  The Duke of Bamba ta∣ken Prisoner.
• * 1.267

  Ambassadors sent both from Congo and Songo to Brazile.
• * 1.268

  Presents.
• * 1.269

  The Congo's Ambassa∣dors come into the Mether∣lands.
• * 1.270

  Their Religion.
• * 1.271

  The Duke of Songo is Baptiz'd.
• * 1.272

  There are many Idola∣ters found amongst the Congians, but more Hy∣pocrites.
• * 1.273

  Those of Oando call themselves Christians.
• * 1.274

  The Jages overcome the Kingdom of Congo.
• * 1.275

  Government.
• * 1.276

  Okongo.
• * 1.277

  The Kingdom of Fungeno.
• * 1.278

  Trade.
• * 1.279

  The King's State.
• * 1.280

  The King's riches.
• * 1.281

  His power.
• * 1.282

  The Kingdom of Giring∣bo••nba.
• * 1.283

  The trade of the Portu∣guese to Pombo.
• * 1.284

  Which is drove by Slaves, or Fombo's.
• * 1.285

  Why the Whites cannot go to Pombo.
• * 1.286

  The Dukedom of Ambu∣illa.
• * 1.287

  It is not subjected to the Kingdom of Congo.
• * 1.288

  Angola is the name of the Governors, and not of the Countrey.
• * 1.289

  It is rightly call'd Dongo.
• * 1.290

  Borders.
• * 1.291

  The River Quansa.
• * 1.292

  Its original.
• * 1.293

  Course.
• * 1.294

  The Island Massander.
• * 1.295

  Motchiama.
• * 1.296

  The River Lucala.
• * 1.297

  Territories of the King∣dom of Augola.
• * 1.298

  The City Lovando Saint Paulo.
• * 1.299

  Ilamba.
• * 1.300

  Dominions of the Terri∣tory of Ilamba.
• * 1.301

  Ikollo.
• * 1.302

  Ensaka.
• * 1.303

  Massingan.
• * 1.304

  The Tertltory of Kam∣bamba.
• * 1.305

  The Territory of Em∣bakka.
• * 1.306

  Constitution of the Air, and Sicknesses.
• * 1.307

  Pox.
• * 1.308

  Beriberi.
• * 1.309

  Boasi.
• * 1.310

  Embasser.
• * 1.311

  Small Pox.
• * 1.312

  The nature of the Soil
• * 1.313

  Plants.
• * 1.314

  Anones.
• * 1.315

  Guajaves.
• * 1.316

  Arosses.
• * 1.317

  Gegos.
• * 1.318

  Tamarinds.
• * 1.319

  Pepper.
• * 1.320

  Pon del Colra.
• * 1.321

  Mandihoka.
• * 1.322

  The Shape.
• * 1.323

  How the Root Mendi∣koka is ground to Meal.
• * 1.324

  One Aroben is thirty two Pounds.
• * 1.325

  The Gumm Almesiga.
• * 1.326

  The Tree call'd Mo∣suma.
• * 1.327

  The Tree Likonde.
• * 1.328

  Sugar-Canes.
• * 1.329

  Gestait. Tulp. Obs. 3. ••. 56.
• * 1.330

  Goulongo.
• * 1.331

  Poysonous Beasts.
• * 1.332

  Minia, or Embamma.
• * 1.333

  How they are taken.
• * 1.334

  A Medicine in them.
• * 1.335

  The Inhabitants are Idle.
• * 1.336

  Several sorts of People.
• * 1.337

  Their Houses.
• * 1.338

  Their Food.
• * 1.339

  Language.
• * 1.340

  Marriage.
• * 1.341

  Funeral.
• * 1.342

  The punishment of Of∣fences.
• * 1.343

  Clothes are their Money.
• * 1.344

  Simbo's, or little Horn-Shells.
• * 1.345

  Trade.
• * 1.346

  Anna Xinga cannot come to the Crown.
• * 1.347

  She is several times over∣••••••••••.
• * 1.348

  She keeps her self secret.
• * 1.349

  She is warlike.
• * 1.350

  Her Idolatry.
• * 1.351

  She sacrificeth men.
• * 1.352

  Ruin'd Oando.
• * 1.353

  Angola Sodesie is chosen King.
• * 1.354

  Dwelling plac•• of the Kings.
• * 1.355

  The King onely may keep Peacocks.
• * 1.356

  The Dominions of Ango∣la are govern'd by Senasea.
• * 1.357

  Their Command.
• * 1.358

  Their dwelling places.
• * 1.359

  The co••quer'd Sovasen must pay tribute to the Por∣tuguese.
• * 1.360

  The City Lovando Sante Paulo overcome.
• * 1.361

  For what reason it was undertaken by the Nether∣landers.
• * 1.362

  The Fleet set Sail from Fernabuck.
• * 1.363

  They come to Cabo Negro.
• * 1.364

  The enemy leaves the City
• * 1.365

  Booty.
• * 1.366

  Meneses complains of wrong.
• * 1.367

  The answer of the Nether∣landers.
• * 1.368

  An agreement between the Enemy and the Nether∣landers.
• * 1.369

  The Enemy began to be supported.
• * 1.370

  They were deseated.
• * 1.371

  The discontent of the Por∣tuguese upon subduing the City.
• * 1.372

  Lovando subdu'd again by the Portuguese.
• * 1.373

  The Fort Molls.
• * 1.374

  Religion.
• * 1.375

  Ganga's, or worshippers of the Devil.
• * 1.376

  The Angolians become Christians.
• * 1.377

  Government of the City Lovando Sante Paulo by the Portuguese.
• * 1.378

  The Revenues of the King of Portugal from Angola.
• * 1.379

  Church-Government.
• * 1.380

  The Island Lovando.
• * 1.381

  Towns call'd Libar.
• * 1.382

  Of its Bark, Clothes are woven.
• * 1.383

  Pigafet.
• * 1.384

  Here is the fishing of Simbos.
• * 1.385

  The Island Lovando is un∣der Congo.
• * 1.386

  Barra de Korimba.
• * 1.387

  Punto de Palmarinho.
• * 1.388

  Sleepers-Haven.
• * 1.389

  The Territory of Quisama.
• * 1.390

  It is divided into diver Dominiens.
• * 1.391

  Trees Alikenda.
• * 1.392

  Trees Quacumburez.
• * 1.393

  Beasts.
• * 1.394

  Want of Water.
• * 1.395

  Salt-Mynes.
• * 1.396

  Iron-Mynes.
• * 1.397

  Trade.
• * 1.398

  The Territory of Libolo.
• * 1.399

  Cabo Ledo.
• * 1.400

  Hen-Bay.
• * 1.401

  Rio Lengo.
• * 1.402

  Good Bay.
• * 1.403

  Under Benguelle are seven Villages.
• * 1.404

  The Beast Abada.
• * 1.405

  The Horn is good a∣gainst Poyson.
• * 1.406

  Name.
• * 1.407

  Borders.
• * 1.408

  Rivers.
• * 1.409

  Linschot.
• * 1.410

  Mountains of the Moon.
• * 1.411

  Crystal Mountains.
• * 1.412

  Calo Negro.
• * 1.413

  The spreading of the Coast.
• * 1.414

  Government.
• * 1.415

  The Countrey of the Kaffers.
• * 1.416

  Davitii Lahasse Ethiopie. p. 475.
• * 1.417

  The original of the War between the Gorinbaiqua's and the Notherlanders.
• * 1.418

  A Skirmish between five Hottentots and five Nether∣landers.
• * 1.419

  Epkamma taken.
• * 1.420

  His Discourse concern∣ing the beginning of the Wars with the Netherlan∣ders.
• * 1.421

  In what manner the War was laid aside.
• * 1.422

  Herry comes to the Fort.
• * 1.423

  The difference decided.
• * 1.424

  The Gorinchaiqua's are treated in the Fort with Brandy and Tobacco.
• * 1.425

  Their strange Dance.
• * 1.426

  The Princes are present∣ed with Gists.
• * 1.427

  Cochoqua's.
• * 1.428

  They are under one King.
• * 1.429

  Great and Little Carigu∣riqua's.
• * 1.430

  Chainouqua's.
• * 1.431

  They are under a Prince.
• * 1.432

  Cabona's.
• * 1.433

  Cannibals,
• * 1.434

  Sonquas
• * 1.435

  Maintain themselves by Hunting.
• * 1.436

  Food.
• * 1.437

  Houses.
• * 1.438

  Clothes.
• * 1.439

  Namaqua's.
• * 1.440

  Netherlanders sent to the Namaqua's to find out gold
• * 1.441

  Thirteen more sent cut to the same end.
• * 1.442

  Clothes.
• * 1.443

  Government.
• * 1.444

  Brygouda's,
• * 1.445

  Are populous.
• * 1.446

  Heusaqua's.
• * 1.447

  Maintain themselves by planting the Root Dacha.
• * 1.448

  Cabo de Bona Esperanza, or Cape of Good Hope.
• * 1.449

  Cabo das Aiguilhas, or Needle-Cape.
• * 1.450

  Cabo Falso, or False Cape.
• * 1.451

  Table-Mountain, or Ta∣ble-Cape.
• * 1.452

  Fragosos.
• * 1.453

  Lion-Mountain.
• * 1.454

  Wind-Mountain.
• * 1.455

  Soldanha-Bay. Memoires de Thomas Roe.
• * 1.456

  Table-Bay.
• * 1.457

  The Fort or strength of the Netherland West-India Company.
• * 1.458

  Flesh-Bay.
• * 1.459

  Fish-Bay.
• * 1.460

  Muscle-Bay.
• * 1.461

  Faire-Bay.
• * 1.462

  Rio de Santo Christian.
• * 1.463

  Rivers.
• * 1.464

  Sweet-Rivers.
• * 1.465

  Air.
• * 1.466

  Wind.
• * 1.467

  Plants.
• * 1.468

  The Cape-Tulip.
• * 1.469

  Sea-Plants.
• * 1.470

  Cattel.
• * 1.471

  Fowls.
• * 1.472

  Pinguyns.
• * 1.473

  Flamengo's.
• * 1.474

  Fishes.
• * 1.475

  The Constitution of the Kaffers, or Hottentots.
• * 1.476

  They are Unlearned.
• * 1.477

  They are kind and faith∣ful.
• * 1.478

  a Like our Quakers.
• * 1.479

  The Clothing of the Men.
• * 1.480

  The Habit of the Wo∣men.
• * 1.481

  Food.
• * 1.482

  Drink.
• * 1.483

  Employment.
• * 1.484

  Marriage.
• * 1.485

  Funerals.
• * 1.486

  Inheritance.
• * 1.487

  Incest.
• * 1.488

  How they are punish'd.
• * 1.489

  Punishment for killing and wounding.
• * 1.490

  Their Houses.
• * 1.491

  Language.
• * 1.492

  Trade.
• * 1.493

  Government.
• * 1.494

  Religion.
• * 1.495

  Spilber. Voyage. 1601.
• * 1.496

  The Empire of Monomo∣tapa.
• * 1.497

  Borders.
• * 1.498

  Others.
• * 1.499

  The bigness.
• * 1.500

  Chief City.
• * 1.501

  Houses.
• * 1.502

  The Kings Palace.
• * 1.503

  The Residence of the A∣mazones.
• * 1.504

  The Kingdom of Chitam∣bo.
• * 1.505

  Air.
• * 1.506

  Plants.
• * 1.507

  Beasts.
• * 1.508

  Gold Mines.
• * 1.509

  The Constitution of the Inhabitants.
• * 1.510

  The Kings Clothing.
• * 1.511

  Apparel.
• * 1.512

  Honor shew'd to the dead.
• * 1.513

  Jos. Barros, lib. 10.
• * 1.514

  Revenue of the King.
• * 1.515

  Riches. Ja rik lib ca 42. Sanut. lib. 1.
• * 1.516

  Arms.
• * 1.517

  Government. Osor. de Rebus Emanuel. lib. 4.
• * 1.518

  Title of Honor. Jos. Barres. lib. 10. ca. 1.
• * 1.519

  Religion.
• * 1.520

  The building Simbaoe.
• * 1.521

  Gold Mines.
• * 1.522

  Clothes.
• * 1.523

  Riches.
• * 1.524

  Government.
• * 1.525

  Jarrik. lib. 5. c. 9.
• * 1.526

  The borders of the King∣dom of Monoe-Mugi. Pigafet. lib. 2. c. 9. Conge. Jarrik. lib. 3. c. 3.
• * 1.527

  Cloathing.
• * 1.528

  Borders.
• * 1.529

  The chief City Sofala.
• * 1.530

  Geoge. Nub.
• * 1.531

  The River Magnice.
• * 1.532

  Joseph. Barros. lib. 10. c. 1.
• * 1.533

  The River Quama.
• * 1.534

  Grain Gold.
• * 1.535

  The Countrey of Matuka.
• * 1.536

  The Air.
• * 1.537

  Sanus.
• * 1.538

  Scbiq. Spilberg 1601.
• * 1.539

  Beasts.
• * 1.540

  Abundance of Gold.
• * 1.541

  The constitution of the Inhabitants.
• * 1.542

  Clothing.
• * 1.543

  Language.
• * 1.544

  The Riches. Navig di. T••o. Lopez.
• * 1.545

  Hence King Solomon setch•••• his Gold. Moq. lib. 4.
• * 1.546

  Voyage of Spilb.
• * 1.547

  Arms. Osor. lib. 4. Spilber.
• * 1.548

  Dominion.
• * 1.549

  Religion.
• * 1.550

  In the fourth Book of the Expedition of the King Ema∣nuel.
• * 1.551

  The differences about the right place of Ophir.
• * 1.552

  Jan. Barr. lib. 13. c. 4.
• * 1.553

  Lib. 12. Borders.
• * 1.554

  The River Quilmanzi.
• * 1.555

  Air.
• * 1.556

  The constitution of the Inhabitants.
• * 1.557

  Food.
• * 1.558

  Riches.
• * 1.559

  Religion.
• * 1.560

  L'Ambassade de D. Gar∣vas Figuerra en Perse.
• * 1.561

  Oybo.
• * 1.562

  Language.
• * 1.563

  Their Customs.
• * 1.564

  Plants.
• * 1.565

  Animals.
• * 1.566

  The Constitution of the Inhabitants.
• * 1.567

  Food.
• * 1.568

  Language.
• * 1.569

  Riches.
• * 1.570

  Air.
• * 1.571

  Unfruitfulness of the Soyl.
• * 1.572

  Beasts.
• * 1.573

  The Nature of the Inha∣tants.
• * 1.574

  Apparel.
• * 1.575

  Omaments.
• * 1.576

  Food.
• * 1.577

  Language.
• * 1.578

  Trade.
• * 1.579

  Arm••.
• * 1.580

  Situation. Plgaf. 2. b. 8. H.
• * 1.581

  Sanut. lib. 12.
• * 1.582

  Beasts.
• * 1.583

  Food.
• * 1.584

  Apparel.
• * 1.585

  Language.
• * 1.586

  Riches.
• * 1.587

  Religion.
• * 1.588

  Borders.
• * 1.589

  The City Membaza.
• * 1.590

  Air.
• * 1.591

  Plants.
• * 1.592

  Beasts.
• * 1.593

  Nature.
• * 1.594

  Apparel.
• * 1.595

  Food.
• * 1.596

  Government.
• * 1.597

  Religions
• * 1.598

  Borders.
• * 1.599

  The chief City.
• * 1.600

  Plants.
• * 1.601

  Beasts.
• * 1.602

  Nature of the Inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.603

  Apparel.
• * 1.604

  Arms.
• * 1.605

  Honor shown to the King.
• * 1.606

  Their manner of execu∣ting Justice.
• * 1.607

  Religion.
• * 1.608

  Government.
• * 1.609

  Government.
• * 1.610

  Religion.
• * 1.611

  Borders.
• * 1.612

  Ograbra.
• * 1.613

  Government
• * 1.614

  Religion.
• * 1.615

  Borders.
• * 1.616

  Bigness.
• * 1.617

  The nature of the Soil.
• * 1.618

  Beasts.
• * 1.619

  Nature of the Inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.620

  Arms.
• * 1.621

  Government.
• * 1.622

  J. Barros. Ramusse.
• * 1.623

  •• Situation.
• * 1.624

  Bigness.
• * 1.625

  Churche••.
• * 1.626

  Air.
• * 1.627

  Constitution of the Soil.
• * 1.628

  Beasts.
• * 1.629

  Aloes Sicotrina.
• * 1.630

  Several Inhabitants.
• * 1.631

  Nature.
• * 1.632

  Constitution.
• * 1.633

  Food.
• * 1.634

  Apparel.
• * 1.635

  Marriage.
• * 1.636

  The names of the men.
• * 1.637

  The Beduins kill their sick.
• * 1.638

  Trade.
• * 1.639

  Strength.
• * 1.640

  Arms.
• * 1.641

  Language.
• * 1.642

  Government.
• * 1.643

  Religion.
• * 1.644

  Sanut••••.
• * 1.645

  Government.
• * 1.646

  Religion.
• * 1.647

  Red-Sea. Gaspar. Sam. Bernar∣dino.